GFZ-63010EN B-63010EN GE Fanuc CNC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i-Model A Parameter Manual Presented By: CNC Center For Product Needs Please Visit: http://www.cnccenter.com/ OR Email: sales@cnccenter.com OR Call: 1-800-963-3513 GE Fanuc CNC Manuals www.cnccenter.com GE Fanuc Automation Computer Numerical Control Products Series 16i / 18i / 160i / 180i – Model A Parameter Manual GFZ-63010EN/01 April 1997 GFL-001 Warnings, Cautions, and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use. In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used. Caution Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken. Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment. This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made. GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply. ?Copyright 1997 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. B–63010EN/01 PREFACE p–1 PREFACE The mode covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are : Product Name Abbreviations FANUC Series 16i–TA 16i–TA T series or 1 FANUC Series 160i–TA 160i–TA T series (two–path control) *1 FANUC Series 16i–MA 16i–MA M series or 1 FANUC Series 160i–MA 160i–MA M series (two–path control) *1 FANUC Series 18i–TA 18i–TA T series or 1 FANUC Series 180i–TA 180i–TA T series (two–path control) *1 FANUC Series 18i–MA 18i–MA M series FANUC Series 180i–MA 180i–MA M series NOTE Some functions described in this manual may not be applied to some products. For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS (B–63002EN). The table below lists manuals related to MODEL A of Series 16i, Series 18i, Series 160i, Series 180i. In the table, this manual is maked with an asterisk (*). Table 1 Related manuals Manual name Specification Number DESCRIPTIONS B–63002EN CONNECTION MANUAL (Hardware) B–63003EN CONNECTION MANUAL (Function) B–63003EN–1 OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR LATHE B–63004EN OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR MACHINING CENTER B–63014EN MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–63005EN PARAMETER MANUAL B–63010EN * PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler/Macro Executor) B–61803E–1 FAPT MACRO COMPILER PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–66102E FANUC Super CAP T OPERATOR'S MANUAL B–62444E–1 FANUC Super CAP M OPERATOR'S MANUAL B–62154E FANUC Super CAP M PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–62153E CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION I FOR LATHE OPERATOR'S MANUAL B–61804E–1 CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE OPERATOR'S MANUAL B–61804E–2 B–63010EN/01 Table of Contents c–1 PREFACE p–1 1. DISPLAYING PARAMETERS 1 2. SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI 2 3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE 4 3.1 OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE 5 3.2 INPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE 6 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 7 4.1 PARAMETERS OF SETTING 9 4.2 PARAMETERS OF READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE, REMOTE BUFFER, DNC1, DNC2, AND M–NET INTERFACE 12 4.2.1 Parameters Common to all Channels 13 4.2.2 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0) 14 4.2.3 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1) 15 4.2.4 Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2) 15 4.2.5 Parameters of Channel 3 (I/O CHANNEL=3) 16 4.3 PARAMETERS OF DNC1/DNC2 INTERFACE 18 4.4 PARAMETERS OF M–NET INTERFACE 21 4.5 PARAMETERS OF DNC1 INTERFACE 24 4.6 PARAMETERS OF ONLINE CUSTOM SCREEN 26 4.7 PARAMETERS OF DATA SERVER 28 4.8 PARAMETERS OF POWER MOTION MANAGER 29 4.9 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL/INCREMENT SYSTEM 30 4.10 PARAMETERS OF COORDINATES 38 4.11 PARAMETERS OF STROKE CHECK 43 4.12 PARAMETERS OF THE CHUCK AND TAILSTOCK BARRIER (T SERIES) 47 4.13 PARAMETERS OF FEEDRATE 51 4.14 PARAMETERS OF ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL 62 4.15 PARAMETERS OF SERVO 80 4.16 PARAMETERS OF DI/DO 107 4.17 PARAMETERS OF MDI, DISPLAY, AND EDIT 111 4.18 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS 135 4.19 PARAMETERS OF PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION 144 4.20 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE CONTROL 149 4.21 PARAMETERS OF TOOL COMPENSATION 181 4.22 PARAMETERS OF GRINDING–WHEEL WEAR COMPENSATION 192 4.23 PARAMETERS OF CANNED CYCLES 193 4.23.1 Parameter of canned Cycle for Drilling 193 4.23.2 Parameter of Thread Cutting Cycle 197 4.23.3 Parameter of Multiple Repetitive Canned Cycle 197 4.23.4 Parameters of Peck Drilling Cycle of a Small Diameter 200 4.24 PARAMETERS OF RIGID TAPPING 204 4.25 PARAMETERS OF SCALING/COORDINATE ROTATION 225 B–63010EN/01 Table of Contents c–2 4.26 PARAMETERS OF UNI–DIRECTIONAL POSITIONING 227 4.27 PARAMETERS OF POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION 228 4.28 PARAMETERS OF NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL 230 4.29 PARAMETERS OF INDEXING INDEX TABLE 233 4.30 PARAMETERS OF INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION 235 4.31 PARAMETERS OF EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION 238 4.32 PARAMETERS OF STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION 239 4.33 PARAMETERS OF BALL SCREW EXTENSIONAL COMPENSATION 241 4.34 PARAMETERS OF CUSTOM MACROS 243 4.35 PARAMETERS OF PATTERN DATA INPUT 250 4.36 PARAMETERS OF POSITIONING BY OPTIMUL ACCELERATION 251 4.37 PARAMETERS OF SKIP FUNCTION 253 4.38 PARAMETERS OF AUTOMATIC TOOL COMPENSATION (T SERIES) AND AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (M SERIES) 258 4.39 PARAMETERS OF EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 259 4.40 PARAMETERS OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY 260 4.40.1 Parameters of Graphic Display/Dynamic Graphic Display 260 4.40.2 Parameters of Graphic Color 263 4.41 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAYING OPERATION TIME AND NUMBER OF PARTS 265 4.42 PARAMETERS OF TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT 268 4.43 PARAMETERS OF POSITION SWITCH FUNCTIONS 273 4.44 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL OPERATION AND AUTOMATIC OPERATION 275 4.45 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE FEED, HANDLE INTERRUPTION AND HANDLE FEED IN TOOL AXIAL DIRECTION 277 4.46 PARAMETERS OF REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER 282 . . . . 4.47 PARAMETERS OF SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL 284 4.48 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAM RESTART 288 4.49 PARAMETERS OF HIGH–SPEED MACHINING (HIGH–SPEED CYCLE MACHINING/HIGH–SPEED REMOTE BUFFER) 289 4.50 PARAMETERS OF POLYGON TURNING 292 4.51 PARAMETERS OF THE EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT 296 4.52 PARAMETERS OF THE HOBBING MACHINE AND SIMPLE ELECTRIC GEAR BOX 297 4.53 PARAMETERS OF ATTITUDE CONTROL 302 4.54 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC 305 4.55 PARAMETERS OF TWO–PATH CONTROL 310 4.56 PARAMETERS OF CHECKING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN TOOL POSTS (TWO–PATH CONTROL) 311 4.57 PARAMETERS OF PATH AXIS REASSIGNMENT 314 4.58 PARAMETERS OF ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL 325 4.59 PARAMETERS OF B–AXIS CONTROL 326 4.60 PARAMETERS OF SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL 329 4.61 PARAMETERS OF CHECK TERMINATION 335 4.62 PARAMETERS OF CHOPPING 336 4.63 PARAMETERS OF HIGH–SPEED HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL BY RISC (M SERIES) 338 4.63.1 Parameters of Acceleration and Deceleration before Interpolation 338 B–63010EN/01 Table of Contents c–3 4.63.2 Parameters of Automatic Velocity Setting 340 4.63.3 Parameters of Axis Control 345 4.64 OTHER PARAMETERS 346 4.65 PARAMETERS OF MAINTENANCE 350 APPENDIX A. CHARACTER CODE LIST 353 B–63010EN/01 1. DISPLAYING PARAMETERS 1 1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS Follow the procedure below to display parameters. (1) Press the SYSTEM function key on the MDI as many times as required, or alternatively, press the SYSTEM function key once, then the PARAM section display soft key. The parameter screen is then selected. PARAMETER (FEEDRATE) O0001 N12345 1401 RDR JZR RF0 LRP RPD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1402 DLF HFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1410 DRY RUN FEEDRATE 10000 1411 INIT.CUTTING F 0 1420 RAPID FEEDRATE X 15000 Y 15000 Z 15000 > MEM STRT MTN FIN *** 10:02:35 [PARAM] [DGNOS] [ PMC ] [SYSTEM] [(OPRT)] Cursor Soft key display (section select) POS PROG OFFSET SETTING CUSTOM SYSTEM MESSAGE GRAPH Function key Return menu key Soft key Continuous menu key (2) The parameter screen consists of multiple pages. Use step (a) or (b) to display the page that contains the parameter you want to display. (a) Use the page select key or the cursor move keys to display the de- sired page. (b) Enter the data number of the parameter you want to display from the keyboard, then press the [NO.SRH] soft key. The parameter page containing the specified data number appears with the cur- sor positioned at the data number. (The data is displayed in re- verse video.) NOTE If key entry is started with the section select soft keys displayed, they are replaced automatically by operation select soft keys including [NO.SRH]. Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key can also cause the operation select keys to be displayed. > MEM STRT MTN FIN *** 10:02:34 [NO.SRH] [ ON:1 ] [ OFF:0 ] [+INPUT] [INPUT ] ← Soft key display (section select) ← Data entered from the keyboard B–63010EN/01 2. SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI 2 2 SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI Follow the procedure below to set parameters. (1) Place the NC in the MDI mode or the emergency stop state. (2) Follow the substeps below to enable writing of parameters. 1. To display the setting screen, press the SETTING function key as many times as required, or alternatively press the SETTING function key once, then the SETTING section select soft key. The first page of the setting screen appears. 2. Position the cursor on "PARAMETER WRITE" using the cursor move keys. SETTING (HANDY) O0001 N00010 PARAMETER WRITE = (0:DISABLE 1:ENABLE) TV CHECK = 0 (0:OFF 1:ON) PUNCH CODE = 0 (0:EIA 1:ISO) INPUT UNIT = 0 (0:MM 1:INCH) I/O CHANNEL = 0 (0–3:CHANNEL NO.) 0 3. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft keys. > MDI STOP 10:03:02 [NO.SRH] [ ON:1 ] [ OFF:0 ] [+INPUT] [INPUT] ← Soft key display (section select) 4. To set "PARAMETER WRITE=" to 1, press the ON:1 soft key, or alternatively enter 1 and press the INPUT soft key. From now on, the parameters can be set. At the same time an alarm condi- tion (P/S100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE) occurs in the CNC. (3) To display the parameter screen, press the SYSTEM function key as many times as required, or alternatively press the SYSTEM function key once, then the PARAM section select soft key. (See "1. Displaying Parameters.") (4) Display the page containing the parameter you want to set, and position the cursor on the parameter. (See "1. Displaying Parameters.") (5) Enter data, then press the [INPUT] soft key. The parameter indicated by the cursor is set to the entered data. B–63010EN/01 2. SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI 3 [Example] 12000 [INPUT] PARAMETER (FEEDRATE) O0001 N00010 1401 RDR JZR RPD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1402 JRV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1410 DRY RUN FEEDRATE 1412 0 1420 RAPID FEEDRATEX 15000 Y 15000 Z 15000 12000 > MDI STOP *** *** ALM 10:03:10 [NO.SRH] [ ON:1 ] [ OFF:0 ] [+INPUT] [INPUT] Cursor Data can be entered continuously for parameters, starting at the selected parameter, by separating each data item with a semicolon (;). [Example] Entering 10;20;30;40 and pressing the INPUT key assigns values 10, 20, 30, and 40 to parameters in order starting at the parameter indicatedby the cursor. (6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) as required. (7) If parameter setting is complete, set "PARAMETER WRITE=" to 0 on the setting screen to disable further parameter setting. (8) Reset the NC to release the alarm condition (P/S100). If an alarm condition (P/S000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) occurs in the NC, turn it off before continuing operation. B–63010EN/01 3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE 4 3 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE This section explains the parameter input/output procedures for input/output devices connected to the reader/puncher interface. The following description assumes the input/output devices are ready for input/output. It also assumes parameters peculiar to the input/output devices, such as the baud rate and the number of stop bits, have been set in advance. B–63010EN/01 3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE 5 (1) Select the EDIT mode or set to Emergency stop. (2) To select the parameter screen, press the SYSTEM function key as many times as required, or alternatively press the SYSTEM function key once, then the PARAM section select soft key. (3) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft keys, then press the forward menu key located at the right–hand side of the soft keys to display another set of operation select keys including PUNCH. PARAMETER (FEEDRATE) O0001 N00010 1401 RDR JZR RPD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1402 JRV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1410 DRY RUN FEEDRATE 1412 0 1420 RAPID FEEDRATEX 15000 Y 15000 Z 15000 12000 > MDI STOP *** *** ALM 10:03:10 [NO.SRH] [ON:1] [OFF:0] [+INPUT] [INPUT] Cursor State display Soft key display (operation select) (4) Pressing the [PUNCH] soft key changes the soft key display as shown below: > EDIT STOP 10:35:03 CANCEL] [ EXEC ] (5) Press the [EXEC] soft key to start parameter output. When parameters are being output, "OUTPUT" blinks in the state display field on the lower part of the screen. > EDIT STOP 10:35:04 OUTPUT CANCEL] [ EXEC ] ← OUTPUT blinking (6) When parameter output terminates, "OUTPUT" stops blinking. Press the RESET key to interrupt parameter output. 3.1 OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE B–63010EN/01 3. INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE 6 (1) Place the NC in the emergency stop state. (2) Enable parameter writing. 1. To display the setting screen, press the SETTING function key as many times as required, or alternatively press the SETTING function key once, then the SETTING section select soft key. The first page of the setting screen appears. 2. Position the cursor on "PARAMETER WRITE" using the cursor move keys. 3. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft keys. 4. To set "PARAMETER WRITE=" to 1, press the ON:1 soft key, or alternatively enter 1, then press the [INPUT] soft key. From now on, parameters can be set. At the same time an alarm condi- tion (P/S100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE) occurs in the NC. (3) To select the parameter screen, press the SYSTEM function key as many times as required, or alternatively press the SYSTEM key once, then [PARAM] soft key. (4) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select keys, then press the forward menu key located at the right–hand side of the soft keys to display another set of operation select soft keys including [READ]. > EDIT STOP ALM 10:37:30 [ ] [ READ ] [PUNCH] –EMS– ALM ← Soft key display ← State display (5) Pressing the [READ] soft key changes the soft key display as shown below: > EDIT STOP ALM 10:37:30 CANCEL] [ EXEC ] –EMS– ALM (6) Press the [EXEC] soft key to start inputting parameters from the input/output device. When parameters are being input, "INPUT" blinks in the state display field on the lower part of the screen. > EDIT STOP ALM 10:37:30 INPUT CANCEL] [ EXEC ] –EMS– ALM ← INPUT blinking (7) When parameter input terminates, "INPUT" stops blinking. Press the RESET key to interrupt parameter input. (8) When parameter read terminates, "INPUT" stops blinking, and an alarm condition (P/S000) occurs in the NC. Turn it off before continuing operation. 3.2 INPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 7 4 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS Parameters are classified by data type as follows: Table 4 Data Types and Valid Data Ranges of Parameters Data type Valid data range Remarks Bit 0 or 1 Bit axis 0 or 1 Byte 0 to 127 In some parameters, signs are Byte axis 0 to 255 , g ignored. Word 0 to 32767 In some parameters, signs are Word axis 0 to 65535 , g ignored. 2–word 0 to 99999999 2–word axis 0 to 99999999 NOTE 1 For the bit type and bit axis type parameters, a single data number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a different meaning. 2 The axis type allows data to be set separately for each control axis. 3 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general range. The range varies according to the parameters. For the valid data range of a specific parameter, see the explanation of the parameter. (1) Notation of bit type and bit axis type parameters [Example] #7 0000 #6 #5 SEQ #4 #3 #2 INI #1 ISO #0 TVC Data #0 to #7 are bit positions. Data No. (2) Notation of parameters other than bit type and bit axis type 1023 Servo axis number of a specific axis Data. Data No. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 8 5010 Tool nose radius compensation ... Tool compensation C ... T series M series 3401 T series M series GSC GSB DPI DPI #7 #6 #0 1450 F1 digit feed ... T series M series NOTE 1 The bits left blank in 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS and parameter numbers that appear on the display but are not found in the parameter list are reserved for future expansion. They must always be 0. 2 Parameters having different meanings between the T series and M series and parameters that are valid only for the T or M series are indicated in two levels as shown below. Parameters left blank are unavailable. Example1 Parameter 5010 has different meanings for the T series and M series. Example2 DPI is a parameter common to the M and T series, but GSB and GSC are parameters valid only for the T series. Example3 The following parameter is provided only for the M series. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 9 #7 0000 #6 #5 SEQ #4 #3 #2 INI #1 ISO #0 TVC Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Bit TVC TV check 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed ISO Code used for data output 0 : EIA code 1 : ISO code INI Unit of input 0 : In mm 1 : In inches SEQ Automatic insertion of sequence numbers 0: Not performed 1: Performed NOTE When a program is prepared by using MDI keys in the part program storage and edit mode, a sequence number can automatically be assigned to each block in set increments. Set the increment to parameter 3216. #7 0001 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 FCV #0 Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Bit FCV Tape format 0: Series 16 standard format 1: Series 15 format NOTE Programs created in the Series 15 tape format can be used for operation on the following functions: 1 Subprogram call M98 2 Thread cutting with equal leads G32 (T series) 3 Canned cycle G90, G92, G94 (T series) 4 Multiple repetitive canned cycle G71 to G76 (T series) 5 Drilling canned cycle G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89 (M series) 6 Cutter compensation C (M series) When the tape format used in the Series 15 is used for this CNC, some limits may add. Refer to the Series 16i/18i /160i/180i–MODEL A OPERATOR'S MANUAL . 4.1 PARAMETERS OF SETTING 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 10 #7 0002 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SJZ Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Bit SJZ Manual reference position si performed as follows: 0 : When no reference position has been set, reference position return is performed using deceleration dogs. When a reference position is alreadyset,referencepositionreturnisperformedusingrapidtraverse and deceleration dogs are ignored. 1 : Reference position return is performed using deceleration dogs at all times. Note SJZ is enabled when bit 3 (HJZ) of parameter No.1005 is set to 1. When a reference position is set without a dog, (i.e. when bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No.1002 is set to 1 or bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No.1005 is set to 1) reference position return after reference position setting is performed using rapid traverse at all times, regardless of the setting of SJZ. #7 RMVx 0012 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 MIRx Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Bit axis MIRx Mirror image for each axis 0 : Mirror image is off. 1 : Mirror image is on. RMVx Releasing the assignment of the control axis for each axis 0 : Not released 1 : Released NOTE RMVx is valid when RMBx in parameter 1005#7 is 1. (1) Parameters related to setting 0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 35 The CNC provides the following interfaces for data transfer to and from the host computer and external input/output devices: F Input/output device interface (RS–232C serial port) F Remote buffer interface (RS–232C/RS–422) F DNC1/DNC2 interface B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 11 In addition, data can be transferred to and from the Power Mate via the FANUC I/O Link. This parameter selects the interface used to transfer data to and from an input/output device. Setting Description 0, 1 RS–232C serial port 1 2 RS–232C serial port 2 3 Remote buffer interface 4 Memory card interface 5 Data server interface 10 DNC1/DNC2 interface, OSI–Ethernet 20 21 22 Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Data is transferred between the CNC and a Power M i ( 0 1 ) i h FANUC I/O Li k | 34 35 | Group 14 Group 15 Mate in group n (n: 0 to 15) via the FANUC I/O Link. NOTE 1 An input/output device can also be selected using the setting screen. Usually, the setting screen is used. 2 The specifications (such as the baud rate and the number of stop bits) of the input/output devices to be connected must be set in the corresponding parameters for each interface beforehand. (See Section 4.2.) I/O CHANNEL = 0 and I/O CHANNEL = 1 represent input/output devices connected to RS–232C serial port 1. Separate parameters for the baud rate, stop bits, and other specifications are provided for each channel. 3 The input/output unit interface may be referred to as the reader/punch interface. RS–232C serial port 1 and RS–232C serial port 2 are also referred to as channel 1 and channel 2, respectively. The remote buffer interface is also referred to as channel 3. Mother board RS–232–C serial port 1 R232–1(JD36A) RS–232–C serial port 2 R232–2(JD36B) R422-1(JD6A) R232-3(JD28A) Serial communication board Remote buffer board DNC1 board DNC2 board I/O CHANNEL=0, 1 (Channel 1) I/O CHANNEL=2 (Channel 2) I/O CHANNEL=3 (Channel 3) I/O CHANNEL=3 (Channel 3) RS-232-C I/O device RS-232-C I/O device RS-232-C I/O device (when a remote buffer or DNC2 board is used) RS-422 I/O device (when a remote buffer or DNC1 board is used) 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 12 This CNC has three channels of input/output device interfaces. The input/output device to be used is specified by setting the channel connected to that device in setting parameter I/O CHANNEL. The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of an input/output device connected to a specific channel must be set in parameters for that channel in advance. For channel 1, two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output device data are provided. The following shows the interrelation between the input/output device interface parameters for the channels. Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/ output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/ output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/ output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/ output device Baud rate Selection of protocol Selection of RS–422 or RS–232C, and other data I/ O CHANNEL =0 : Channel1 =1 : Channel1 =2 : Channel2 =3 : Channel3 Specify a channel for an in- put/output device. I/O CHANNEL=1 (channel 1) 0020 0101 0102 I/O CHANNEL=0 (channel 1) 0103 0111 0112 I/O CHANNEL=3 (channel 3) 0113 0121 0122 I/O CHANNEL=2 (channel 2) 0123 0131 0132 0133 0134 0135 I/O CHANNEL Input/output channel number (parameter No.0020) ↓ Fig.4.2 I/O Device Interface Settings 4.2 PARAMETERS OF READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE, REMOTE BUFFER, DNC1, DNC2, AND M–NET INTERFACE B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 13 0024 Port for communication with the PMC ladder development tool (FAPT LADDER–II) [Data type] Byte This parameter sets the port to be used for communication with the PMC ladder development tool (FAPT LADDER–II). 0 : HSSB (COP7) 1 : RS–232C serial port 1 (JD36A) 2 : RS–232C serial port 2 (JD36B) 3 : Remote buffer interface (RS–232C) (JD28A) #7 ENS 0100 #6 IOP #5 ND3 #4 #3 NCR #2 #1 CTV #0 Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Bit CTV: Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program. 0 : Performed 1 : Not performed NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code 0 : LF, CR, CR are output. 1 : Only LF is output. ND3 In DNC operation, a program is: 0 : Read block by block. (A DC3 code is output for each block.) 1 : Read continuously until the buffer becomes full. (A DC3 code is output when the buffer becomes full.) NOTE In general, reading is performed more efficiently when ND3 set to 1. This specification reduces the number of buffering interruptions caused by reading of a series of blocks specifying short movements. This in turn reduces the effective cycle time. IOP Specifies how to stop program input/output operations. 0 : An NC reset can stop program input/output operations. 1 : Only the [STOP] soft key can stop program input/output operations. (An reset cannot stop program input/output operations.) ENS Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code 0 : An alarm is generated. 1 : The NULL code is ignored. 4.2.1 Parameters Common to all Channels 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 14 #7 NFD 0101 #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2 [Data type] Bit type SB2 The number of stop bits 0 : 1 1 : 2 ASI Code used at data input 0 : EIA or ISO code (automatically distinguished) 1 : ASCII code NFD Feed before and after the data at data output 0 : Output 1 : Not output NOTE When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1. 0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0) [Data type] Byte Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0, with one of the set values listed in Table 4.2 (a). Table 4.2.2 (a) Set value and Input/Output Device Set value Input/output device 0 RS–232–C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4) 1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/ B2) 2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1) 3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adaptor FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H 4 RS–232–C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4) 5 Portable tape reader 6 FANUC PPR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H 0103 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0) [Data type] Byte Set baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0, with a set value in Table 4.2 (b). Table 4.2.2 (b) Set value Baud rate (bps) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Set value Baud rate (bps) 7 8 9 600 1200 2400 10 12 4800 9600 19200 11 50 100 110 150 200 300 4.2.2 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 15 #7 NFD 0111 #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2 [Data type] Bit TheseparametersareusedwhenI/OCHANNELissetto1. Themeanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101. 0112 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1) [Data type] Byte Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 1, with one of the set values listed in Table 4.2 (a). 0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 1) [Data type] Byte Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1, with a value in Table 4.2 (b). #7 NFD 0121 #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2 [Data type] Bit TheseparametersareusedwhenI/OCHANNELissetto2. Themeanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101. 0122 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2) [Data type] Byte Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2, with a value in Table 4.2 (a). 0123 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 2) [Data type] Byte Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2, with a value in Table 4.2 (b). 4.2.3 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1) 4.2.4 Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2) 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 16 #7 NFD 0131 #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit TheseparametersareusedwhenI/OCHANNELissetto3. Themeanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101. 0132 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 3) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 3, with a number in Table 4.2 (a). 0133 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 3) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 3 according to the table 4.2 (c). NOTE Valid data range: 1 to 15 (up to a baud rate of 86400 bps) for the RS–422 interface or 1 to 12 (up to a baud rate of 19200 bps) for the RS–232C interface. Table 4.2.5 Baud Rate Settings Set value Baud rate (bps) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Set value Baud rate (bps) 9 10 11 2400 9600 12 14 38400 76800 13 50 100 110 150 200 300 600 1200 7 8 14 4800 19200 86400 4.2.5 Parameters of Channel 3 (I/O CHANNEL=3) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 17 #7 0134 #6 #5 CLK #4 NCD #3 #2 SYN #1 PRY #0 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit PRY Parity bit 0: Not used 1: Used SYN Reset/alarm in protocol B 0: Not reported to the host 1: Reported to the host with SYN and NAK codes NCD CD (signal quality detection) of the RS–232C interface 0: Checked 1: Not checked CLK Baud rate clock when the RS–422 interface is used 0: Internal clock 1: External clock NOTE When the RS–232C interface is used, set this bit to 0. #7 RMS 0135 #6 #5 #4 #3 R42 #2 PRA #1 ETX #0 ASC NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit ASC Communication code except NC data 0: ISO code 1: ASCII code ETX End code for protocol A or extended protocol A 0: CR code in ASCII/ISO 1: ETX code in ASCII/ISO NOTE Use of ASCII/ISO is specified by ASC. PRA Communication protocol 0: Protocol B 1: Protocol A R42 Interface 0: RS–232C interface 1: RS–422 interface RMS State of remote/tape operation when protocol A is used 0: Always 0 is returned. 1: Contents of the change request of the remote/tape operation in the SET command from the host is returned. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 18 #7 0140 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 BCC NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit BCC The BCC value (block check characters) for the DNC2 interface is: 0: Checked. 1: Not checked. 0141 System for connection between the CNC and host (DNC1 interface) [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 or 2 This parameter specifies the system for connection (DNC1 interface) between the CNC and host. Set value 1 : Point–to–point connection 2 : Multipoint connection NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. 0142 Station address of the CNC (DNC1 interface) [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 2 to 52 This parameter specifies the station address of the CNC when the CNC is connected via the DNC1 interface using multipoint connection. NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. 0143 Time limit specified for the timer monitoring a response (DNC2 interface) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Seconds [Valid data range] 1 to 60 (The standard setting is 3.) 4.3 PARAMETERS OF DNC1/DNC2 INTERFACE B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 19 0144 Time limit specified for the timer monitoring the EOT signal (DNC2 interface) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Seconds [Valid data range] 1 to 60 (The standard setting is 5.) 0145 Time required for switching RECV and SEND (DNC2 interface) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Seconds [Valid data range] 1 to 60 (The standard setting is 1.) 0146 Number of times the system retries holding communication (DNC2 interface) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Seconds [Valid data range] 1 to 10 (The standard setting is 3.) Set the maximum number of times the system retries holding communication with the remote device if the remote device uses an invalid protocol in the data–link layer or the remote device does not respond to the request. 0147 Number of times the system sends the message in response to the NAK signal (DNC2 interface) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Number of times [Valid data range] 1 to 10 (The standard setting is 2.) Set the maximum number of times the system retries sending the message in response to the NAK signal. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 20 0148 Number of characters in overrun (DNC2) interface) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 10 to 225 (The standard setting is 10.) Set the number of characters the system can receive after transmission is stopped (CS off). 0149 Number of characters in the data section of the communication packet (DNC2 interface) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word [Valid range] 80 to 256 The standard setting is 256. If the specified value is out of range, a value of 80 or 256 is used. This parameter determines the maximum length of the packet used in transmission over the DNC2 interface. Including the two characters at the start of the packet, the four characters used for a command, and the three characters at the end, the maximum number of characters in the packet is nine plus the number specified in parameter No.0149. DLE STX Command Data section DEL ETX BCC 2 bytes 4 bytes 80 to 256 bytes 3 bytes Length of the packet B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 21 #7 SRS 0161 #6 #5 PEO #4 SRP #3 #2 SRL #1 #0 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit SRL Number of characters used in the serial interface 0: Seven bits 1: Eight bits SRP Vertical parity in the serial interface 0: Vertical parity is not checked. 1: Vertical parity is checked. PEO Either odd or even parity is used for vertical parity in the serial interface 0: Odd parity is used. 1: Even parity is used. NOTE This bit is effective when bit SRP is set to 1. SRS Stop bit in the serial interface 0: One stop bit is used. 1: Two stop bits are used. NOTE Set this parameter (No.0161) when the M–NET interface is used. 0171 Length of DI data in bytes in M–NET NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Valid range] 1 to 32 Specify the length of DI data in bytes (number of byte of data actually transferred from the PLC unit to the CNC unit) in the serial interface. 0172 Length of DO data in bytes in M–NET NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Valid range] 1 to 32 Specify the length of DO data in bytes (number of bytes of data actually transferred from the CNC unit to the PLC unit) in the serial interface. 4.4 PARAMETERS OF M–NET INTERFACE 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 22 NOTE When a self–loop test is performed, specify the same value in parameters No.0171 and No.0172. 0173 Station address in M–NET NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Valid range] 1 to 15 Specify a station address in the serial interface. 0174 Baud rate in M–NET NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Valid range] 0 to 6 Specify a baud rate for the serial interface. The standard setting is 3. Setting Baud rate (bps) 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 5 38400 6 57600 7 76800 0175 Time required for connecting two stations in M–NET NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid range] 1 to 32767 Specify a time limit from when the connection sequence is completed for the self–station to when the normal transfer sequence starts in the serial interface. The standard setting is 10000. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 23 0176 Time required for polling in M–NET NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 Specify a time limit for polling in the normal sequence at the self–station in the serial interface. The standard setting is 500. 0177 Time required from SAI to BCC in M–NET NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 Specify a time limit from when the SAI signal starts to be transferred to when the BCC signal has been sent. The standard setting is 50. 0178 Time between a reception and the next transmission in M–NET NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 Specify the time from when data has been received to when the next data starts to be transmitted. The standard setting is 1. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 24 #7 NFD 0231 #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] SB2 Number of stop bits 0: 1 bit 1: 2 bits ASI Data input code 0: IEA or ISO (automatic recognition) 1: ASCII Code NFD When data is out, feed holes are 0: Output before and after data section 1: Not output 0233 Baud rate (DNC1 interface #2) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 15 Set value Baud rate (bps) 7 8 9 10 Set value Baud rate (bps) 11 12 13 9600 38400 14 86400 15 300 600 1200 2400 4800 19200 76800 Set value Baud rate (bps) 1 2 3 4 5 50 100 110 150 200 bps bps bps 6 Baud rate 0241 Mode of connection between the host and CNC (DNC1 interface #2) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 2 This parameter sets the mode of connection between the host and CNC. Setting Mode 1 Point–to–point mode 2 Multipoint mode 4.5 PARAMETERS OF DNC1 INTERFACE B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 25 0242 CNC station address (DNC 1 interface #2) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 2 to 52 This parameter sets a CNC station address when the CNC is to be connected in the multipoint mode. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 26 #7 0801 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SB2 [Data type] Bit SB2 The number of stop bits is: 0 : 1 bit. 1 : 2 bits. 0802 Communication channel for the online custom screen [Data type] Byte 0803 Communication baud rate for the online custom screen [Data type] Byte #7 0810 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 BGS [Data type] Bit BGS When the online custom screen is not displayed, online custom screen alarm task communication is: 0 : Not activated. 1 : Activated. 0811 Logging type for the online custom screen [Data type] Byte 0812 PMC address of logging data for the online custom screen [Data type] Word 0813 Logging data length for the online custom screen [Data type] Word 0814 Logging wait address for the online custom screen [Data type] Word 4.6 PARAMETERS OF ONLINE CUSTOM SCREEN B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 27 0820 Online custom screen device address (1) 0821 Online custom screen device address (2) 0822 Online custom screen device address (3) 0823 Online custom screen device address (4) 0824 Online custom screen device address (5) 0825 Online custom screen device address (6) 0826 Online custom screen device address (7) 0827 Online custom screen device address (8) 0828 Online custom screen device address (9) [Data type] Byte 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 28 #7 0900 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ONS #0 DSV [Data type] Bit DSV The data server function is 0: Enabled 1: Disabled ONS When the O number of the data server file name and the O number in an NC program do not match: 0: The O number of the file name takes priority. 1: The O number in the NC program takes priority. 0911 Altemate MDI character [Data type] Word [Set value] ASCII code (decimal) 0912 Character not provided in MDI keys [Data type] Word [Set value] ASCII code (decimal) When specifying a character which is not provided as a MDI keys for HOST DIRECTORY of DATA SERVER SETTING–1, use these parameters to assign an alternative key to that character. If ODSERVERONCPROG is specified for HOST DIRECTORY, you cannot enter "O" with the MDI keys. To use "@" as an alternative character, set 64 (ASCII code for @) in parameter No.0911 and 92 (ASCII code for \) in parameter No.0912. When "DSERVER@NCPROG" is specified for HOST DIRECTORY, the data server converts it to "ODSERVERONCPROG". NOTE When both parameters No.0911 and 0912 are set to 0, the data server assumes the following setting: No.0911 = 32 (blank) No.0912 = 92 (\) 4.7 PARAMETERS OF DATA SERVER Examples B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 29 #7 0960 #6 #5 #4 #3 PMN #2 MD2 #1 MD1 #0 SLV [Data type] Bit SLV When the power motion manager is selected, the screen displays: 0 : One slave. 1 : Up to four slaves with the screen divided into four. MD1,MD2 These parameters set a slave parameter input/output destination. MD2 MD1 Input/output destination 0 0 Part program storage 0 1 Memory card In either case, slave parameters are output in program format. PMN The power motion manager function is: 0 : Enabled. 1 : Disabled. (Communication with slaves is not performed.) 4.8 PARAMETERS OF POWER MOTION MANAGER 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 30 #7 1001 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 INM NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit INM Least command increment on the linear axis 0 : In mm (metric system machine) 1 : In inches (inch system machine) #7 IDG 1002 #6 #5 #4 XIK XIK #3 AZR #2 SFD SFD #1 DLZ DLZ #0 JAX JAX IDG [Data type] Bit JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in manual continuous feed, manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return 0 : 1 axis 1 : 3 axes DLZ Function setting the reference position without dog 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled NOTE This function can be specified for each axis by DLZx, bit 1 of parameter No.1005. SFD The function for shifting the reference position is 0: Not used. 1: Used. AZR When no reference position is set, the G28 command causes: 0: Reference position return using deceleration dogs (as during manual reference position return) to be exected. 1: P/S alarm No.090 to be issued. NOTE When reference position return without dogs is specified, (when bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No.1002 is set to 1 or bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No.1005 is set to 1) the G28 command specified before a reference position is set causes P/S alarm No.090 to be issued, regardless of the setting of AZR. 4.9 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL/ INCREMENT SYSTEM B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 31 XIK When LRP, bit 1 of parameter No.1401, is set to 0, namely, when positioning is performed using non–linear type positioning, if an interlock is applied to the machine along one of axes in positioning, 0: The machine stops moving along the axis for which the interlock is applied and continues to move along the other axes. 1: The machine stops moving along all the axes. IDG When the reference position is set without dogs, automatic setting of the IDGx parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1012) to prevent the reference position from being set again is: 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. #7 IPR 1004 IPR #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ISC ISC #0 ISA NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit ISA, ISC The least input increment and least command increment are set. ISC ISA Least input increment and least command increment Symbol 0 0 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, or 0.0001 inch IS–B 0 1 0.01 mm, 0.01 deg, or 0.001 inch IS–A 1 0 0.0001 mm, 0.0001 deg, or 0.00001 inch IS–C NOTE IS–A cannot be used at present. IPR Whether the least input increment for each axis is set to a value 10 times as large as the least command increment is specified, in increment systems of IS–B or IS–C at setting mm. 0: The least input increment is not set to a value 10 times as larg as the least command increment. 1: The least input increment is set to a value 10 times as large as the least command increment. If IPR is set to 1, the least input increment is set as follows: Input increment Least input increment IS–B 0.01 mm, 0.01 deg, or 0.0001 inch IS–C 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, or 0.00001 inch NOTE For IS–A, the least input increment cannot be set to a value 10 times as large as the least command increment. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 32 #7 RMBx 1005 #6 MCCx MCCx #5 EDMx EDMx #4 EDPx EDPx #3 HJZx #2 #1 DLZx DLZx #0 ZRNx ZRNx RMBx [Data type] Bit axis ZRNx When a command specifying the movement except for G28 is issued in automatic operation (MEM, RMT, or MDI) and when a return to the reference position has not been performed since the power was turned on 0 : An alarm is generated (P/S alarm 224). 1 : An alarm is not generated. NOTE The state in which the reference position has not been established refers to that state in which reference position return has not been performed after power–on when an absolute position detector is not being used, or that state in which the association of the machine position with the position detected with the absolute position detector has not been completed (see the description of bit 4 (APZx) of parameter No. 1815) when an absolute position detector is being used. DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled NOTE When DLZ of parameter No.1002 is 0, DLZx is enabled. When DLZ of parameter No.1002 is 1, DLZx is disabled, and the function for setting the reference position without dogs is enabled for all axes. HJZx When a reference position is already set: 0 : Manual reference position return is performed with deceleration sogs. 1 : Manual reference position return is performed using rapid traverse without deceleration dogs, or manual reference position return is performed with deceleration dogs, depending on the setting of bit 7 (SJZ) of parameter No.0002. NOTE When reference position return without dogs is specified, (when bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No.1002 is set to 1 or bit (DLZx) of parameter No.1005 is set to 1) reference position return after a reference position is set is performed using rapid traverse, regardless of the setting of HJZ. EDPx External deceleration signal in the positive direction for each axis 0 : Valid only for rapid traverse 1 : Valid for rapid traverse and cutting feed EDMx External deceleration signal in the negative direction for each axis 0 : Valid only for rapid traverse 1 : Valid for rapid traverse and cutting feed MCCx When an axis become the removal state using the controlled axis removal signal or setting: 0: MCC is turned off 1: MCC is not turned off. (Servo motor excitation is turned off, but the MCC signal of the servo amplifier is not turned off.) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 33 NOTE This parameter is used to remove only one axis, for example, when a two–axis or three–axis amplifier is used. When two–a axis or three–axis amplifier is used and only one axis is removed, servo alarm No.401 (V–READY OFF) is usually issued. However, this parameter, when set to 1, prevents servo alarm No.401 from being issued. Note, however, that disconnecting a servo amplifier from the CNC will cause the servo amplifier to enter the V–READY OFF status. This is a characteristic of all multiaxis amplifiers. RMBx Releasing the assignment of the control axis for each axis (signal input and setting input) 0 : Invalid 1 : Valid #7 1006 #6 #5 ZMIx ZMIx #4 #3 DIAx #2 #1 ROSx ROSx #0 ROTx ROTx NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit axis ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis. ROSx ROTx Meaning 0 0 Linear axis (1) Inch/metric conversion is done. (2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.3624) 0 1 Rotation axis (A type) (1) Inch/metric conversion is not done. (2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360_. Absolute coordinate values are rounded or not rounded by parameter No.1008#0(ROAx) and #2(RRLx). (3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter No.3624) (4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference position return direction and the move amount does not exceed one rotation. 1 0 Setting is invalid (unused) 1 1 Rotation axis (B type) (1) Inch/metric conversion, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are not done. (2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360_). (3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Re- fer to parameter No.3624) (4) Cannot be used with the ratation axis roll over function and the index table indexing fanction (M series) 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 34 DIAx Either a diameter or radius is set to be used for specifying the amount of travel on each axis. 0 : Radius 1 : Diameter ZMIx The direction of reference position return. 0 : Positive direction 1 : Negative direction NOTE The direction of the initial backlash, which occurs when power is switched on, is opposite to the direction of a reference position return. #7 1007 #6 #5 #4 #3 RAAx #2 #1 #0 [Data type] Bit axis RAAx When an absolute command is specified for a rotation axis: 0: The end point coordinates and direction of rotation conform to bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008. 1: The end point coordinates conform to the absolute value of the value specified in the command. The rotational direction conforms to the sign of the value specified in the command. NOTE 1 This parameter is valid when the rotary axis control function is provided and the rotation axis rollover function is applied (bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No.1008 is set to 1). 2 This parameter is equal to bit 3 (RAAx) of parameter No.1008. #7 1008 #6 #5 #4 #3 RAAx #2 RRLx #1 RABx #0 ROAx NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit axis ROAx The roll–over function of a rotation axis is 0 : Invalid 1 : Valid NOTE ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for which ROTx, #0 of parameter No.1006, is set to 1) RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction 0 : In which the distance to the target is shorter. 1 : Specified by the sign of command value. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 35 NOTE RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1. RRLx Relative coordinates are 0 : Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation 1 : Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation NOTE 1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1. 2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter No.1260. RAAx The rotation direction of a rotation axis and end point coordinates in the absolute command mode: 0: Agree with the setting of bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008. 1: Agree with the absolute value of the specified value for the end point coordinates and the sign of the specified value for the rotation direction. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the rotary axis control function is provided and the rotation axis roll–over function is used (with bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No.1008 set to 1). 1010 Number of CNC–controlled axes NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., the number of controlled axes Set the maximum number of axes that can be controlled by the CNC. Suppose that the first axis is the X axis, and the second and subsequent axes are the Y, Z, A, B, and C axes in that order, and that they are controlled as follows: X, Y, Z, and A axes: Controlled by the CNC and PMC B and C axes: Controlled by the PMC Then set this parameter to 4 (total 4: X, Y, Z, and A) Examples 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 36 #7 1012 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 IDGx [Data type] Bit axis IDGx The function for setting the reference position again, without dogs, is: 0 : Not inhibited. 1 : Inhibited. NOTE 1 IDGx is enabled when the IDG parameter (bit 7 of parameter No.1002) is 1. 2 When the function for setting the reference position, without dogs, is used, and the reference position is lost for some reason, an alarm requesting reference position return (No.300) is generated when the power is next turned on. If the operator performs reference position return, as a result of mistakenly identifying the alarm as that requesting the operator to perform a normal reference position return, an invalid reference position may be set. To prevent such an operator error, the IDGx parameter is provided to prevent the reference position from being set again without dogs. (1) If the IDG parameter (bit 7 of parameter No.1002) is set to 1, the IDGx parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1012) is automatically set to 1 when the reference position is set using the function for setting the reference position without dogs. This prevents the reference position from being set again without dogs. (2) Once the reference position is prevented from being set for an axis again, without dogs, any attempt to set the reference position for the axis without dogs results in the output of an alarm (No.090). (3) When the reference position must be set again without dogs, set IDGx to 0 before setting the reference position. 1020 Program axis name for each axis [Data type] Byte axis Settheprogramaxisnameforeachcontrolledaxis,usingoneofthevalues listed in the following table: Axis name Setting Axis name Setting Axis name Setting Axis name Setting X 88 U 85 A 65 E 69 Y 89 V 86 B 66 Z 90 W 87 C 67 NOTE 1 With the T series, when G code system A is used, neither U, V, nor W can be used as an axis name. Only when G code system B or C is used, U, V, and W can be used as axis names. 2 The same axis name cannot be assigned to more than one axis. 3 When the secondary auxiliary function (option) is provided, the address used by the secondary auxiliary function (address B with the T series or, with the M series, the address specified in parameter No.3460) cannot be used as an axis name. 4 With the T series, when address C or A is used for chamfering, corner rounding, or direct drawing dimension programming (when the CCR parameter (bit 4 of parameter No.3405) is set to 1), addresses C or A cannot be used as an axis name. 5 Only with the T series, address E can be used as an axis name. Address E cannot be used with the M series. When address E is used as an axis name, note the following: – When G code system A is used, address E is always assigned to an absolute command. – When an equal–lead threading command (G32) is issued in the Series 15 command format, address E cannot be used to specify the thread lead. Use address F to specify the thread lead. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 37 1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system NOTE When this parameter is set, power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte axis To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation, cutter compensation C (for the M series), tool nose radius compensation (for the T series), etc., each control axis is set to one of the basic three axes X, Y, and Z, or an axis parallel to the X, Y, or Z axis. G17: Plane Xp–Yp G18: Plane Zp–Xp G19: Plane Yp–Zp Only one axis can be set for each of the three basic axes X, Y, and Z, but two or more parallel axes can be set. Set value Meaning 0 Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis 1 X axis of the basic three axes 2 Y axis of the basic three axes 3 Z axis of the basic three axes 5 Axis parallel to the X axis 6 Axis parallel to the Y axis 7 Axis parallel to the Z axis 1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., number of control axes Set the servo axis for each control axis. Usually set to same number as the control axis number. The control axis number is the order number that is used for setting the axis–type parameters or axis–type machine signals Refer to FSSB section of CONNECTION MANUAL (Function) B–63003EN–1. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 38 #7 WZR 1201 #6 #5 AWK AWK #4 #3 FPC FPC #2 ZCL ZCL #1 ZPI ZPI #0 ZPR ZPR [Data type] Bit ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual reference position return is performed 0 : Not set automatically 1 : Set automatically This bit is ineffective, when a workpiece coordinate system option is provided, however. ZPI Coordinates at the reference position when a coordinate system is set automatically 0 : Value set in parameter No.1250 is used. 1 : For input in mm, the value set in parameter 1250 is used, or for input in inches, the value set in parameter No.1251 is used. This bit is ineffective, when a workpiece coordinate system option is provided, however. ZCL Local coordinate system when the manual reference position return is performed 0 : The local coordinate system is not canceled. 1 : The local coordinate system is canceled. FPC When the floating reference position is specified using soft keys on the current position display screen 0 : The value of the displayed relative position is not preset. (In other words, the value does not change.) 1 : The value of the displayed relative position is preset to 0. AWK When the workpiece zero point offset value is changed 0 : The absolute position display changed when the next bufforing block is performed. 1 : The absolute position display is changed immediately. Changed value is valid ofter baffering the next block. WZR Upon reset, the workpiece coordinate system is: 0 : Not returned to that specified with G54 1 : Returned to that specified with G54 #7 1202 #6 #5 #4 G52 #3 RLC RLC #2 G50 #1 EWS #0 EWD [Data type] Bit EWD The shift direction of the workpiece coordinate system is: 0 : The direction specified by the external workpiece zero point offset value 1 : In the opposite direction to that specified by the external workpiece zero point offset value 4.10 PARAMETERS OF COORDINATES B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 39 EWD=0 EXOFS : External workpiece zero point offset value (Shifted workpiece coordinate system) X EXOFS X X X Z Z Z Z –EXOFS EWD=1 (Original workpiece coordinate system) EWS Shift value of the workpiece coordinate system and external workpiece zero point offset value are 0 : Stored in the separate memory areas. 1 : Stored in the same memory area, that is, the shift and the offset values are the same. G50 When the CNC has commands G54 to G59 specifying workpiece coordinate systems (optional function), if the G50 command for setting a coordinate system (or the G92 command in G command system B or C) is specified, 0 : G50 is executed and no alarm is issued. 1 : G50 is not executed and a P/S alarm (No. 010) is issued. RLC Local coordinate system is 0 : Not cancelled by reset 1 : Cancelled by reset G52 In local coordinate system setting (G52), a cutter compensation vector is: 0 : Not considered. 1 : Considered. NOTE Select a local coordinate system setting operation when cutter compensation is applied, and when two or more blocks specifying no movement exist prior to the specification of G52, or when G52 is specified after cutter compensation mode is canceled without eliminating the offset vector. 1220 External workpiece zero point offset value [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Input increment IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Linear axis (input in mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Linear axis (input in inches) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 This is one of the parameters that give the position of the origin of workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59). It gives an offset of the workpiece origin common to all workpiece coordinate systems. In general, the offset varies depending on the workpiece coordinate systems. The value can be set from the PMC using the external data input function. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 40 1221 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54) 1222 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system 2(G55) 1223 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system 3(G56) 1224 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system 4 (G57) 1225 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system 5 (G58) 1226 Workpiece zero point offset value in workpiece coordinate system 6 (G59) [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Input increment IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Linear axis (input in mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Linear axis (input in inches) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 The workpiece zero point offset values in workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 (G54 to G59) are set. Workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54) Workpiece zero point offset Origin of machine coordinate system Workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55) NOTE The workpiece origin offset can also be set using the workpiece coordinate system screen. 1240 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis in the machine coordinate system NOTE When this parameter is set, power must be turned off before operation is continued. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 41 1241 Coordinate value of the second reference position on each axis in the machine coordinate system 1242 Coordinate value of the third reference position on each axis in the machine coor- dinate system 1243 Coordinate value of the fourth reference position on each axis in the machine coordinate system [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 Set the coordinate values of the reference positions in the machine coordinate system. 1244 Coodinates of the floating reference positon for each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the coordinates of the floating reference position for each axis. The parameter is automatically set when the floating reference position is specified using soft keys on the current position display screen. 1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate sys- tem setting is performed [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Input increment IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Linear axis (input in mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Linear axis (input in inches) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be used for setting a coordinate system automatically. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 42 1251 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a coordi- nate system automatically when input is performed in inches [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Incerment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Linear axis (input in inches) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be used for setting a coordinate system automatically when input is performed in inches. NOTE This parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201 is set to 1. 1260 Amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system Unit of data Standard value IS–A 0.01 deg 36000 IS–B 0.001 deg 360000 IS–C 0.0001 deg 3600000 [Valid data range] 1000 to 9999999 Set the amount of a shift per one rotaion of a rotaion axis. 1290 Distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror image [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Set the distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror image. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 43 #7 BFA 1300 #6 LZR #5 RL3 #4 #3 #2 LMS #1 #0 OUT [Data type] Bit OUT The area inside or outside of the stored stroke check 2 is set as an inhibition area. 0: Inside 1: Outside LMS The EXLM signal for switching stored stroke check 1 0: Disabled 1: Enabled NOTE Stored stroke check 1 supports two pairs of parameters for setting the prohibited area. The stored stroke limit switching signal is used to enable either of the prohibited areas set with these parameter pairs. (1) Prohibited area I: Parameters No.1320 and No.1321 (2) Prohibited area II: Parameters No.1326 and No.1327 RL3 Stored stroke check 3 release signal RLSOT3 is 0: Disabled 1: Enabled LZR Checking of stored stroke check 1 during the time from power–on to the manual position reference return 0: The stroke check 1 is checked. 1: The stroke check 1 is not checked NOTE When an absolute position detector is used and a reference position is already set upon power–up, stored stroke limit check 1 is started immediately after power–up, regardless of the setting. BFA When a command that exceeds a stored stroke check is issued 0: An alarm is generated after the stroke check is exceeded. 1: An alarm is generated before the stroke check is exceeded. NOTE The tool stops at a point up to F/7500 mm short of or ahead of the boundary. (F: Feedrate when the tool reaches the boundary (mm/min)) #7 PLC 1301 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 NPC #1 #0 [Data type] Bit NPC As part of the stroke limit check performed before movement, the movement specified in G31 (skip) and G37 (automatic tool length measurement (for M series) or automatic tool compensation (for T series)) blocks is: 0: Checked 1: Not checked PLC Stroke limit check before movement is: 0: Not performed 1: Performed 4.11 PARAMETERS OF STROKE CHECK 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 44 #7 1310 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 OT3x OT3x #0 OT2x OT2x [Data type] Bit axis OT2x Whether stored stroke check 2 is checked for each axis is set. 0: Stored stroke check 2 is not checked. 1: Stored stroke check 2 is checked. OT3x Whether stored stroke check 3 is checked for each axis is set. 0: Stored stroke check 3 is not checked. 1: Stored stroke check 3 is checked. 1320 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis 1321 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis [Data type] 2–word axis Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 The coordinate values of stored stroke check 1 in the positive and negative directions are setfor each axis in the machine coordinate system. The outside area of the two checks set in the parameters is inhibited. (Xp,Yp,Zp) Set the machine coordinates of the boundaries in the positive direction (Xp, Yp, and Zp) using parameter No. 1320, and those of the boundaries in the negative direction (Xm, Ym, and Zm) using parameter No. 1321. The prohibited area thus becomes the hatched area in the figure on the left. (Xm,Ym,Zm) NOTE 1 For axes with diameter specification, a diameter value must be set. 2 When the parameters are set as follows, the stroke becomes infinite: parameter 1320 < parameter 1321 For movement along the axis for which infinite stroke is set, only increment commands are available. If an absolute command is issued for this axis, the absolute register may overflow, and normal movement will not result. 3 The prohibited area specified with these parameters is invalid if bit 2 (LMS) of parameter No. 1300 is set to 1 and stored stroke limit switching signal EXLM is set to 1. In such a case, the settings of parameters No. 1326 and 1327 are used, instead. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 45 1322 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on each axis 1323 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the negative direction on each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 Set the coordinate values of stored stroke check 2 in the positive and negative directions foreach axis in the machine coordinate system. OUT, #0 of parameter 1300, sets either the area outside of the area inside specified by two checks are the inhibition area. (Xp,Yp,Zp) (Xm,Ym,Zm) Set the machine coordinates of the boundaries in the positive direction (Xp, Yp, and Zp) using parameter No. 1322, and those of the bound- aries in the negative direction (Xm, Ym, and Zm) using parameter No. 1323. The prohibited area thus becomes the hatched area in the figure on the left. (1) When the prohibited area is inside the boundaries (OUT = 0) (2) When the prohibited area is outside the boundaries (OUT = 1) ????? ????? ??????? ??????? ??? ??? ??? (Xp,Yp,Zp) (Xm,Ym,Zm) NOTE For axes with diameter specification, a diameter value must be set. 1324 Coordinate value of stored stroke checke 3 in the positive direction on each axis 1325 Coordinate value of stored stroke checke 3 in the negative direction on each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 Set the coordinate values of stored stroke check 3 in the positive and negative directions foreach axis in the machine coordinate system. The area inside the checks set in the parameter is inhibited. NOTE Specify diameters for any axis for which diameter programming is specified. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 46 1326 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis 1327 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 Set the coordinate values of stored stroke check 1 in the positive and negative directions foreach axis in the machine coordinate system. When stroke check switching signal EXLM is ON, stroke check are checked with parameters 1326 and 1327, not with parameters 1320 and 1321. The area outside that set by parameters 1326 and 1327 is inhibited. NOTE 1 Specify diameter values for any axes for which diameter programming is specified. 2 These parameters are invalid if bit 2 (LMS) of parameter No. 1300 is set to 0, or if stored stroke limit switching signal EXLM is set to 0. In such a case, the settings of parameters No. 1320 and 1321 are used, instead. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 47 1330 Profile of a chuck [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 or 1 0: Chuck which holds a workpiece on the inner surface 1: Chuck which holds a workpiece on the outer surface 1331 Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (L) 1332 Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (W) 1333 Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece is held (L1) 1334 Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece is held (W1) 1335 X coordinate of a chuck (CX) 1336 ZX coordinate of a chuck (CZ) [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid range] No.1331 to No.1334: 0 to 99999999 No.1335 to No.1336: –99999999 to 99999999 Specify the profile of a chuck. 4.12 PARAMETERS OF THE CHUCK AND TAILSTOCK BARRIER (T SERIES) 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 48 L W W1 L1 CZ CX Z Zero point of the workpiece coodinate system X A L W W1 L1 CZ CX Z Zero point of the workpiece coodinate system X A Chuck which holds a workpiece on the outer surface (TY= 1) Chuck which holds a workpiece on the inner surface (TY= 0) Symbol Decription Ty Profile of a chuck (0: Chuck which holds a workpiece on the inner surface, 1: Chuck which holdsa workpiece on the outer surface) CX X coordinate of a chuck CZ Z coordinate of a chuck L Dimensions of the claw of a chuck W Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (radius input) L1 Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece is held W1 Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece is held (ra- dius input) TY Specifies the profile of a chuck. When TY is set to 0, the chuck holding a workpiece on theinner surface is specified. When TY is set to 1, the chuck holding a workpiece on the outer surface is specified. The profile of the chuck is assumed to be symmetrical with respect to the z–axis. CX, and CZ Specify the position (point A) of a chuck with the coordinates of the workpiece coordinate system. In this case, do not use the coordinates of the machine coordinate system. NOTE Specifying the coordinates with a diameter or radius depends on whether the correspondingaxis conforms to diameter or radius specification. When the axis conforms to diameter specification, spcify the coordinates with a diameter. L, L1, W and W1 Define the profile of a chuck. NOTE Always specify W and W1 with radiuses. Specify L and L1 with radiuses when the Z–axis conforms to radius specification. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 49 1341 Length of a tailstock (L) 1342 Diameter of a tailstock (D) 1343 Length of a tailstock (L1) 1344 Diameter of a tailstock (D1) 1345 Length of a tailstock (D1) 1346 Diameter of a tailstock (D2) 1347 Diameter of the hole of a tailstock (D3) 1348 Z coordinate of a tailstock (TZ) [Data type] 2–words [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid range] No.1341 to No.1347: 0 to 99999999 No.1348: –99999999 to 99999999 Specify the profile of a tailstock. TZ X D3 L2 D2 D1 D L1 L Z Zero point of the workpiece coordinate system Workpiece B 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 50 Symbol Description TZ Z–axis coordinate of a tailstock L Length of a tailstock D Diameter of a tailstock (diameter input) L1 Length of a tailstock (1) D1 Diameter of a tailstock (1) (diameter input) L2 Length of a tailstock (2) D2 Diameter of a tailstock (2) (diameter input) D3 Diameter of the hole of a tailstock (diameter input) TZ: Specifies the position (point B) of a tailstock with the Z–axis coordinate of the workpiece coordinate system. In this case, do not use the coordinate of the machine coordinate system. The profile of a tailstock is assumed to be symmetrical with respect to the Z–axis. NOTE Specifying the position of a tailstock with a radius or diameter depends on whether the Z–axis conforms to radius or diameter specification. L, L1, L2, D, D1, D2, and D3: Define the profile of a tailstock. NOTE Always specify D, D1, D2, and D3 with diameters. Specify L, L1, and L2 with radiuses if the Z–axis conforms to radius specification. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 51 #7 1401 #6 RDR RDR #5 TDR TDR #4 RF0 RF0 #3 #2 JZR #1 LRP LRP #0 RPD RPD [Data type] Bit RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power–on time to the completion of the reference position return. 0: Disabled (Jog feed is performed.) 1: Enabled LRP Positioning (G00) 0: Positioning is performed with non–linear type positioning so that the tool moves along each axis independently at rapid traverse. 1: Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool moves in a straight line. JZR The manual reference position return at JOG feedrate 0: Not performed 1: Performed RF0 When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse, 0: The machine tool does not stop moving. 1: The machine tool stops moving. TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84, rigid tapping) 0: Enabled 1: Disabled RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command 0: Disabled 1: Enabled #7 1402 #6 #5 #4 JRV #3 OV2 OV2 #2 #1 #0 NPC NPC [Data type] Bit NPC The feed per rotation command is: 0: Ineffective when a position coder is not provided. 1: Effective even when a position coder is not provided (because the CNC converts it to the feed per minute command from F command S command). OV2 2nd feedrate override is 0: specified every 1% 1: specified every 0.01% NOTE Signals used for 2nd feedrate override are: *AFV0 to AFV7 when OV2 = 0 *APF00 to *AFP15 when OV2 = 1 4.13 PARAMETERS OF FEEDRATE 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 52 JRV Manual continuous feed (jog feed) 0: Jog feed is performed at feed per minute. 1: Jog feed is performed at feed per rotation. NOTE Specify a feedrate in parameter No.1423. #7 RTV 1403 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 MIF NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit MIF Cutting feedrates at feed per minute is specified by F commands 0: In units of 1 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.01 inches/min for inch machines. 1: In unit of 0.001 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001 inches/min for inch machines. NOTE M series are not equipped with this parameter. Cutting feedrates are specified by F commands in units of 0.001 mm/min for millimeter machines or 0.00001 inches/min for inch machines. RTV Override while the tool is retracting in threading 0 : Override is effective. 1 : Override is not effective. #7 1404 #6 #5 #4 #3 FRV #2 F8A F8A #1 DLF DLF #0 HFC HFC [Data type] Bit HFC The feedrate for helical interpolation is: 0: Clamped so that the feedrates along an arc and linear axis do not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate specified by parameter. 1: Clamped so that the composite feedrate along an arc and linear axis does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate specified by parameter. DLF After a reference potition is set, manual reference position return performed at: 0 : Rapid traverse rate (parameter No.1420) 1 : Manual rapid traverse rate (parameter No.1424) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 53 NOTE This parameter selects a feedrate for reference position return performed without dogs. This parameter also selects a feedrate when manual reference position return is performed according to bit 7 (SJZ) of parameter No.0002 using rapid traverse without deceleration dogs after a reference position is set. F8A Valid data range for an F command in feed–per–minute mode 0: Range specified with bit 0 (MIF) of parameter No.1403 Increment system Units IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millimeter input mm/min 0.001 to 240000. 0.001 to 100000. Inch input inch/min 0.00001 to 9600. 0.00001 to 4000. Rotation axis deg/min 1 to 240000. 1 to 100000. F8A Valid data range for an F command with a decimal point in feed–per minute mode Increment system Units IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millimeter input mm/min 0.001 to 99999.999. Inch input inch/min 0.00001 to 999.99999. Rotation axis (mm) deg/min 1 to 240000. 1 to 100000. Rotation axis (inch) deg/min 1 to 9600. 1 to 4000. Increment system Units IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millimeter input mm/min 0.001 to 240000. 0.001 to 100000. Inch input inch/min 0.00001 to 9600. 0.00001 to 4000. Rotation axis deg/min 1 to 240000. 1 to 100000. FRV For inch input, the valid range of the feedrate specified for feed per revolution is: 0 : Standard range. (F0.000001 to 9.999999 inches per revolution) 1 : Extended to F50.0 inches per revolution. (F0.000001 to 50.000000 inches per revolution) #7 1405 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 PCL #1 FD3 #0 F1U [Data type] Bit F1U Specifies the units of the data for the parameters that set the feedrates of the F1–digit feed commands (parameter Nos. 1451 to 1459). Increment system Units of data Increment system When F1U is 0 When F1U is 1 Millimeter machine 0.1 mm/min 1 mm/min Inch machine 0.001 inch/min 0.1 inch/min Rotation axis 0.1 deg/min 1 deg/min FD3 The number of significant digits of the fractional part in the feedrate command (F command) for feed per revolution is: 0 : Up to two decimal positions (three decimal positions for inch input). 1 : Up to three decimal positions (four decimal positions for inch input). 1: 0: 1: 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 54 PCL The function for feed per rotation without the position coder is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. NOTE The option for constant surface speed control without the position coder is required. 1410 Dry run rate [Data type] Word [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Set the dry run rate when the manual feedrate is overridden by 100%. Specify the jog feedrate when the override is 100% for manual linear or circular interpolation. 1411 Cutting feedrate in the automatic mode at power–on Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 32767 6 to 32767 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 32767 6 to 32767 When the machine requires little change in cutting feedrate during cutting, a cutting feedrate can be specified in the parameter. This eliminates the need to specify a cutting feedrate in the NC program. 1414 Feedrate for retrace [Data type] 2–word This parameter sets the feedrate for retrace when the retrace function is used. (1) For rapid traverse [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 96000 6 to 48000 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000 B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 55 NOTE When 0 is set in this parameter, the rapid traverse rate that is set in parameter No.1420 is used for retrace. (2) For cutting feed When a value other than 0 is specified in this parameter, the same feedrate as an F command specified using the value without a decimal point is set and is used for retrace. When 0 is specified in this parameter, the programmed feedrate (F command) is used for retrace. 1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 6 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000 6 to 48000 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 to 240000 6 to 100000 Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for each axis. 1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 15000 30 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 6000 30 to 4800 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 30 to 15000 30 to 12000 Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis. Rapid traverse override signal Override value ROV2 ROV1 Override value 0 0 100% 0 1 50% 1 0 25% 1 1 F0 F0: Parameter 1421 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 56 1442 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 96000 6 to 48000 Specify the maximum cutting feedrate. A feedrate in the tangential direction is clamped in cutting feed so that it does not exceed the feedrate specified in this parameter. NOTE To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use parameter No.1430 instead. 1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis [Data type] Word axis (1) In M series, or in T series when JRV, bit 4 of parameter No.1402, is set to 0 (feed per minute), specify a jog feedrate at feed per minute with an override of 100%. [Unit of data, valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 32767 Rotaiton axis 1 deg/min (2) WhenJRV, bit 4 of parameter No.1402, is set to 1 (feed per revolution) in T series, specify a jog feedarate (feed per revolution) under an override of 100%. [Unit of data, valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Millimeter machine 0.01 mm/rev Inch machine 0.001 mm/rev 0 to 32767 Rotation axis 0.01 deg/rev 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000? 30 to 48000 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override is 100% for each axis. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 57 NOTE If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 is assumed. 1425 FL rate of the reference position return for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Setfeedrate(FLrate)afterdecelerationwhenthereferencepositionreturn is performed for each axis. 1426 External deceleration rate of cutting feed [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Set the external deceleration rate of cutting feed. 1427 External deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Set the external deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis. 1428 Reference position return feedrate [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 6 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000 6 to 48000 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 30 to 240000 6 to 100000 This parameter sets a rapid traverse rate for reference position return operation using deceleration dogs, or for reference position return 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 58 operation before a reference position is set. This parameter is also used to set a feedrate for the rapid traverse command (G00) in automatic operation before a reference position is set. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the reference position return feedrate setting function is used. When 0 is set in this parameter, this parameter disables the reference position return feedrate setting function. Before a reference position is set After a reference position is set Reference position ruturn feedrate setting function Reference position return feedrate setting function Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Reference position return by G28 Raped traverse command (G00) in automatic operation No.1420 No.1428 No.1420 Manual reference Without dogs*1 No 1424 No.1420 or No.1424*3 position return With dogs*1 No.1424 No.1424 No.1428 Manual raped traverse No.1423 or No.1424*2 No.1424 *1 With/without dogs: Reference position return operation not using/using deceleration dogs *2 For manual rapid traverse before a reference position is set, a jog feedrate (parameter No.1423) or manual raped traverse rate (parameter No.1424) is used according to the setting of bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No.1401. *3 The raped traverse rate set in parameter No.1424 or No.1420 is used according to the setting of bit 1 (DLF) of parameter No.1404 when reference position return is perfomed without dogs, or when reference position return operation is performed with bit 7 (SJZ) of parameter No.0002 set to 1 after a reference position is set (when reference position return operation is performed using rapid traverse without deceleration dogs). 1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis [Data type] 2–word axis Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 96000 6 to 48000 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000 Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis. A feedrate for each axis is clamped in cutting feed so that it does not exceed the maximum feedrate specified for each axis. NOTE 1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in parameter No.1422 is effective. 2 If the setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate specified in parameter No.1422 is applied to all axes and the feedrate is clamped at the maximum feedrate. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 59 1431 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the look–ahead control mode [Data type] 2–words [Unit of data, valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0 to 240000 0 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0 to 96000 0 to 48000 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 0 to 240000 0 to 100000 Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the look–ahead control mode. A feedrate in the tangential direction is clamped in cutting feed so that it does not exceed the feedrate specified in this parameter. NOTE 1 To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use parameter No.1432 instead. 2 In a mode other than the look–ahead mode, the maximum cutting feedrate specified in parameter No.1422 or No.1430 is applied and the feedrate is clamped at the maximum feedrate. 1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the look–ahead control mode [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data, valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0 to 240000 0 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0 to 96000 0 to 48000 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 0 to 240000 0 to 100000 Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the look–ahead control mode. A feedrate for each axis is clamped during cutting feed so that it does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate specified for each axis. NOTE 1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular interpolation. In polar coordinate, cylindrical, and involute interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in parameter No.1431 is effective. 2 If a setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate specified in parameter No.1431 is applied to all axes and the feedrate is clamped at the maximum feedrate. 3 In a mode other than the look–ahead mode, the maximum cutting feedrate specified in parameter No.1422 or No.1430 is applied and the feedrate is clamped at the maximum feedrate. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 60 1450 Change of feedrate for one graduation on the manual pulse generator during F1 digit feed [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 127 Set the constant that determines the change in feedrate as the manual pulse generator is rotated one graduation during F1-digit feed. F + Fmaxi 100n ? (where, i=1 or 2) In the above equation, set n. That is, the number of revolutions of the manual pulse generator, required to reach feedrate Fmaxi is obtained. Fmaxi refers to the upper limit of the feedrate for an F1-digit feed command, and set it in parameter 1460 or 1461. Fmax1: Upper limit of the feedrate for F1 to F4 (parameter 1460) Fmax2: Upper limit of the feedrate for F5 to F9 (parameter 1461) 1451 Feedrate for F1 digit command F1 1452 Feedrate for F1 digit command F2 1453 Feedrate for F1 digit command F3 1454 Feedrate for F1 digit command F4 1455 Feedrate for F1 digit command F5 1456 Feedrate for F1 digit command F6 1457 Feedrate for F1 digit command F7 1458 Feedrate for F1 digit command F8 1459 Feedrate for F1 digit command F9 Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data, valid range] (1) When the F1U parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1405) is 0 Increment system Units of data Valid data range Increment system Units of data IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millimeter machine 0.1 mm/min 6 to 150000 6 to 120000 Inch machine 0.01 inch/min 6 to 60000 6 to 48000 Rotation axis 0.1 deg/min 6 to 150000 6 to 120000 B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 61 (2) When the F1U parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1405) is 1 Increment system Units of data Valid data range Increment system Units of data IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 These parameters set the feedrates for 1–digit feed commands F1 to F9. When an 1–digit feed command is specified, and the feedrate is changed by turning the manual pulse generator, the parameter–set value also changes accordingly. 1460 Upper limit of feedrate for the one–digit F code command (F1 to F4) 1461 Upper limit of feedrate for the one–digit F code command (F5 to F9) [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Set the upper limit of feedrate for the F1-digit feed command. As the feedrate increases by turning the manual pulse generator, the feedrate is clamped when it reaches the upper limit set. If an F1-digit feed command F1 to F4 is executed, the upper limit is that set in parameter 1460. If an F1-digit command F5 to F9 is executed, the upper limit is that set in parameter 1461. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 62 #7 1601 #6 ACD #5 NCI NCI #4 RTO RTO #3 #2 OVB #1 #0 [Data type] Bit OVB Block overlap in cutting feed 0: Blocks are not overlapped in cutting feed. 1: Blocks are overlapped in cutting feed. Block overlap outputs the pulses remaining at the end of pulse distribution in a block together with distribution pulses in the next block. This eliminates changes in feedrates between blocks. Block overlap is enabled when blocks containing G01, G02, or G03 are consecutively specified in G64 mode. If minute blocks, however, are specified consecutively, overlap may not be performed. The following pulses in block F2 are added to the pulses remaining at the end of pulse distribution in block F1. (Number of pulses to be added) = F2 (Number of pulses required at the end of block F1) F1 When F1 = F2 ?? ?? ?? ?? ? ? ? ? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ? ? ? ? ?? ?? ?? ?? ? ? ? ? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ? ? ? ? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ? ? ? F F1 F2 t When block overlap is disabled ?? ?? ?? ?? ? ? ? ? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ? ? ? ? ?? ?? ?? ?? ? ? ? ? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ? ? ? ? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ? ? F F1 F2 t ?? ?? When block overlap is enabled RTO Block overlap in rapid traverse 0 : Blocks are not overlapped in rapid traverse. 1 : Blocks are overlapped in rapid traverse. NOTE See the description of parameter No.1722. NCI Inposition check at deceleration 0 : Performed 1 : Not performed ACD Function for automatically reducing the feedrate at corners (automatic corner override function) 0 : The function is not used. 1 : The function is used. 4.14 PARAMETERS OF ACCELERATION/ DECELERATION CONTROL B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 63 #7 1602 #6 LS2 #5 #4 CSD #3 BS2 #2 COV COV #1 #0 FWB [Data type] Bit FWB Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration before interpolation 0 : Type A of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used. 1 : Type B of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used. Type A: When a feedrate is to be changed by a command, acceleration/deceleration starts after the program enters the block in which the command is specified. Type B: When a feedrate is to be changed by a command, deceleration starts and terminates at the block before the blcock in which the command is specified. When a feedrate is to be changed by a command, acceleration starts after the program enters theblock in which the command is specified. F1 F2 F3 Feedrate Time N1 N2 F1 F2 F3 Feedrate Time N1 N2 Type A Specified feedrate Feedrate after acceleration/ deceleration before inter- polation is applied Specified feedrate Feedrate after acceleration/ deceleration before inter- polation is applied Point 1 Type B To change the feedrate from F3 to F2, it is necessary to start reducing the feedrate at point 1. COV The outer arc cutting feedrate change function of the automatic corner override function is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. BS2 Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed in look–ahead control mode/high–precision contour control mode is: 0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/ deceleration (one of which is selected by the LS2 parameter (bit 6 of parameter No.1602)). 1 : Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration. BS2 LS2 Acceleration/deceleration 0 0 Exponential acceleration/deceleration after interpolation 0 1 Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation. (The option for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is required.) 1 0 Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation. (The option for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is required.) NOTE If the optional function of linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed is not provided, exponential acceleration/deceleration is used irrespective of this setting. To use bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, set this parameter to 0 and select the acceleration/deceleration using CTBx, bit 1 of parameter No.1610. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 64 CSD In the function for automatically reducing a feedrate at corners, 0 : Angles are used for controlling the feedrate. 1 : Differences in feedrates are used for controlling the feedrate. LS2 Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed in look–ahead control mode/high–precision contour control mode is: 0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration. 1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration. (The function for linear acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is required.) #7 BEL 1603 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 [Data type] Bit BEL In simple high–precision contour control mode: 0 : Linear acceleration/deceleration before look–ahead interpolation is used. 1 : Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before look–ahead interpolation is used. #7 1610 #6 #5 #4 JGLx #3 #2 #1 CTBx #0 CTLx [Data type] Bit axis CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run 0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied. 1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied. Parameter Acceleration/deceleration CTBx CTLx Acceleration/deceleration 0 0 Exponential acceleration/deceleration 0 1 Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation 1 0 Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation CTBx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run 0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/decel- eration after interpolation is applied (depending on the setting in CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No.1610). 1 : Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied. NOTE This parameter is effective only when the function of bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed is provided. If the function is not provided, the setting in CTLx, bit 0 of parameter No.1610, determines the type of acceleration/deceleration irrespective of the setting in this parameter. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 65 JGLx Acceleration/deceleration in jog feed 0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied. 1 : Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied (depending on which is used for cutting feed). 1620 Time constant used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell–shaped accelera- tion/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Specify a time constant used for acceleration/deceleration in rapid tra- verse. When the optional function of bell–shaped acceleration/decelera- tion in rapid traverse is provided, bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration is applied in rapid traverse. If the function is not provided, linear accelera- tion/deceleration is applied. (1) When the function is provided, set this parameter to time constant T1 used in bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse, and set parameter No.1621 to time constant T2. (2) When the function is not provided, specify a time constant used in linear acceleration/deceleration. NOTE When parameter No.1621 (time constant T2 used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse) is set to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration is applied in rapid traverse even if the function is provided. In this case, this parameter stands for a time constant used in linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 66 Speed Rapid traverse feed rate Time T: Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration T T Speed Rapid traverse rate TIme T2/2 T2 T1 T2/2 T1: Set a time constant used for lin- ear acceleration/deceleration T2: Set a time for rounding. Total time=T1 + T2 Time for linear=T1 – T2 Time for rounding part=T2 Set the value when the rapid traverse rate is 100%. If it is under 100%, the total time is reduced. (Constant acceleration method) The value of T1 is determined from the torque of motor. Usually set the value of T2 to 24 ms ir 32 ms. 1621 Time constant t T2 used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid tra- verse for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 512 Specify time constant T2 used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis. NOTE 1 This parameter is effective when the function of bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse is provided. Set parameter No.1620 to time constant T1 used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse, and set this parameter to time constant T2. For details of time constants T1 and T2, see the description of parameter No.1620. 2 When this parameter is set to 0, linear acceleration/ deceleration is applied in rapid traverse. The setting in parameter No.1620 is used as a time constant in linear acceleration/deceleration. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 67 1622 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration or bell–shaped accelera- tion/deceleration after interpolation, or linear aceeleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000(exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed) 0 to 512 (linear or bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed) Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed, bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis. Except for special applications, the same time constant must be set for all axes in this parameter. If the time constants set for the axes differ from each other, proper straight lines and arcs cannot be obtained. Speed T Time T : Total time. it is constant irrespective of feed rate. (Time constant is constant). The curve corresponds to that T1 = T/2 and T2 = T/2 set in pa- rameter No.1620 and 1621. Bell–shaped acceleraton/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation 1623 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0,6 to 15000 0,6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0,6 to 6000 0,6 to 4800 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 0,6 to 15000 0,6 to 12000 Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis. NOTE Except for special applications, this parameter must be set to 0 for all axes. If a value other than 0 is specified, proper straight lines and arcs cannot be obtained. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 68 1624 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration or bell–shaped accelera- tion/deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, in jog feed for each axis. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000(exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed) 0 to 512 (linear or bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in jog feed) Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration, bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in jog feed fot each axis. 1625 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis. 1626 Time constant of exponetial acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for each axis [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting cycle (G76, G78 (G92 in G code system A)) for each axis. 1627 FL rate of exponential acceleration /deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting cycle (G76, G78 (G92 in G code system A)) for each axis. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 69 1630 Parameter 1 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration be- fore interpolation (maximum machining feedrate during linear acceleration/de- celeration before interpolation) [Data type] 2–word Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 96000 6 to 48000 This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation. In this parameter, set a maximum machining speed during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. In parameter No.1631, set a time used to reach the maximum machining speed. Speed Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Time Parameter 1: Parameter No.1630 Parameter 2: Parameter No.1631 NOTE 1 When 0 is set in parameter No.1630 or parameter No.1631, linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled. 2 In the look–ahead control mode, parameter No.1770 and parameter No.1771 are valid. 1631 Parameter 2 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration be- fore interpolation (time used to reach the maximum machining speed during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 1 ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation. In this parameter, set the time (time constant) used to reach the speed set in parameter No.1630. NOTE 1 When 0 is set in parameter No.1630 or parameter No.1631, linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled. 2 In parameter Nos. 1630 and 1631, set values that satisfy the following: Parameter No.1630/Parameter No.1631 > 5 3 In the look–ahead control mode, parameter No.1770 and parameter No.1771 are valid. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 70 Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) of the inner circular cutting rate in automatic corner override 1710 [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 100 This parameter sets the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) when the inner circular cutting speed is changed by automatic corner override. In circular cutting with an inward offset, the actual feedrate for a specified feedrate (F) is expressed as follows: Rc: Radius of the path of the cutter's center. Rp: Programmed radius F Rc Rp Then, the actual feedrate is controlled so that the feedrate on the programmed path can achieve the specified feedrate F. Rp Rc Path of the cutter's center Programmed path Fig. 4.14 (a) Rp and Rc If Rc is too small in comparison with Rp, such that Rc/Rp 8 0, the cutter will stop. To prevent this, a minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is set. 1711 Angle (θp) to recognize the inner corner in override [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Degree [Valid data range] 1 to 179 (standard value = 91) Set the angle to recognize the inner corner when override is performed for the inner corner. When Rc/Rp 8 0, the actual feedrate is set as follows: F (MDR) 1711 Angle (θp) used to recognize an inner corner in inner corner override [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Degree [Valid data range] 1 to 179 (standard value = 91) This parameter sets the angle used to recognize an inner corner for inner corner override by automatic corner override. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 71 1712 Amount of override for an inner corner [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 100 (standard value = 50) Set the amount of override for an inner corner. 1713 Distance Le from the starting point in inner corner override [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 1 0.1 0.01 mm Inch input 0.1 0.01 0.001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 3999 Set distance Le from the starting point in an inner comer for corner override. 1714 Distance Ls up to the ending point in inner corner override [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 1 0.1 0.01 mm Inch input 0.1 0.01 0.001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 3999 Set distance Ls up to the end point in an inner corner for corner override. If qx qp, the inside of a comer is recognized. (q is set in parameter 1711.) When an inner corner is recognized, the feedrate is overridden in the range of Le in the block immediately before the intersection of the corner and Ls in the next block following the intersection. Ls and Le are each a straight line connecting the intersection of the corner and a given point on the path of the cutter's center. Ls and Le are set in parameters 1713 and 1714. An override is applied from point a to b. Programmed path Cutter center path Ls Le a b θ Fig.4.14 (b) Distance Le and Ls in the automatic corner override at an inner corner 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 72 1722 Rapid traverse feedrate reduction ratio for overlapping rapid traverse blocks [Data type] Byte axis [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 100 This parameter is used when rapid traverse blocks are arranged successively, or when a rapid traverse block is followed by a block that does not cause, movement. When the feedrate for each axis of a block is reduced to the ratio set in this parameter, the execution of the next block is started. Fh Fd X–axis feedrate N1 G00 X– – ; N2 G00 X– – ; When the function of overlapping rapid traverse blocks is enabled When the function of overlapping rapid traverse blocks is disabled Fh a Fd : Rapid traverse feedrate : Setting of parameter No.1722 (feedrate reduction ratio) : Feedrate where deceleration is terminated: Fh x a/100 t NOTE The parameter No.1722 is effective when parameter No.1601 #4 (RT0) is set to 1. 1730 Maximum feedrate for arc radius R [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 8 to 15000 0 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 8 to 6000 0 to 4800 Set a maximum feedrate for the arc radius set in parameter No.1731. Set this parameter when the arc radius–based feedrate clamping function is enabled. 1731 Arc radius value corresponding to a maximum feedrate [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Unit IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Linear axis (millimeter machine) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Linear axis (inch machine) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Examples B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 73 [Valid data range] 1000 to 99999999 Set the arc radius corresponding to the maximum feedrate set in parameter No.1730. Set this parameter when the arc radius–based feedrate clamping function is enabled. 1732 Minimum value (RV min) for arc radius–based feedrate clamp [Data type] Word Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0 to 15000 0 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0 to 6000 0 to 4800 The arc radius–based feedrate clamping function reduces the maximum feedrate as the arc radius decreases. When the specified maximum feedrate is not greater than RV min (minimum value for arc radius–based feedrate clamping), RV min is used as the maximum feedrate. 1740 Critical angle subtended by two blocks for automatic corner deceleration [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] 0.001 deg [Valid data range] 0 to 180000 Set a critical angle to be subtended by two blocks for corner deceleration when the angle–based automatic corner deceleration function is used. The angle subtended by two blocks is defined as q in the examples shown below. θ θ Block A (G01) Block B (G01) Angle subtended by two straight lines Block A (G02) Block B(G01) Angle subtended by an arc and its tangent 1741 Feedrate for assuming the termination of automatic corner deceleration (for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Set the feedrate for assuming the termination of deceleration in automatic corner deceleration. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 74 1762 Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for cutting feed in the look– ahead control mode [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] 1 ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Set an exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for cutting feed in the look–ahead control mode. 1763 Minimum speed in exponential acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed in the look–ahead control mode [Data type] Word axis Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Set minimum speed (FL) in exponential acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed in the look–ahead control mode. 1768 Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed in lock– ahead control mode. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 8 to 512 Thisparametersetsatimeconstantforlinearacceleration/decelerationfor cutting feed in the look–ahead control mode. NOTE The function for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed isrequired. 1770 Parameter 1 (for look–ahead control) for setting an acceleration for linear ac- celeration/decelerationbefore interpolation (maximum machining speed during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation) [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data, valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 240000 6 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 96000 6 to 48000 This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation in the look–ahead control mode. In this B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 75 parameter, set the maximum machining speed during linear acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation. Set the time used to reach the maximummachining speed in parameter No.1771. Speed Parameter 1 (No.1770) Parameter 2 (No.1771) Time NOTE When 0 is set in parameter No.1770 or parameter No.1771, linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled. 1771 Parameter 2 (for look–ahead control) for setting an acceleration for linear ac- celeration/deceleration before interpolation (time used to reach the maximum machining speed during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 1 msec [Valid range] 0 to 4000 This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation in the look–ahead control mode. In this parameter, set the time (time constant) used toreach the speed set in parameter No.1770. NOTE 1 When 0 is set in parameter No.1770 or parameter No.1771, linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled. 2 In parameter Nos. 1770 and 1771, set values that satisfy the following: Parameter No.1770/Parameter No.1771 y 5 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 76 1772 Time constant for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration of acceleration time fixed type before look–ahead interpolation [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 100 This parameter is used to set a time constant when the BEL parameter (bit 7 of parameter No.1603) is set to 1, that is, when bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before look–ahead interpolation is selected in simple high–precision contour control mode. Set the value of tb as shown below. When 0 is set, linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is applied. Feedrate Linear acceleration/decel- eration Time ta: Depends on linear accelera- tion. tb: Bell–shaped time constant tc: Bell–shapedacceleration/de- celeration time tc=ta+tb tb tb tb tb ta ta tc tc Bell–shaped acceleration/ deceleration NOTE The option for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before look–ahead interpolation is required. This parameter is enabled only in simple high–precision contour control mode. 1775 (Must not be used) 1776 (Must not be used) 1777 Minimum speed for the automatic corner deceleration function (look–ahead control) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data, valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Set a speed at which the number of buffered pulses in deceleration is assumed to be 0 when linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 77 1778 Minimum speed of for the automtic corner deceleration function (for linear accel- eration/deceleration before interpolation) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data, valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Set a speed at which the number of buffered pulses in deceleration is assumed to be 0 when linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used. 1779 Critical angle subtended by two blocks for automatic corner deceleration (for look–ahead control) [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] 0.001 deg [Valid data range] 0 to 180000 Set a critical angle to be subtended by two blocks for corner deceleration when the angle–basedautomatic corner deceleration function is used. The angle subtended by two blocks is defined as θ in the examples shown below. θ θ Block A (G01) Block B (G01) Angle subtended by two straight lines Block A (G02) Block B (G01) Angle subtended by an arc and its tangent 1780 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference–based corner deceleration function (for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation) [Data type] Word [Unit of data, valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Set the speed difference for the speed difference–based automatic corner deceleration function when linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 78 1781 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference–based corner deceleration function (linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data, valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotation axis 0.1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Set speed difference for the speed difference–based automatic corner deceleration function when linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation used. 1783 Allowable speed difference for the speed difference based corner deceleration function (linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data, valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotation axis 0.1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 A separate allowable feedrate difference can be set for each axis. The allowable feedrate difference is set for each axis with this parameter. Amongtheaxesthatexeedthespecifiedallowablefeedratedifference,the axis with the greatest ratio of the actual feedrate difference to the allowable feedrate difference is used as the reference to calculate the reduced feedrate at the corner. 1784 Speed when overtravel alarm has generated during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Deceleration is started beforehand to reach the feedrate set in the parameter when an overtravel alarm is issued (when a limit is reached) during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. By using this parameter, the overrun distance that occurs when an overtravel alarm is output can be reduced. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 79 NOTE 1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the control described above is not exercised. 2 Use type–B linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (by setting bit 0 (FWB) of parameter No.1602 to 1). 3 The control described above is applicable only to stored stroke check 1. 1785 Parameter for determining an allowable acceleration when the feedrate is set by acceleration [Data type] Word–axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the time required to attain the maximum cutting feedrate to determine the allowable acceleration when the feedrate is determined by acceleration in simple high–precision contour control mode. The maximum cutting feedrate and the data set in this parameter are used to determine the allowable acceleration. As the maximum cutting feedrate parameter, parameter No.1432 (maximum cutting feedrate in simple high–precision contour control mode) is used. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 80 #7 1800 #6 #5 TRC #4 RBK #3 FFR #2 OZR #1 CVR #0 [Data type] Bit CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before position control ready signal PRDY comes ON 0: A servo alarm is generated. 1: A servo alarm is not generated. OZR When manual reference position return is attempted in the halt state during automatic operation (feed hold stop state) under any of the conditions listed below: 0: Manual reference position return is not performed, with P/S alarm No.091. 1: Manual reference position return is performed without an alarm occurring. < Conditions > (1) When there is a remaining distance to travel. (2) When an auxiliary function (miscellaneous function, spindle–speed function, tool function) is being executed. (3) When a cycle such as a dwell cycle or canned cycle is being executed. FFR Feed–forward control is enabled for 0 : Cutting feed only 1 : Cutting feed and rapid traverse RBK Backlash compensation applied separately for cutting feed and rapid traverse 0: Not performed 1: Performed TRC The servo trace functon is: 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled (Also set parameter No.1870.) #7 1801 #6 #5 CIN #4 CCI CCI #3 #2 #1 PM2 #0 PM1 [Data type] Bit PM1, PM2 Sets a gear ratio between the spindle and motor when the servo motor–based speed control function is used. 1/1 1/2 1/4 1/8 Magnification PM2 0 0 1 1 PM1 0 1 0 1 Magnification= spindle speed motor speed CCI The in–position area for cutting feed is: 0 : Set in parameter No.1826 (same as for rapid traverse). 1 : Set in bit 5 (CIN) of parameter No.1801. 4.15 PARAMETERS OF SERVO B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 81 CIN When bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No.1801 = 1, the in–position area for cutting feed is: 0 : Use value in parameter No.1827 if the next block is also for cutting feed, or use value in parameter No.1826 if the next block is not for cutting feed. 1 : Use value in parameter No.1827, regardless of the next block. (The setting of parameter No.1826 is used for rapid traverse, and the setting of parameter No.1827 is used for cutting feed.) #7 1802 #6 #5 DPS #4 #3 #2 #1 DC4 DC4 #0 CTS NOTE After this parameter is set, the power needs to be turned off. [Data type] Bit CTS The servo motor–based speed control function is: 0 : Not used 1 : Used DC4 When the reference position is established on the linear scale with reference marks: 0 : An absolute position is established by detecting three reference marks. 1 : An absolute position is established by detecting four reference marks. DPS When servo motor–based speed control is applied, a position coder is: 0 : Used 1 : Not used #7 1803 #6 #5 #4 TQF #3 #2 #1 TQA #0 TQI [Data type] Bit TQI While torque restriction is applied, in–position check is: 0 : Performed. 1 : Not performed. TQA While torque restriction is applied, checking for an excessive error in the stopped state/during movement is: 0 : Performed. 1 : Not performed. TQF When torque control is performed by an axis control command of the PMC axis control function, follow–up operation is: 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 82 #7 1804 #6 SAK #5 ANA #4 IVO #3 #2 #1 BLC #0 [Data type] Bit axis BLC During circular interpolation by jog feed (manual circular interpolation function), the backlash acceleration function is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. IVO When an attempt is made to release an emergency stop while the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is 1: 0 : The emergency stop state is not released until the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 0. 1 : The emergency stop state is released. NOTE When a reset is issued while the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1 and the motor activating current is low, the reset state can also be released, provided this parameter is set to 1. ANA When an abnormal load is detected for an axis: 0 : Movement along all axes is stopped, and a servo alarm is output. 1 : No servo alarm is output, and movement along only the axes of the group containing the axis with the abnormal load is stopped in interlock mode. (The group number of each axis is set in parameter No.1881.) SAK When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal IGNVRY is 1, or when the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signals IGVRY1 to IGVRY8 are 1: 0 : Servo ready signal SA is set to 0. 1 : Servo ready signal SA remains set to 1. #7 1815 #6 #5 APCx #4 APZx #3 #2 DCLx #1 OPTx #0 NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit axis OPTx Position detector 0 : A separate pulse coder is not used. 1 : A separate pulse coder is used. DCLx As a separate position detector, the linear scale with reference marks is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. NOTE When using the linear scale with reference marks, also set the OPTx parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.1815) to 1. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 83 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the absolute position detector is used 0 : Not corresponding 1 : Corresponding NOTE When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment is performed or after the absolute position detector is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0, power must be turned off and on, then manual reference position return must be performed. This completes the positional correspondence between the machine position and the position on the absolute position detector, and sets this parameter to 1 automatically. APCx Position detector 0 : Other than absolute position detector 1 : Absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder) #7 1816 #6 DM3x #5 DM2x #4 DM1x #3 #2 #1 #0 NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit axis DM1x to DM3x Setting of detection multiplier Set value Detection m ltiplier DM3x DM2x DM1x Detection multiplier 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1/2 1 3/2 2 5/2 3 7/2 4 NOTE When the flexble feed gear is used, do not use these parameters. Set the numerator and denominator of DMR to an appropriate values in parameters 2084 and 2085 respectively. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 84 #7 1817 #6 TAN #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit axis TAN Tandem control 0 : Not used 1 : Used NOTE Set this parameter to both master axis and slave axis. #7 1819 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 CRFx CRFx #0 FUPx FUPx NAHx [Data type] Bit axis FUPx To perform follow–up when the servo is off is set for each axis. 0: The follow–up signal, *FLWU, determines whether follow–up is performed or not. When *FLWU is 0, follow–up is performed. When *FLWU is 1, follow–up is not performed. 1: Follow–up is not performed. NOTE When the index table indexing function (M series) is used, be sure to set FUPx of the 4th axis to 1. CRFx When servo alarm No.445 (software disconnection), No.446 (hardware disconnection), No.447 (hardware disconnection (separate type)), or No.421 (excessive dual position feedback error) is issued: 0 : The reference position setting remains as is. 1 : The system enters the reference position undefined state. NAHx In the look–ahead control mode, advanced feed–forward is: 0 : Used 1 : Not used NOTE Set1 for a PMC–based control axis. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 85 1820 Command multiplier for each axis (CMR) NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte axis Set a command multiplier indicating the ratio of the least command increment to the detection unit for each axis. Least command increment = detection unit command multiplier Relationship between the increment system and the least command increment (1) T series Least input increment Least command increment IS–B Millimeter hi Millimeter i t 0.001 mm (diameter specification) 0.0005 mm machine input 0.001 mm (radius specification) 0.001 mm Inch input 0.0001 inch (diameter specification) 0.0005 mm 0.0001 inch (radius specification) 0.001 mm Inch hi Millimeter i t 0.001 mm (diameter specification) 0.00005 inch machine input 0.001 mm (radius specification) 0.0001 inch Inch input 0.0001 inch (diameter specification) 0.00005 inch 0.0001 inch (radius specification) 0.0001 inch Rotation axis 0.001 deg 0.001 deg Least input increment Least command increment IS–C Millimeter hi Millimeter i t 0.0001 mm (diameter specification) 0.00005 mm machine input 0.0001 mm (radius specification) 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.00001inch (diameter specification) 0.00005 mm 0.00001 inch (radius specification) 0.0001 mm Inch hi Millimeter i t 0.0001 mm (diameter specification) 0.000005 inch machine input 0.0001 mm (radius specification) 0.00001 inch Inch input 0.00001inch (diameter specification) 0.000005 inch 0.00001 inch (radius specification) 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg (2) M series Increment t Least input increment and least command increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Units Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 86 Setting command multiply (CMR), detection multiply (DMR), and the capacity of the reference counter least command increment X CMR Error counter X DMR Reference counter DA Converter Position detector To velocity control Feedback pulse Detection unit + – Fig.4.15 (a) CMR, DMR, and the Capacity of the Reference Counter Set the magnification ratios of CMR and DMR so that the weight of positive inputs to the error counter equals that of negative inputs. feedback pulse unit Least command increment CMR =detection unit= DMR The feedback pulse unit varies according to the type of detector. Feedback pulse unit = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder the number of pulses per rotation of the pulse coder (2000, 2500, or 3000) As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for the reference position return in the grid method. Size of the reference counter = Grid interval/detection unit Grid interval = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder The value set in the parameter is obtained as follows: (1) When command multiplier is 1/2 to 1/27 Set value = 1 (Command multiplier) + 100 Valid data range: 102 to 127 (2) When command multiply is 1 to 48 Set value = 2 command multiplier Valid data range: 2 to 96 NOTE When command multiplier is 1 to 48, the set value must be determined so that an integer can be set for command multiplier. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 87 1821 Reference counter size for each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Set the size of the reference counter. NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. When using the linear scale with reference marks, set the space between the mark–1 indications. 1825 Servo loop gain for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] 0.01 s –1 [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 Set the loop gain for position control for each axis. Whenthemachineperformslinearandcircularinterpolation(cutting),the same value must be set for all axes. When the machine requires positioning only, the values set for the axes may differ from one another. As the loop gain increases, the response by position control is improved. A too large loop gain, however, makes the servo system unstable. The relationship between the positioning deviation (the number of pulses counted by the error counter) and the feedrate is expressed as follows: feedrate Positioning deviation = 60 (loop gain) Unit : Positioning deviation mm, inches, or deg Feedrate : mm/min, inches/min, or deg/min loop gain: s–1 1826 In–position width for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 The in–position width is set for each axis. When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position (the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the in–position width, the machine is assumed to have reached the specified position. (The machine is in the in–position state.) 1827 In–position width in cutting feed for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set an in–position width for each axis in cutting feed. This parameter is valid when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No.1801=1. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 88 1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis. If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit during movement, a servo alarm is generated, and operation is stopped immediately (as in emergency stop). Generally, set the positioning deviation for rapid traverse plus some margin in this parameter. 1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis. If, in the stopped state, the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit set for stopped state, a servo alarm is generated, and operation is stopped immediately (as in emergency stop). 1830 Axis–by–axis positional deviation limit at servo–off time [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit at servo–off time, on an axis–by–axis basis. If the value specified with this parameter is exceeded at servo–off time, a servo alarm (No.410) is issued to cause an immediate stop (same as an emergency stop). Usually, set the same value as a positional deviation at stop time (parameter No.1829). NOTE When this parameter is set to 0, no positional deviation limit check is made at servo–off time. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 89 1832 Feed stop positioning deviation for each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Set the feed stop positioning deviation for each axis. If the positioning deviation exceeds the feed stop positioning deviation during movement, pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration control are stopped temporarily. When the positioning deviation drops to the feed stop positioning deviation or below, pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration control are resumed. The feed stop function is used to reduce overshoot in acceleration/ deceleration mainly by large servo motors. Generally, set the middle value between the positioning deviation limit during movement and the positioning deviation at rapid traverse as the feed stop positioning deviation. 1836 Servo error amount where reference position return is possible [Data type] Byte axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 127 This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference position return in manual reference position return. In general, set this parameter to 0. (When 0 is set, 128 is assumed as the default.) NOTE When bit 0 (PLC01) of parameter No.2000 is set to 1, a value ten times greater than the value set in this parameter is used to make the check. [Example] When the value 10 is set in this parameter, and bit 0 (PLC01) of parameter No.2000 is set to 1, reference 1850 Grid shift and reference position shift for each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 A grid shift is set for each axis. To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount set in this parameter. Up to the maximum value counted by the reference counter can be specified as the grid shift. In case of parameter SFD (No.1002#2) is 0: Grid shift In case of parameter SFD (No.1002#2) is 1: Reference point shift NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 90 1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] –9999 to +9999 Set the backlash compensating value for each axis. When the machine moves in a direction opposite to the reference position return direction after the power is turned on, the first backlash compensation is performed. 1852 Backlash compensating value used for rapid traverse for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] –9999 to +9999 Set the backlash compensating value used in rapid traverse for each axis. This parameter is valid when RBK, #4 of parameter 1800, is set to 1. More precise machining can be performed by changing the backlash compensating value depending on the feedrate, the rapid traverse or the cutting feed. Let the measured backlash at cutting feed be A and the measured backlash at rapid traverse be B. The backlash compensating value is shown below depending on the change of feedrate (cutting feed or rapid traverse) and the change of the direction of movement. Table 4.15 Backlash Compensating Value Change of feedrate Change of direction of movement Cutting feed to cutting feed Rapid traverse to rapid traverse Rapid traverse to cutting feed Cutting feed to rapid traverse Same direction 0 0 ±α ± (–α) Opposite direction ±A ±B ±B (B+α) ±B (B+α) a = (A–B)/2 The positive or negative direction for compensating values is the direction of movement. a a A B Stopped during cutting feed Stopped during rapid traverse Assign the measured backlash at cutting feed (A) in parameter No.1851 and that at rapid traverse (B) in param- eter No.1852. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 91 NOTE 1 Jog feed is regarded as cutting feed. 2 The backlash compensation depending on a rapid traverse and a cutting feed is not performed until the first reference position return is completed after the power is turned on. The normal backlash compensation is performed according to the value specified in parameter No.1851 irrespective of a rapid traverse and a cutting feed. 3 The backlash compensation depending on a rapid traverse and a cutting feed is performed only when RBK, #4 of parameter No.1800, is set to 1. When RBK is set to 0, the normal backlash is performed. 1870 Number of the program for storing servo trace data [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 Set the number of the program for storing servo trace data. 1871 Program number where servo trace data is stored (when the program number is 8 digits) [Data type] 2–word axis [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Set a program number where servo trace data is to be stored, when the program number is 8 digits. NOTE Do not use parameter No.1870, which is dedicated to the standard function (4–digit O number). 1874 Number of the conversion coefficient for inductosyn position detection 1875 Denominator of the conversion coefficient for inductosyn position detection NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 Set a conversion coefficient for inductosyn position detection for each axis. The value set is determined as follows: = Number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution 1,000,000 No. 1874 No. 1875 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 92 1876 One–pitch interval of the inductosyn NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 Set a one–pitch interval of the inductosyn for each axis. 1877 Amount of inductosyn shift NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] –32767 to 32767 Set the amount of inductosyn shift for each axis. By using this parameter, calculate the machine position from the expression below. Machine position = M–S– (parameter No. 1877) λ Rounded offλ +S M: Absolute motor position (detection unit) S : Data of offset from the inductosyn (detection unit) λ : One–pitch interval of the inductosyn (detection unit) (Parameter No. 1876) The remainder of (M–S) divided by λ approaches 0. (Normally, set the value of diagnostic data No.380.) 1880 Abnormal load detection alarm timer [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 (200 mse is assumed when 0 is set) This parameter sets the time from the detection of an abnormal load until a servo alarm is issued. The specified value is rounded up to the nearest integral multiple of 8 msec. [Example] When 30 is specified, the value is rounded up to 32 (msec). B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 93 1881 Group number when an abnormal load is detected [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 8 This parameter sets the group number of each axis, used when an abnormal load is detected. If an abnormal load is detected for an axis, only the movement along the axes of the group containing the axis with the abnormal load is stopped. If 0 is set for an axis, movement along that axis is stopped whenever an abnormal load is detected for any axis. Example: Assume that the following settings have been made. If an abnormal load is detected for the sixth axis, movement along the second, fourth, sixth, and seventh axes is stopped. If an abnormal load is detected for the fourth axis, movement along the fourth and seventh axes is stopped. Parameter No.1881 Setting (First axis) 1 (Second axis) 2 (Third axis) 1 (Fourth axis) 0 (Fifth axis) 3 (Sixth axis) 2 (Seventh axis) 0 NOTE This parameter is enabled when the ANA parameter (bit 5 of parameter No.1804) is 1. 1882 Space between the mark–2 indications on the linear scale with reference marks NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the setting to become effective. [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the space between the mark–2 indications on the linear scale with reference marks. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 94 1883 Distance from the zero point of the linear scale with reference marks to the ref- erence position NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the setting to become effective. [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 This parameter sets the distance from the zero point of the linear scale with reference marks to the reference position. The zero point of the scale is that point where mark 1 and mark 2 match. Generally, this point is a virtual point that does not actually exist on the scale. (See the figure below.) When the reference position is located in the positive direction as viewed from the zero point of the scale, set a positive value for this parameter. When the reference position is located in the negative direction as viewed from the zero point, set a negative value. 41.8 8.2 42.0 Parameter No.1821 Reference position Scale Scale end Zero point of the scale Parameter No.1883 Parameter No.1882 8.0 Mark 2 Mark 1 = mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 1885 Maximum allowable value for total travel during torque control [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum allowable value for the total travel (error counter value) for an axis placed under torque control, as specified by the axis control command of the PMC axis control function. If the total travel exceeds the parameter–set value while torque control is applied, a servo alarm (No.423) is generated. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the TQF parameter (bit 4 of parameter No.1803) is 0 (follow–up is not performed during torque control). B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 95 1886 Positional deviation when torque control is canceled [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the positional deviation used when torque control, performed for an axis according to the axis control command of the PMC axis control function, is canceled and position control is resumed. After the positional deviation has fallen to the parameter–set value, switching to position control is performed. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the TQF parameter (bit 4 of parameter No.1803) is 0 (follow–up is not performed during torque control). 1890 Servo motor speed for detection NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 8000 The servo motor speed of each axis is monitored and a motor speed detection signal is output indicating whether the speed of each axis exceeds the value set in this parameter (set in the Y address specified in parameter No.1891) NOTE No motor speed detection signals are output when the servo/spindle motor speed detection function is not used or 0 is set in this parameter. 1891 Initial value of the Y address where motor speed detection signals are output NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 0 to 126, 1000 to 1013, 1020 to 1033 This parameter specifies the Y address where motor speed detection signals are output. The spindle motor speeds and servo motor speed of each axis are monitored and motor speed detection signals are output to the Y address specified in this parameter and (Y address +1) to indicate whether speeds exceed the values set in the parameters. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 96 – Y address n :Servo motor speed detection signals are output. (See the description of parameter No.1890.) – Y address n+1 :Spindle motor speed detection signals are output. (See the description of parameter No.4345.) #7 DSV8 Y (n+0) #6 DSV7 #5 DSV6 #4 DSV5 #3 DSV4 #2 DSV3 #1 DSV2 #0 DSV1 #7 Y (n+1) #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 DSP2 #0 DSP1 Reserved DSV1–DSV8 : Motor speed detection signals of servo motors for axis 1 to axis 8 DSP1, DSP2 : Motor speed detection signals of the first and second serial spindles NOTE 1 No motor speed detection signals are output when the servo/spindle motor speed detection function is not used, the value 0 or a value beyond the allowable data range is specified in this parameter, or an input/output address specified within the allowable data range represents an address where no I/O device is mounted. 2 Be sure to specify a Y address that is not used with a PMC sequence program (ladder). 3 When controlling two path lathe, ensure that the same value is not set for 1 path lathe and 2 path lathe . (Set a separate address for 1 path lathe and 2 path lathe.) 1895 Servo motor axis number used for a milling tool [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., number of controlled axes This parameter sets the servo motor axis number used for displaying the speed of a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor. 1896 Number of gear teeth on the servo motor axis side [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 This parameter sets the number of servo motor axis gear teeth used for displaying the speed of a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor. 1897 Number of gear teeth on the milling axis side [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 This parameter sets the number of milling axis gear teeth used for displaying the speed of a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 97 #7 1902 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ASE #0 FMD NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the setting to become effective. [Data type] Bit FMD The FSSB setting mode is: 0 : Automatic setting mode. (When information including an axis–amplifier relationship is set on the FSSB setting screen, parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 through 1919, 1936, and 1937 are set automatically.) 1 : Manual setting 2 mode. (Set parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 through 1919, 1936, and 1937 manually.) ASE When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the FMD parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1902) is set to 0), automatic setting is: 0 : Not completed. 1 : Completed. (This bit is automatically set to 1 upon the completion of automatic setting.) #7 1904 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DSP NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the setting to become effective. [Data type] Bit axis DSP 0 : Two axes use one DSP. (Ordinary axes) 1 : One axis uses one DSP. (Axes such as a learning control axis) NOTE Parameter No.1904 is set on the FSSB setting screen. So, parameter No.1904 should not have to be specified directly. This parameter need not be set in FSSB manual setting 2 mode. #7 PM2 1905 #6 PM1 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 FSL NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the setting to become effective. [Data type] Bit axis FSL The type of interface used between the servo amplifier and servo software is: 0 : Fast type. 1 : Slow type. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 98 The user can choose between two interface types for servo data transfer: fast type or slow type. Set this parameter so that the following conditions are satisfied: S When a one–axis amplifier is used, either the fast type or slow type interface can be used. S When a two–axis amplifier is used, the use of the fast type for both axes is not allowed. The slow type can be used for both axes. S When a three–axis amplifier is used, the requirement for a two–axes amplifier described above applies to the first and second axes, and the requirement for a one–axis amplifier, again described above, applies to the third axis. S When an odd number is specified for parameter No.1023, the fast type interfacemustbeused. However,theslowtypemaybeusedforanEGB workpiece axis, learning control axis, high–speed current loop axis, and high–speed interface axis. S When an even number is specified for parameter No.1023, only the slow type interface can be used. (The FSL bit must always be set to 1.) Controlled axis number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Program axis name No.1020 X Y Z A B C Servo axis number No.1023 1 2 3 4 5 6 Interface type Fast/Slow F F S S F S CNC 2–axis amplifier 2–axis amplifier 1–axis amplifier X (Fast) A (Slow) Y (Fast) Z (Slow) B (Fast) C (Slow) 1–axis amplifier PM1 The first pulse module is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. PM2 The second pulse module is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. NOTE When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the FMD parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1902) is set to 0), parameter No.1905 is automatically set when input is performed with the FSSB setting screen. When manual setting 2 mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the FMD parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1902) is set to 1), parameter No.1905 must be set directly. When a pulse module is used, a connector number must be set in the corresponding parameter (No.1936 or No.1937). B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 99 1910 Address conversion table value for slave 1 (ATR) 1911 Address conversion table value for slave 2 (ATR) 1912 Address conversion table value for slave 3 (ATR) 1913 Address conversion table value for slave 4 (ATR) 1914 Address conversion table value for slave 5 (ATR) 1915 Address conversion table value for slave 6 (ATR) 1916 Address conversion table value for slave 7 (ATR) 1917 Address conversion table value for slave 8 (ATR) 1918 Address conversion table value for slave 9 (ATR) 1919 Address conversion table value for slave 10 (ATR) NOTE After these parameters have been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the settings to become effective. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 7, 16, 40, 48 These parameters set address conversion table values for slaves 1 to 10. A slave is the generic name given to a device such as a servo amplifier or pulse module, connected to the CNC via an FSSB optical cable. Smaller numbers, starting from 1 are assigned to slaves closer to the CNC; the maximum number that can be assigned is 10. A two–axis amplifier has two slaves, while a three–axis amplifier has three slaves. Set each parameter as described below, depending on whether the slave is an amplifier or pulse module, or when no slave exists. S When the slave is an amplifier: Set the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the setting of parameter No.1023 for the axis to which the amplifier is assigned. S When the slave is a pulse module: Set 16 for the first pulse module (closest to the CNC). Set 48 for the second pulse module (furthest from the CNC). S When no slave exists Set 40. When using the simple electronic gearbox (EGB) function, however, set a value as described below. NOTE 1 When using the simple electronic gearbox (EGB) function The EGB axis (axis set with parameter No.7771) does not actually require an amplifier. So, assume that the EGB axis is connected to a dummy amplifier. Accordingly, as the address conversion table value for a nonexistent slave, set the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the setting made for parameter No.1023 for the EGB axis, instead of setting 40. 2 When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the FMD parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1902) is set to 0), parameters No.1910 through No.1919 are automatically set when input is performed with the FSSB setting screen. When manual setting 2 mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the FMD parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1902) is set to 1), parameter No.1910 through No.1919 must be directly set. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 100 S Examples of axis configurations and parameter settings CNC 2–axis amplifier M1 2 3 6 2–axis amplifier 4 5 7 M2 8 1–axis amplifier 1 Slave number ATR No.1910 to 1919 Axis 1 2 16 3 4 5 48 0 A Y (M1) Z B C (M2) X 9 10 40 40 (None) (None) CNC 2 3 6 4 5 7 8 1 2 3 16 1 4 5 48 0 Y Z (M1) A B C (M2) X 9 10 40 40 (None) (None) Note) M1/M2: First pulse module/second pulse module Controlled axis number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Program axis name No.1020 X Y Z A B C Servo axis number No.1023 1 2 3 4 5 6 Controlled axis number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Program axis name No.1020 X Y Z A B C Servo axis number No.1023 1 2 3 4 5 6 1–axis amplifier 2–axis amplifier M1 2–axis amplifier M2 1–axis amplifier 1–axis amplifier Slave number ATR No.1910 to 1919 Axis B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 101 S Example of axis configuration and parameter settings when the simple electronic gearbox (EGB) function is used (EGB workpiece axes: A axis, EGB axis, B axis (Parameter No.7771=5)) M1 2 3 6 4 5 M2 7 8 1 1 2 16 4 5 48 3 0 Y A (M1) Z C (M2) (Dummy) X 9 10 40 40 (None) (None) Note) M1/M2: First pulse module/second pulse module CNC Controlled axis number 1 2 3 4 5 6 Program axis name No.1020 X Y Z A B C Servo axis number No.1023 1 2 3 4 5 6 Slave number ATR No.1910 to 1919 Axis 2–axis amplifier 2–axis amplifier 1–axis amplifier 1920 Controlled axis number for slave 1 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) 1921 Controlled axis number for slave 2 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) 1922 Controlled axis number for slave 3 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) 1923 Controlled axis number for slave 4 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) 1924 Controlled axis number for slave 5 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) 1925 Controlled axis number for slave 6 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) 1926 Controlled axis number for slave 7 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) 1927 Controlled axis number for slave 8 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) 1928 Controlled axis number for slave 9 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) 1929 Controlled axis number for slave 10 (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) NOTE After these parameters have been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the settings to become effective. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 8 These parameters are used to set the controlled axis numbers for slaves 1 to 10. NOTE These parameters are set using the FSSB setting screen. So, these parameters should not normally have to be specified directly. These parameters need not be set in FSSB manual setting mode. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 102 1931 Connector number for the first pulse module (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) 1932 Connector number for the second pulse module (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) NOTE After these parameters have been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the settings to become effective. [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to number of connectors provided on each pulse module When a pulse module is used, these parameters set a pulse module connector number for each axis. NOTE These parameters are set using the FSSB setting screen. So, these parameters should not normally have to be specified directly. These parameters need not be set in FSSB manual setting 2 mode. 1933 Cs contour control axis (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the setting to become effective. [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0, 1 When Cs contour control is to be applied for an axis, this parameter must be set to 1 for that axis. NOTE This parameter is set using the FSSB setting screen. So, this parameter should not normally have to be specified directly. This parameter need not be set in FSSB manual setting 2 mode. 1934 Master and slave axis numbers subject to tandem control (dedicated to the FSSB setting screen) NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the setting to become effective. [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 8 This parameter is used to set an odd number, and the subsequent even number, for a master axis and slave axis subject to tandem control, respectively. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 103 NOTE This parameter is set using the FSSB setting screen. So, this parameter should not normally have to be specified directly. This parameter need not be set in FSSB manual setting 2 mode. 1936 Connector number of the first pulse module 1937 Connector number of the second pulse module NOTE After these parameters have been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the settings to become effective. [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 7 When a pulse module is used, each of these parameters sets the value obtained by subtracting 1 from a pulse module connector number for each axis. That is, values of 0 through 7 are set for connector numbers 1 through 8. In addition, bits 6 and 7 of parameter No.1905 must be set. For an axis that does not use a pulse module, 0 must be set. The user can freely specify the connector to be used for a given axis. When using connectors, start from that connector having the smallest connector number. For example, connector number 4 cannot be used if connector number 3 is not being used. Example: Controlled axis Connector number for the first pulse module Connector number for the second pulse module No.1936 No.1937 No.1905 (#7, #6) X 1 Not used 0 0 0,1 Y Not used 2 0 1 1,0 Z Not used 1 0 0 1,0 A Not used Not used 0 0 0,0 B 2 Not used 1 0 0,1 C Not used 3 0 2 1,0 NOTE When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when bit 0 of parameter No.1902 is set to 0), these parameters are automatically set when input is performed with the FSSB setting screen. When manual setting 2 mode is selected for FSSB setting (when bit 0 of parameter No.1902 is set to 1), these parameters must be set directly. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 104 The following parameters are not explained in this manual. Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α Series PARAMETER MANUAL (B–65150E). No. Data type Contents 2000 Bit axis PGEX PRMC DGPR PLC0 2001 Bit axis AMR7 AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 AMR0 2002 Bit axis VFSE PFSE 2003 Bit axis V0FS OVSC BLEN NPSP PIEN OBEN TGAL 2004 Bit axis DLY0 2005 Bit axis SFCM BRKC FEED 2006 Bit axis DCBE ACCF SPVE PKVE SBSM FCBL 2007 Bit axis FRCA FAD 2008 Bit axis LAXD PFBS VCTM SPPC SPPR VFBA TNOM 2009 Bit axis BLST BLCU ADBL IQOB SERD 2010 Bit axis POLE HBBL HBPE BLTE LINE 2011 Bit axis RCCL FFALWY SYNMOD 2012 Bit axis STNG VCM2 VCM1 MSFE 2013 Bit axis (Reserve) 2014 Bit axis (Reserve) 2015 Bit axis BLAT TDOU SSG1 PGTW 2016 Bit axis NFL8 NFL7 NFL5 K2VC ABNT 2017 Bit axis PK25 OVCR RISC HTNG DBST 2018 Bit axis PFBC MOVO 2019 Bit axis DPFB SPSY 2020 Word axis Motor number 2021 Word axis Load inertia ratio 2022 Word axis Direction of motor rotation 2023 Word axis Number of velocity pulses 2024 Word axis Number of position pulses 2028 Word axis Position gain switching speed 2029 Word axis Effective speed for integral acceleration at low speed 2030 Word axis Effective speed for integral acceleration at low speed 2033 Word axis Position feedback pulse 2034 Word axis Damping control gain 2039 Word axis Second–stage acceleration for two–stage backlash acceleration 2040 Word axis Current loop integral gain (PK1) 2041 Word axis Current loop proportional gain (PK2) 2042 Word axis Current loop gain (PK3) 2043 Word axis Velocity loop integral gain (PK1V) 2044 Word axis Velocity loop proportional gain (PK2V) 2045 Word axis Velocity loop incomplete integral gain (PK3V) 2046 Word axis Velocity loop gain (PK4V) 2047 Word axis Observer parameter (POA1) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 105 No. Contents Data type 2048 Word axis Backlash acceleration 2049 Word axis Maximum amplitude for dual position feedback 2050 Word axis Observer parameter (POK1) 2051 Word axis Observer parameter (POK2) 2053 Word axis Current dead zone compensation (PPMAX) 2054 Word axis Current dead zone compensation (PDDP) 2055 Word axis Current dead zone compensation (PHYST) 2056 Word axis Counterelectromotive force compensation (EMFCMP) 2057 Word axis Current phase lead compensation (PVPA) 2058 Word axis Current phase lead compensation (PALPH) 2059 Word axis Counterelectromotive force compensation (EMFBAS) 2060 Word axis Torque limit 2061 Word axis Counterelectromotive force compensation (EMFLMT) 2062 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVC1) 2063 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVC2) 2064 Word axis Soft disconnection alarm level 2065 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OCVLMT) 2066 Word axis 250–us acceleration feedback 2067 Word axis Torque command filter 2068 Word axis Feed forward coefficient 2069 Word axis Velocity feed forward coefficient 2070 Word axis Backlash acceleration timing 2071 Word axis Backlash acceleration effective duration 2072 Word axis Static friction compensation 2073 Word axis Stop judgment parameter 2074 Word axis Velocity–dependent current loop gain 2076 Word axis 1–ms acceleration feedback gain 2077 Word axis Overshoot prevention counter 2078 Word axis Conversion coefficient for dual position feedback (numerator) 2079 Word axis Conversion coefficient for dual position feedback (denominator) 2080 Word axis First–order lag time constant for dual position feedback 2081 Word axis Zero width for dual position feedback 2082 Word axis Backlash acceleration stop amount 2083 Word axis Brake control timer (ms) 2084 Word axis Flexible feed gear (numerator) 2085 Word axis Flexible feed gear (denominator) 2086 Word axis Rated current parameter 2087 Word axis Torque offset 2088 Word axis Machine velocity feedback coefficient gain 2089 Word axis Backlash acceleration base pulse 2091 Word axis Non–linear control parameter 2092 Word axis Look–ahead feed forward coefficient 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 106 No. Contents Data type 2097 Word axis Static friction compensation stop parameter 2098 Word axis Current phase lead compensation coefficient 2099 Word axis N–pulse suppression level 2101 Word axis Overshoot compensation effective level 2102 Word axis Final clamp value for actual current limit 2103 Word axis Amount of track back upon detection of unexpected disturbance torque 2104 Word axis Threshold for detecting abnormal load during cutting 2105 Word axis Torque constant 2109 Word axis Fine acceleration/deceleration time constant (BELLTC) 2110 Word axis Magnetic saturation compensation (base/coefficient) 2111 Word axis Deceleration torque limit (base/coefficient) 2112 Word axis AMR conversion coefficient 1 2113 Word axis Notch filter center frequency (Hz) 2116 Word axis Dynamic friction for abnormal load detection/cancel 2118 Word axis Excessive error level between semi–closed and closed loops for dual position feedback. 2119 Word axis Stop level with variable proportional gain 2121 Word axis Conversion coefficient for number of feedback pulses 2122 Word axis Conversion coefficient for detected resistance 2126 Word axis Time constant for switching position feedback 2127 Word axis Non–interacting control coefficient 2128 Word axis Weak magnetic flux compensation (coefficient) 2129 Word axis Weak magnetic flux compensation (base/limit) 2130 Word axis Two thrust ripple compensations per magnetic pole pair 2131 Word axis Four thrust ripple compensations per magnetic pole pair 2132 Word axis Six thrust ripple compensations per magnetic pole pair 2138 Word axis AMR conversion coefficient 2 2142 Word axis Threshold for detecting abnormal load during rapid traverse 2143 Word axis Fine acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 (ms) 2144 Word axis Position feed forward coefficient for cutting 2145 Word axis Velocity feed forward coefficient for cutting 2165 Word axis Maximum amplifier current 2200 Bit axis ABGO IQOB 2201 Bit axis CPEE SPVC CROF 2202 Bit axis DUAL OVS1 FAGO 2203 Bit axis FRC2 2209 Bit axis FADL B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 107 #7 MHI 3001 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 RWM #1 #0 [Data type] Bit RWM RWD signal indicating that rewinding is in progress 0 : Output only when the tape reader is being rewound by the reset and rewind signal RRW 1 : Output when the tape reader is being rewound or a program in memory is being rewound by the reset and rewind signal RRW MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M, S, T, and B codes 0 : Normal 1 : High–speed #7 3002 #6 #5 #4 IOV #3 #2 #1 #0 [Data type] Bit IOV Forthefeedrateoverridesignal,secondfeedrateoverridesignal,andrapid traverse override signal: 0 : Negative logic is used. 1 : Positive logic is used. #7 MVG 3003 #6 MVX MVX #5 DEC DEC #4 #3 DIT DIT #2 ITX ITX #1 #0 ITL ITL [Data type] Bit ITL Interlock signal 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled ITX Interlock signals for each axis 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled DIT Interlock for each axis direction 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled DEC Deceleration signal (*DEC1 to *DEC8) for reference position return 0 : Deceleration is applied when the signal is 0. 1 : Deceleration is applied when the signal is 1. MVX The axis–in–movement signal is set to 0 when: 0 : Distribution for the axis is completed. (The signal is set to 0 in deceleration.) 1 : Deceleration of the axis is terminated, and the current position is in the in–position. If, however, a parameter specifies not to make in–position during deceleration, the signal turns to "0" at the end of deceleration. MVG While drawing using the dynamic graphics function (with no machine movement), the axis–in–movement signal is: 0 : Output 1 : Not output 4.16 PARAMETERS OF DI/DO 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 108 NOTE In case of M series the signal is not output. #7 3004 #6 #5 OTH #4 #3 #2 #1 BCY #0 BSL [Data type] Bit BSL The block start interlock signal *BSL and cutting block start interlock signal *CSL are: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. BCY When more than one operation is performed by one block command such as a canned cycle, the block start interlock signal *BSL is: 0 : Checked only at the beginning of the first cycle. 1 : Checked at the beginning of every cycle. NOTE This is enabled when the BSL parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.3004) is set to 1. OTH The overtravel limit signal is: 0 : Checked 1 : Not checked WARNING For safety, usually set 0 to check the overtravel limit signal. #7 3006 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 EPS #1 EPN #0 GDC GDC As the deceleration signal for reference position return: 0 : X009/X007 is used. 1 : G196/G1196 is used. (X009/X007 is disabled.) EPN Workpiece number search signals are assigned to: 0 : PN1, PN2, PN4, PN8, and PN16. 1 : EPN0 to EPN13. EPS When a program is searched using the workpiece number search function, it is started by: 0 : Automatic operation start signal ST (when automatic operation (memory operation) is started). 1 : Workpiece number search start signal EPNS. (Search is not started by ST.) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 109 3010 Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 1 ms [Valid data range] 16 to 32767 The time required to send strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF after the M, S, T, and B codes are sent, respectively. M, S, T, B code MF, SF, TF, BF, signal Delay time Fig.4.16 (a) Delay Time of the strobe signal NOTE The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight. [Example] When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed. When 32 is set, 32 ms is assumed. When 100 ie set, 104 ms is assumed. 3011 Acceptable width of M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 1 ms [Valid data range] 16 to 32767 Set the minimum signal width of the valid M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN). M, S, T, B code MF, SF, TF, BF signal FIN sigal Ignored be- cause shorter than min. signal width Valid because longer than min. signal width Fig.4.16 (b) Valid Width of the FIN (M,S, T, and B Function Completion) Signal NOTE The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight. [Example] When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 110 3017 Output time of reset signal RST [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 16 ms [Valid data range] 0 to 255 To extend the output time of reset signal RST, the time to be added is specified in this parameter. RST signal output time = time veguired for reset + parameter 16 ms 3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code 3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code 3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code 3033 Allowable number of digits for the B code [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 8 Set the allowable numbers of digits for the M, S, T, and B codes. NOTE Up to 5 digits can be specified in the S code B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 111 #7 COR 3100 #6 #5 #4 FPT #3 FKY FKY #2 SKY SKY #1 CEM CEM #0 COR [Data type] Bit CEM On screens such as the operation history screen and help screen, keys on the MDI panel are indicated: 0 : In English. 1 : With graphics qualifying for CE marking. (A character generator supporting graphics qualifying for CE marking is required.) SKY On the 7.2– or 8.4–inch LCD, the keyboard in 14–inch display format uses: 0 : Standard keys. 1 : Small keys. NOTE Set this parameter when using the 9.5"/10.4" LCD (with ten soft keys). After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the setting to become effective. FKY MDI keyboard 0 : Small type keys are used. 1 : Standard keys are used. NOTE Set this parameter when using the 7.2"/8.4" LCD (with seven soft keys). After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the setting to become effective. FPT MDI keyboard for CAP–II 0 : Not used. 1 : Used NOTE When CAP–II function is equipped, this parameter is not required to be set to 1. COR 7–pieces type soft key display 0 : Monochrome display 1 : Color display NOTE When using the 8.4" LCD, set this bit to 1. 4.17 PARAMETERS OF MDI, DISPLAY, AND EDIT 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 112 #7 SBA 3101 #6 #5 #4 BGD #3 #2 #1 KBF #0 [Data type] Bit KBF When the screen or mode is changed, the contents of the key–in buffer are: 0 : Cleared. 1 : Not cleared. NOTE When KBF = 1, the contents of the key–in buffer can all be cleared at one time by pressing the SHIFT key followed by the CAN key. BGD In background editing, a program currently selected in the foreground: 0 : Cannot be selected. (BP/S alarm No.140 is issued disabling selection.) 1 : Can be selected. (However, the program cannot be edited, only displayed.) SBA When two systems are controlled, the current positions on the current position display screen are displayed: 0 : In the order of tool post 1, followed by tool post 2. 1 : In the order of tool post 2, followed by tool post 1. #7 3102 #6 SPN #5 HNG #4 ITA #3 CHI #2 FRN #1 GRM #0 JPN 3119 POR POR DAN NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is confinued. [Data type] Bit These bits select the language to be used for the display. POR DAN SPN HNG ITA CHI FRN GRM JPN Language 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 English 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Japanese 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 German 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 French 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Chinese 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Italian 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Korean 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Spanish 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Danish 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Portuguese B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 113 #7 ABR 3103 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 DIP #0 [Data type] Bit D1P When two–path control is applied, the current position display screen in 9–inch display format displays: 0 : The current positions of the two paths regardless of the tool post select signal. 1 : The current position of a path selected by the tool post select signal. NOTE Set this parameter when using the display with seven soft keys. ABR When two systems are controlled using a 7–pieces type soft key display unit and absolute position/relative position display requires two current position display screens (when five or more controlled axes are involved in total): 0 : The first screen displays tool post 1 data and the second screen dispiays tool post 2 data. 1 : The first screen displays the data of the tool post selected with the tool post selection signal and the second screen displays the data of the other tool post. NOTE When ABR=1, bit7 (SBA) of parameter No.3101 is disabled. #7 DAC 3104 #6 DAL #5 DRC #4 DRL #3 PPD #2 #1 #0 MCN [Data type] Bit MCN Machine position 0 : Not displayed according to the unit of input. (Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine position is displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for inch machines.) 1 : Displayed according to the unit of input. (When input is made in mm, the machine position is displayed in mm, and when input is made in inches, the machine position is displayed in inches accordingly.) PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set 0 : Not preset 1 : Preset NOTE When PPD is set to 1 and the absolute position display is preset by one of the following, the relative position display is also preset to the same value as the absolute position display: 1) The manual reference position return 2) Setting of a coordinate system by G92 (G50 for T series G code system A) 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 114 DRL Relative position 0 : The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset (M series) or tool offset (T series). 1 : The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset (M series) or tool offset (T series). NOTE When tool geometry compensation of the T system is to be performed by shifting the coordinate system (with bit 4 (LGT) of parameter No.5002 set to 0), the programmed position, ignoring tool offset, is displayed (with this parameter set to 1), but the programmed position, ignoring tool geometry compensation, cannot be displayed. DRC Relative position 0 : The actual position displayed takes into account cutter compensation (M series) or tool nose radius compensation (T series). 1 : The programmed position displayed does not take into account cutter compensation (M series) or tool nose radius compensation (T series). DAL Absolute position 0 : The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset (M series) or tool offset (T series). 1 : The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset (M series) or tool offset (T series). NOTE When tool geometry compensation of the T system is to be performed by shifting the coordinate system (with bit 4 (LGT) of parameter No.5002 set to 0), the programmed position, ignoring tool offset, is displayed (with this parameter set to 1), but the programmed position, ignoring tool geometry compensation, cannot be displayed. DAC Absolute position 0 : The actual position displayed takes into account cutter compensation (M series) or tool nose radius compensation (T series). 1 : The programmed position displayed does not take into account cutter compensation (M series) or tool nose radius compensation (T series). #7 3105 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 DPS DPS #1 PCF PCF #0 DPF DPF SMF [Data type] Bit DPF Display of the actual speed on the current position display screen, program check screen and program screen (MD1 mode) 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed PCF Addition of the movement of the PMC–controlled axes to the actual speed display 0 : Added 1 : Not added B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 115 NOTE For each setting, movement along any axis other than those controlled by the CNC (see the description of parameter No. 1010) is not reflected in the actual speed display. DPS Actual spindle speed and T code 0 : Not always displayed 1 : Always displayed NOTE For the M series, the threading and synchronous feed option is required to display the actual spindle speed. SMF During simplified synchronous control, movement along a slave axis is: 0 : Included in the actual speed display 1 : Not included in the actual speed display NOTE This parameter is valid when simplified synchronous control is applied according to the setting of parameter No.8311 (master and slave axes can be arbitrarily selected). #7 OHS 3106 #6 DAK #5 SOV SOV #4 OPH OPH #3 SPD #2 #1 GPL GPL #0 OHS [Data type] Bit GPL On the program list screen, the list–by–group function is: 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled SPD Names for actual spindle speed values are displayed: 0 : Regardless of the selected spindle position coder (in second position coder selection signal (PC2SLC)) 1 : Depending of the selected spindle position coder (in second position coder selection signal (PC2SLC)) SPD=0 SPD=1 Spindles 1 and 2 Spindles 1 Spindles 2 S S1 S2 SACT SACT1 SACT2 ACT, S SACT1 SACT2 NOTE When SPD is set to 1, during Two–path control, the actual spindle speed names for a spindle of path 2 are displayed in reverse video. OPH The operation history screen is: 0 : Not displayed. 1 : Displayed. SOV The spindle override value is: 0 : Not displayed. 1 : Displayed. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 116 NOTE This parameter is enabled only when bit 2 (DPS) of parameter No.3105 is set to 1. DAK When absolute coordinates are displayed in the three–dimensional coordinate conversion mode: 0 : Coordinates in the program coordinate system are displayed. 1 : Coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system are displayed. OHS Operation history sampling is: 0 : Performed. 1 : Not performed. #7 MDL 3107 #6 #5 DMN #4 SOR #3 #2 DNC #1 #0 NAM [Data type] Bit NAM Program list 0 : Only program numbers are displayed. 1 : Program numbers and program names are displayed. DNC Upon reset, the program display for DNC operation is: 0 : Not cleared 1 : Cleared SOR Display of the program directory 0 : Programs are listed in the order of registration. 1 : Programs are listed in the order of program number. DMN G code menu 0 : Displayed 1 : Not displayed MDL Display of the modal state on the program display screen 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed (only in the MDI mode) #7 JSP 3108 #6 SLM SLM #5 #4 WCI WCI #3 #2 #1 PCT #0 JSP [Data type] Bit PCT On the 7–pieces type soft key display program check screen and 12–pieces type soft key display position screen, T code displayed 0 : is a T code specified in a program (T). 1 : is a T code specified by the PMC (HD. T/NX. T) WCI On the workpiece coordinate system screen, a counter input is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. SLM The spindle load meter is: 0 : Not displayed. 1 : Displayed. >_ Sxxxxx Lxxx% EDIT 12:34:56 Display of the spindle load meter B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 117 NOTE 1 This parameter is enabled only when the DPS parameter (bit 2 of parameter No.3105) is set to 1. 2 When displaying the spindle load meter for an analog spindle, also set parameter Nos.3161, 3162, and 3163. JSP On the current position display screen and program check screen, jog feed is: 0 : Not displayed. 1 : Displayed. NOTE In manual operation mode, the jog feedrate is displayed. In automatic operation mode, the dry run feedrate is displayed. In each case, the feedrate to which a manual feedrate override has been applied is displayed. JOG F 8000 PART COUNT 15 RUN TIME 1H17M CYCLE TIME 1H15S ACT.F 1000 MM/M MEM STRT MTN *** 12:34:59 Jog feedrate #7 3109 #6 BGO #5 RHD RHD #4 #3 #2 IKY IKY #1 DWT DWT #0 [Data type] Bit DWT Characters G and W in the display of tool wear/geometry compensation amount 0 : The characters are displayed at the left of each number. 1 : The characters are not displayed. IKY On the tool offset screen and workpiece shift screen (T series), soft key [INPUT] is: 0 : Displayed. 1 : Not displayed. RHD When a manual handle interrupt is generated, the relative position display is: 0 : Not updated. 1 : Updated. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the INH parameter (bit 2 of parameter No.7100) is 1. BGO On the background drawing screen, when the function key is pressed: 0 : The machining–side screen is resumed. 1 : A background drawing offset, workpiece coordinate system offset, and macro variable are displayed. (In this case, "BGGRP" appears in the bottom right section of the screen, enabling you to check the data for background drawing.) 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 118 #7 NPA 3111 #6 OPS #5 OPM #4 #3 #2 SVP #1 SPS #0 SVS [Data type] Bit SVS Servo tuning screen 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed SPS Spindle tuning screen 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed SVP Synchronization errors displayed on the spindle tuning screen 0 : Instantaneous values are displayed. 1 : Peak–hold values are displayed. OPM Operating monitor 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed OPS The speedometer on the operating monitor screen indicates: 0 : Spindle motor speed 1 : Spindle speed NPA Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator message is entered 0 : The display shifts to the alarm or message screen. 1 : The display does not shift to the alarm or message screen. #7 3112 #6 #5 OPH #4 #3 EAH #2 OMH #1 #0 SGD NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit SGD Servo waveform 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed NOTE If SGD is set to 1, no graphic display other than servo waveform display is done. OMH The external operator message history screen is: 0 : Not displayed. 1 : Displayed. EAH Messages of the exfernal alam/macro alarm in alarm history: 0 : Not recorded 1 : Recorded OPH The operation history log function is: 0 : Displayed. 1 : Enable. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 119 #7 MS1 3113 #6 MS0 #5 DCL #4 TCH #3 #2 #1 #0 MHC [Data type] Bit MHC External operator message history data: 0 : Cannot be cleared. 1 : Can be cleared. (Such data can be cleared using the [CLEAR] soft key.) TCH Cursor movement on the touch panel is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. DCL The compensation function for the touch panel on the display is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. MS0, MS1 A combination of the number of characters preserved as external operator message history data and the number of history data items is set according to the table below. MS1 MS0 Number of history data characters Number of history data items 0 0 255 8 0 1 200 10 1 0 100 18 1 1 50 32 NOTE When the values of MS0 and MS1 are changed, all preserved external operator message history data is cleared. #7 3114 #6 ICS #5 IUS #4 IMS #3 ISY #2 IOF #1 IPR #0 IPO [Data type] Bit IPO When the function key is pressed while the position display screen is being displayed: 0 : The screen is changed. 1 : The screen is not changed. IPR When the function key is pressed while the program screen is being displayed: 0 : The screen is changed. 1 : The screen is not changed. IOF When the function key is pressed while the offset/setting screen is being displayed: 0 : The screen is changed. 1 : The screen is not changed. ISY When the function key is pressed while the system screen is being displayed: 0 : The screen is changed. 1 : The screen is not changed. IMS When the functionkeyispressedwhilethemessagescreen is being displayed: 0 : The screen is changed. 1 : The screen is not changed. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 120 IUS When the or function key is pressed while the user or graph screen is being displayed: 0 : The screen is changed. 1 : The screen is not changed. ICS When the function key is pressed while the custom screen is being displayed: 0 : The screen is changed. 1 : The screen is not changed. #7 3115 #6 D10x #5 #4 #3 NDFx NDFx #2 SFMx #1 NDAx NDAx #0 NDPx NDPx [Data type] Bit axis NDPx Display of the current position for each axis 0 : The current position is displayed. 1 : The current position is not displayed. NDAx Position display using absolute coordinates and relative coordinates is: 0 : Performed. 1 : Not performed. (Machine coordinates are displayed.) SFMx In current position display, subscripts are: 0 : Added to the absolute, relative, and machine coordinate axis names. 1 : Assed only to the machine coordinate axis names. NOTE This parameter is disabled when two systems are controlled. NDFx To the actual speed display, axis movement data is: 0 : Added. 1 : Not added. NOTE Even if the PCF parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.3105) is set to 0, so as to add PMC controlled axis movement data to the actual speed display, the movement data for a PMC controlled axis for which NDFx is set to 1 is not added to the actual speed display. D10x The current positions (absolute position, relative position, machine position, remaining travel, and travel by manual handle interrupt), and workpiece zero–point offset are: 0 : Displayed as usual. (Not multiplied by ten.) 1 : Multiplied by ten, and displayed. Example: The current position on the Y–axis is multiplied by ten and displayed. X 1.2345 → X 1.2345 Y 1.2345 → Y 12.345 Z 1.2345 → Z 1.2345 B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 121 #7 3116 #6 #5 #4 #3 PWR #2 #1 #0 PWR Alarm No.100 (parameter enable) : 0 : Clear by [CAN] + [RESET] key 1 : Clear by [RESET] key #7 3117 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 SPP #0 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit SPP On the diagnostic screen, spindle position data (the number of pulses from the position coder, detected after the detection of the one–revolution signal) is: 0 : Not displayed. 1 : Displayed. (Diagnostic Nos. 445 to 447) #7 3118 #6 #5 #4 #3 MDC #2 #1 AS2 #0 AS1 [Data type] Bit AS1, AS2 When the actual spindle speeds (SACT) of the first spindle, second spindle, and third spindle are displayed, each value is: 0 : The value calculated based on the feedback pulses from the position coder. 1 : The value calculated from the spindle motor speed (the same as the spindle speed displayed on the operating monitor screen). MDC Maintenance information by operating soft key : 0 : All clear disable. 1 : All clear enable. #7 NVG 3119 #6 #5 #4 #3 TPA TPA #2 DDS DDS #1 POR POR #0 DAN NVG NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit DAN Display in Danish is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. POR Display in Portuguese is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 122 DDS The support of the touch panel on the display is: 0 : Enabled. 1 : Disabled. TPA Touch panel connection is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. NVG When a color display device is used, VGA mode is: 0 : Used. 1 : Not used. 3120 Time from the output of an alarm to the termination of sampling (waveform diag- nosis function) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 1 to 32760 When the waveform diagnosis function is used, this parameter sets the time form the output of a servo alarm until data collection. Storage operation is stopped because of the alarm. (This means that the termination of data collection can be delayed by a specified time.) 3122 Time interval used to record time data in operation history [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Minutes [Valid data range] 0 to 1439 Time data is recorded in operation history at set intervals. When 0 is specified in this parameter, 10 minutes is assumed as the default. However, NOTE that time data is not recorded if there is no data to be recorded at the specified time. 3123 Time until screen clear function is applied [Data type] Bytes [Unit of data] Minutes [Valid data range] 1 to 255 This parameter specifies the period that must elapse before the screen clear function is applied. If 0 is set, the screen is not cleared. Moreover, this parameter is valid only when it is set on the path 1 side. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 123 #7 D08 3124 #6 D07 #5 D06 #4 D05 #3 D04 #2 D03 #1 D02 #0 D01 D16 3125 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D09 D24 3126 D23 D22 D21 D20 D19 D18 D17 3127 D25 [Data type] Bit Dxx (xx: 01 to 25) When modal G code is displayed on the program check screen in 9–inch display mode and the program check–P screen when two–path control is applied, the xx group G code is: 0 : Displayed. 1 : Not displayed. NOTE Set these parameters when using the display with seven soft keys. 3130 Axis display order for current position display screens [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0, 1 to the number of controlled axes This parameter specifies the order in which axes are displayed on the current position display screens (absolute, relative, overall, and handle interrupt screens) during Two–path control when the 7–pieces type soft key display is used. NOTE This parameter is valid only for the common screens for Two–path control. Axes are displayed in the order of their axis numbers on individual screens for each path and Two–axis simultaneous display screens. 3131 Subscript of each axis name [Data type] Byte axis This parameter specifies a subscript (one character) of each axis name with a code (Two–path control). The one character subscript specified by this parameter is displayed after the axis name on the current position screen to discriminate the coordinates of axes belonging to one path from those of another path. NOTE 1 This parameter is dedicated to the Two–path control. 2 Specify this parameter for each path. 3 For characters and codes, see the correspondence table in Appendix 1. 4 When code 0 is specified, 1 or 2 is displayed. XA, Z1, CS, and Y1 are displayed as axis names. XB, Z2, and B are dis- played as axis names. *1 Thestandarddisplaycolorsareas follows: Status display for tool post 1: Yellow Status display for tool post 2: Yellow in reverse video Alarm, message, and program check screen: Light blue 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 124 [Example] When the configuration of axes is X, Z, C and Y in path 1 and X, Z, and B in path 2 (1) Setting for path 1 Parameter 3131x 65 (A) Parameter 3131z 49 (1) Parameter 3131c 83 (S) Parameter 3131y 0 (1) (2) Setting for path 2 Parameter 3131x 66 (B) Parameter 3131z 0 (2) Parameter 3131b 32 (space) 3132 Axis name (absoulute coordinate) for current position display 3133 Axis name (relative coordinate) for current position display [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 255 These parameters set the axis name for current position display. When G code system B or C is used, the axis name set in parameter No.3132 is used for both absolute and relative coordinate axes. The values set in these parameters are used only for display. For a command address, the axis name set in parameter No.1020 is used. When 0 is specified in these parameters, the value set in parameter No.1020 is used. 3134 Axis display order on workpiece coordinate system screen and workpiece shift screen [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0, 1 to the number of controlled axes This parameter specifies the order in which axes are displayed on the workpiece coordinate system screen and workpiece shift screen (for T series). 3140 Display color for tool post name [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] –7 to 7 This parameter sets the display color for a tool post name. The values that can be set and their corresponding display colors are shown in the following table: Setting Display color 0 Standard display colors(*1) 1/–1 Red/red in reverse video 2/–2 Green/green in reverse video 3/–3 Yellow/yellow in reverse video 4/–4 Blue/blue in reverse video 5/–5 Purple/purple in reverse video 6/–6 Light blue/light blue in reverse video 7/–7 White/white in reverse video B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 125 3141 Path name (1st character) 3142 Path name (2nd character) 3143 Path name (3rd character) 3144 Path name (4th character) 3145 Path name (5th character) 3146 Path name (6th character) 3147 Path name (7th character) [Data type] Byte Specify a path name with codes (Two–path control). Any character strings consisting of alphanumeric characters and symbols (up to seven characters) can be displayed as path names, instead of HEAD1 and HEAD2 for T series, and instead of PATH1 and PATH2 for M series. NOTE 1 This parameter is dedicated to the Two–path control. 2 Specify these parameters for each series. 3 For characters and codes, see the correspondence table in 2.1.15 software operator's panel. 4 When codes are 0, HEAD1 and HEAD2 for T series and PATH1 or PATH2 for M series are displayed. [Example] When the names of path 1 and 2 are specified as TURRET1 and TURRET2, respectively. (1) Setting for path 1 (2) Setting for path 2 Parameter 3141 = 84 (T) Parameter 3141 = 84 (T) Parameter 3142 = 85 (U) Parameter 3142 = 85 (U) Parameter 3143 = 82 (R) Parameter 3143 = 82 (R) Parameter 3144 = 82 (R) Parameter 3144 = 82 (R) Parameter 3145 = 69 (E) Parameter 3145 = 69 (E) Parameter 3146 = 84 (T) Parameter 3146 = 84 (T) Parameter 3147 = 49 (1) Parameter 3147 = 50 (2) 3151 Number of the axis for which the first load meter for the servo motor is used 3152 Number of the axis for which the second load meter for the servo motor is used 3153 Number of the axis for which the third load meter for the servo motor is used 3154 Number of the axis for which the fourth load meter for servo motor is used 3155 Number of the axis for which the fifth load meter for servo motor is used 3156 Number of the axis for which the sixth load meter for servo motor is used 3157 Number of the axis for which the seventh load meter for servo motor is used 3158 Number of the axis for which the eighth load meter for servo motor is used [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0, 1,the number of control axes Set the numbers of the axes for which measurement values on the load meters for the eight servo motors are displayed. Set the parameters to 0 for those axes for which a load meter need not be displayed. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 126 3161 Channel number of an A/D converter [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 4 When the spindle load meter reading for an analog spindle is displayed (see the explanation of the SLM parameter (bit 6 of parameter No.3108)), this parameter specifies the channel number of the A/D converter being used. The spindle load meter reading is displayed based on the data read from the A/D converter connected to the specified channel. 3162 Load meter reading at maximum output [Data type] Word [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 999 When the spindle load meter reading for an analog spindle is displayed (see the description of the SLM parameter (bit 6 of parameter No.3108)), this parameter sets the load meter reading displayed at maximum analog spindle output. The spindle load meter reading to be displayed is calculated as follows: (Data read from the A/D converter)–128 128 Displayed value = Load meter reading at maximum output) 3163 Time required to smooth the spindle load meter readings [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 32 msec [Valid data range] 0 to 32 When the spindle load meter reading is displayed (see the description of the SLM parameter (bit 6 of parameter No.3108)), smoothing can be applied to the spindle load meter reading to prevent flickering. This parameter sets the time width for smoothing. Setting Time for smoothing (msec) 0 256 1 32 2 64 3 96 : : : : 32 1024 Each smoothing operation is performed for a time width of between 32 ms and 1024 msec. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 127 #7 MIP 3201 #6 NPE #5 N99 #4 #3 PUO #2 REP #1 RAL #0 RDL [Data type] Bit RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external control 0 : The new program is registered following the programs already registered. 1 : All registered programs are deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that programs which are protected from being edited are not deleted. RAL When programs are registered through the reader/puncher interface 0 : All programs are registered. 1 : Only one program is registered. REP Action in response to an attempt to register a program whose number is the same as that of an existing program 0 : An alarm is generated. 1 : The existing program is deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that if the existing program is protected from being edited, it is not deleted, and an alarm is generated. PUO When address O of a program number is output in ISO code: 0 : ":" is output. 1 : "O" is output. N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No.3201 = 0, program registration is assumed to be: 0 : Completed 1 : Not completed NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be: 0 : Completed 1 : Not completed MIP Program registration by external start signal (MINP) : 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. #7 3202 #6 PSR #5 CPD #4 NE9 #3 OSR #2 CND #1 OLV #0 NE8 [Data type] Bit NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999 0 : Not inhibited 1 : Inhibited The following edit operations are disabled: (1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not deleted.) (2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.) (3) Program number search (4) Program editing of registered programs 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 128 (5) Program registration (6) Program collation (7) Displaying programs OLV When a program other than the selected program is deleted or output: 0 : The display of the selected program is not held. 1 : The display of the selected program is held. CND Byusingthe[CONDENSE] soft key on the program directory screen, the program condensing operation is: 0 : Not performed. (The [CONDENSE] soft key is not displayed.) 1 : Performed. OSR In programming number search, when pressing soft key [O–SEARCH] without inputting program number by key : 0 : Search the following program number 1 : Operation is invalid NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999 0 : Not inhibited 1 : Inhibited The following program editing during operation is invalid. (1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.) (2) Program punching (Even when punching of all programs is specified, programs with program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not punched.) (3) Program number search (4) Program editing after registration (5) Program registration (6) Program collation (7) Displaying programs CPD When an NC program is deleted, a confirmation message and confirmation soft key are: 0 : Not output. 1 : Output. PSR Search for the program number of a protected program 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled #7 MCL 3203 #6 MER MER #5 MZE MZE #4 PIO #3 #2 #1 #0 MCL [Data type] Bit PIO When two systems are controlled, program input/output is: 0 : Controlled separately for each tool post. 1 : Controlled on a Two–system basis for tool post 1 and tool post 2. MZE After MDI operation is started, program editing during operation is: 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 129 MER When the last block of a program has been executed at single block operation in the MDI mode, the executed block is: 0 : Not deleted 1 : Deleted NOTE When MER is set to 0, the program is deleted if the end–of–record mark (%) is read and executed. (The mark % is automatically inserted at the end of a program.) MCL Whether a program prepared in the MDI mode is cleared by reset 0 : Not deleted 1 : deleted #7 3204 #6 MKP #5 SPR #4 P9E #3 P8E #2 EXK #1 #0 PAR [Data type] Bit PAR When a small keyboard is used, characters [ and ] are: 0 : Used as [ and ]. 1 : Used as ( and ). EXK The input character extension function is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. (When a small keyboard is used, the three characters (, ), and @ can be entered using soft keys.) NOTE The [C–EXT] soft key is used to select an operation on the program screen. This soft key enables the entry of and "@" using soft keys. This soft key is useful when using the small MDI keyboard, which does not have the and "@" keys. P8E Editing of subprograms 80000000 to 89999999 is: 0 : Not inhibited 1 : Inhibited The following editing types become impossible. (1) Program deletion (Programs numbered in the 80000000 range will not be deleted even if all–program deletion is specified.) (2) Program output (Programs numbered in the 80000000 range will not be output even if all–program output specified.) (3) Program search by number (4) Program editing after registration (5) Program registration (6) Program collation (7) Program display P9E Editing of subprograms 90000000 to 99999999 are: 0 : Not inhibited 1 : Inhibited 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 130 The following editing types become impossible. (1) Program deletion (Programs numbered in the 90000000 range will not be deleted even if all–program deletion is specified.) (2) Program output (Programs numbered in the 90000000 range will not be output even if all–program output specified.) (3) Program search by number (4) Program editing after registration (5) Program registration (6) Program collation (7) Program display SPR Program numbers in the 9000 range for specific programs are: 0 : Not added with 90000000 1 : Added with 90000000 [Example] The program numbers for G codes used to call custom macros are as follows: SPR = 0: 00009010 to 00009019 SPR = 1: 90009010 to 90009019 Subprogram numbers 9500 to 9510 used by the pattern data input function are as follows: SPR = 0: 00009500 to 00009510 SPR = 1: 90009500 to 90009510 MKP When M02, M30, or EOR(%) is executed during MDI operation, the created MDI program is: 0 : Erased automatically. 1 : Not erased automatically. NOTE If the MER parameter (bit 6 of parameter No.3203) is 1, executing the last block provides a choice of whether to automatically erase a created program. #7 MCK 3205 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 CHG #0 COL [Data type] Bit COL When a program is displayed or output, any colons (:) in the comments of the program are: 0 : Converted to letter O 1 : Displayed or output as is CHG When the change function of the extended edit function is used: 0 : Once the user has decided whether to make a change, the cursor is moved to the target position. 1 : The cursor is moved to the change source, after which the user can choose whether to make a change. MCK The system tape memory check function is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. (This setting is inhibited.) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 131 #7 3206 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PCP [Data type] Bit PCP Program copy operation between two paths is 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 3210 Password [Data type] 2–word axis This parameter sets a password for protecting program Nos. 9000 to 9999. When a value other than zero is set in this parameter and this value differs from the keyword set in parameter No.3211, bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No.3202 for protecting program Nos. 9000 to 9999 is automatically set to 1. This disables the editing of program Nos. 9000 to 9999. Until the value set as the password is set as a keyword, NE9 cannot be set to 0 and the password cannot be modified. NOTE 1 The state where password = 0 and password = keyword is referred to as the locked state. When an attempt is made to modify the password by MDI input operation in this state, the warning message "WRITE PROTECTED" is displayed to indicate that the password cannot be modified. When an attempt is made to modify the password with G10 (programmable parameter input), P/S alarm No.231 is issued. 2 When the value of the password is not 0, the parameter screen does not display the password. Care must be taken in setting a password. 3211 Keyword [Data type] 2–word axis When the value set as the password (set in parameter No.3210) is set in this parameter, the locked state is released and the user can now modify the password and the value set in bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No.3202. NOTE The value set in this parameter is not displayed. When the power is turned off, this parameter is set to 0. 3216 Increment in sequence numbers inserted automatically Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 Set the increment for sequence numbers for automatic sequence number insertion (when SEQ, #5 of parameter 0000, is set to 1.) 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 132 3218 Program number to be registered in synchronous input/output operation (4–digit program number) [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 When a program entered through the input/output unit is executed and registered in memory at the same time in synchronous input/output operation, this parameter sets a program number for that program. NOTE 1 If a value that falls outside the valid data range is specified, the number of the input program is used as is as the registered program number. 2 When the 8–digit program number function is used, use parameter No.3219 instead of parameter No.3218. 3219 Program number to be registered in synchronous input/output operation (8–digit program number) [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 When a program entered through the input/output unit is executed and registered in memory at the same time in synchronous input/output operation, this parameter sets a program number for that program. NOTE 1 If a value that falls outside the valid data range is specified, the number of the input program is used as is as the registered program number. 2 When the 8–digit program number function is not used, use parameter No.3218 instead of parameter No.3219. 3220 Password [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets a password. When a value other than zero is set for this parameter, it is regarded as being a password. Once a password has been set, the display of the setting (password) field is cleared. In addition, program display, input/output, and editing operations are locked. The parameter can be set when the parameter is unlocked, that is, when the parameter is 0, or when the value of this parameter is the same as the keyword (parameter No.3221). B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 133 3221 Keyword [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 When the same value as the password is set in this parameter, the lock is released (unlock state). The value set in this parameter is not displayed. 3222 Program protection range (minimum value) 3223 Program protection range (maximum value) [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 Those programs whose program numbers are within the range set in these parameters can be locked. These parameters set the minimum and maximum values of the program numbers to be locked. Example: When the minimum value = 7000 and the maximum value = 8499, programs O7000 to O8499 are locked. When the minimum value = 0 and the maximum value = 0, programs O9000 to O9999 are locked. #7 KEY 3290 #6 MCM #5 #4 IWZ #3 WZO #2 MCV #1 GOF #0 WOF [Data type] Bit WOF Setting the tool offset value by MDI key input is: 0 : Not disabled 1 : Disabled (With parameter No.3294 and No.3295, set the offset number range in which updating the setting is to be disabled.) GOF Setting the tool offset value by MDI key input is: 0 : Not disabled 1 : Disabled (With parameter No.3294 and No.3295, set the offset number range in which updating the setting is to be disabled.) MCV Macro variable setting by MDI key input is: 0 : Not disabled 1 : Disabled WZO Setting a workpiece zero point offset value by MDI key input is: 0 : Not disabled 1 : Disabled IWZ Setting a workpiece zero point offset value or workpiece shift value (T–series) by MDI key input in the automatic operation activation or halt state is: 0 : Not disabled 1 : Disabled MCM The setting of custom macros by MDI key operation is: 0 : Enabled regardless of the mode. 1 : Enabled only in the MDI mode. KEY For memory protection keys: 0 : The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used. 1 : Only the KEY1 signal is used. NOTE The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY=0 or KEY=1. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 134 When KEY = 0: – KEY1: Enablesatooloffsetvalueandaworkpiecezeropointoffsetvalue to be input. – KEY2: Enables setting data and macro variables to be input. – KEY3: Enables program registration and editing. – KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter and data table) to be input. When KEY = 1: – KEY1: Enables program registration and editing, and enables PMC parameter input. – KEY2 to KEY4: Not used #7 3291 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 WPT [Data type] Bit WPT The input of the tool wear compensation amount is: 0 : Enabled according to memory protection key signal KEY1. 1 : Enabled regardless of memory protection key signal KEY1. 3294 Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI is disabled 3295 Number of tool offset values (from the start number) whose input by MDI is disabled [Data type] Word When the modification of tool offset values by MDI key input is to be disabled using bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290 and bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No.3290, parameter Nos. 3294 and 3295 are used to set the range where such modification is disabled. In parameter No.3294, set the offset number of the start of tool offset values whose modification is disabled. In parameter No.3295, set the number of such values. When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No.3294 or parameter No.3295, no modification of the tool offset values is allowed. When the value set with parameter No.3294 is greater than the maximum tool offset count, no modification is allowed. [Example] The following setting disables the modification of both the tool geometry compensation values and tool wear compensation values corresponding to offset numbers 100 to 110: Bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No.3290=1 (Disables tool offset value modification.) Bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290=1 (Disables tool wear compensation value modification.) Parameter No.3294 = 100 Parameter No.3295 = 11 If bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290 is set to 0, the modification of the tool offset values alone is disabled. The tool wear compensation values may be modified. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 135 #7 GSC 3401 #6 GSB #5 ABS #4 MAB #3 #2 #1 FCD #0 DPI DPI [Data type] Bit DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal point 0 : The least input increment is assumed. 1 : The unit of mm, inches, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type decimal point input) FCD When an F command and a G command (G98, G99) for feed per minute or feed per rotation are specified in the same block, and the G command (G98, G99) is specified after the F command, the F command is: 0 : Assumed to be specified in the mode (G98 or G99) when the F command is specified 1 : Assumed to be specified in the mode of the G command (G98 or G99) of the same block NOTE 1 When FCD = 1: If the block containing a G command (G98, G99) does not include an F command, the last F command specified is assumed to be specified in the G command mode of the block. Example N1 G99 ; N2 Faaaa G98 ; - Faaaa is assumed to be specified in the G98 mode. N3 Fbbbb ; - Fbbbb is assumed to be specified in the G98 mode. N4 G99 ; - Fbbbb is assumed to be specified in the G99 mode. 2 In G code system B or C, G98 and G99 function are specified in G94 and G95. MAB Switching between the absolute and incremental commands in MDI operation 0 : Performed by G90 or G91 1 : Depending on the setting of ABS, #5 of parameter No.3401 ABS Program command in MDI operation 0 : Assumed as an incremental command 1 : Assumed as an absolute command NOTE ABS is valid when MAB, #4 of parameter No.3401, is set to 1. GSB, GSC The G code system is set. GSC GSB G code 0 0 G code system A 0 1 G code system B 1 0 G code system C 4.18 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 136 #7 G23 3402 #6 CLR CLR #5 #4 #3 G91 G91 #2 G19 #1 G18 #0 G01 G01 G23 [Data type] Bit G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0 : G00 mode (positioning) 1 : G01 mode (linear interpolation) G18 and G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared G19 G18 G17, G18 or G19 mode 0 0 G17 mode (plane XY) 0 1 G18 mode (plane ZX) 1 0 G19 mode (plane YZ) G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0 : G90 mode (absolute command) 1 : G91 mode (incremental command) CLR Reset button on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, and emergency stop signal 0 : Cause reset state. 1 : Cause clear state. For the reset and clear states, refer to Operator's manual. G23 When the power is turned on 0 : G22 mode 1 : G23 mode #7 3403 #6 AD2 #5 CIR #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 [Data type] Bit CIR Whenneitherthedistance(I,J,K)fromastartpointtothecenternoranarc radius (R) is specified in circular interpolation (G02, G03): 0 : The tool moves to an end point by linear interpolation. 1 : P/S alarm No.022 is issued. AD2 Specification of the same address two or more times in a block is: 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled (P/S alarm No.5074) NOTE 1 When 1 is set, specifying two or more G codes of the same group in a block will also result in an alarm being issued. 2 Up to three M codes can be specified in a single block. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 137 #7 M3B 3404 #6 EOR EOR #5 M02 M02 #4 M30 M30 #3 #2 SBP SBP #1 POL POL #0 NOP M3B [Data type] Bit NOP When a program is executed, a block consisting of an O number, EOB, or N number is: 0 : Not ignored, but regarded as being one block. 1 : Ignored. POL For a command address allowing a decimal point, omission of the decimal point is: 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled (P/S alarm No.5073) SBP Address P of the block including M198 in the subprogram call function 0 : Indicating a file number 1 : Indicating a program number M30 When M30 is specified in a memory operation: 0 : M30 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automatically searched for. So, when the ready signal FIN is returned and a reset or reset and rewind operation is not performed, the program is executed, starting from the beginning. 1 : M30 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched for. (The head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind signal.) M02 When M02 is specified in memory operation 0 : M02 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automati- cally searched for. So, when the end signal FIN is returned and a reset or reset and rewind operation is not performed, the program is executed, starting from the beginning. 1 : M02 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched for. (The head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind signal.) EOR When the end–of–record mark (%) is read during program execution: 0 : P/S alarm No.5010 occurs. (Automatic operation is stopped, and the system enters the alarm state.) 1 : No alarm occurs. (Automatic operation is stopped, and the system is reset.) M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block 0 : One 1 : Up to three 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 138 #7 QAB 3405 #6 QLG #5 DDP #4 CCR #3 G36 #2 PPS #1 DWL DWL #0 AUX AUX [Data type] Bit AUX The least increment of the command of the second miscellaneous function specified with a decimal point 0 : Assumed to be 0.001 1 : Depending on the input increment. (For input in mm, 0.001 is assumed, or for input in inches, 0.0001 is assumed.) DWL The dwell time (G04) is: 0 : Always dwell per second. 1 : Dwell per second in the feed per minute mode, or dwell per rotation in the feed per rotation mode. PPS The passing–point signal output function is: 0 : Not used 1 : Used G36 For a G code used with the automatic tool compensation function: 0 : G36/G37 is used. 1 : G37.1/G37.2 is used. NOTE If it is necessary to perform circular threading (counterclockwise), set this parameter to 1. CCR Addresses used for chamfering and corner rounding 0 : Address used for chamfering and corner rounding is "I" or "K", not "C". In direct drawing dimension programming, addresses ",C", ",R", and ",A" (with comma) are used in stead of "C", "R", and "A". 1 : Addresses used for chamfering, corner rounding, and direct drawing dimension programming are "C", "R", and "A" without comma. Thus, addresses A and C cannot be used as the names of axes. DDP Angle commands by direct drawing dimension programming 0 : Normal specification 1 : A supplementary angle is given. QLG When the passing–point signal output function is used, the remaining distance to be traveled specified in address ",Q" is: 0 : The combined distance of all axes 1 : The distance of the longest axis NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 7 (QAB) of parameter No.3405 = 0. QAB When the passing–point signal output function is used, address ",Q" specifies: 0 : Remaining distance to be traveled 1 : Coordinate value of the longest axis B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 139 #7 C07 3406 #6 #5 C05 C05 #4 C04 C04 #3 C03 C03 #2 C02 C02 #1 C01 C01 #0 C07 3407 C14 C14 C13 C11 C11 C10 C10 C09 C08 C08 C15 3408 C20 C19 C18 C17 C16 C16 CFH 3409 C24 CFH [Data type] Bit Cxx (xx: 01 to 24) When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.3402 is 1, the reset button on the MDI panel, the external reset signal, the reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop will, 0 : Clear the G code with group number xx. 1 : Not clear the G code with group number xx. CFH When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.3402 is 1, the reset button on the MDI panel, the external reset signal, the reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop will, 0 : Clear F codes, H codes (for the M series), D codes (for the M series), and T codes (for the T series). 1 : Not clear F codes, H codes (for the M series), D codes (for the M series), and T codes (for the T series). 3410 Tolerance of arc radius [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 When a circular interpolation command (G02, G03) is executed, the tolerance for the radius between the start point and the end point is set. If the difference of radii between the start point and the endpointexceedsthe tolerance set here, a P/S alarm No.20 is informed. NOTE When the set value is 0, the difference of radii is not checked. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 140 3411 M code preventing buffering 1 3412 M code preventing buffering 2 3413 M code preventing buffering 3 L L 3420 M code preventing buffering 10 [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 255 Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If processing directed by an M code must be performed by the machine without buffering the following block, specify the M code. M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they are not specified in these parameters. 3421 Minimum value 1 of M code preventing buffering 3422 Maximum value 1 of M code preventing buffering 3423 Minimum value 2 of M code preventing buffering 3424 Maximum value 2 of M code preventing buffering 3425 Minimum value 3 of M code preventing buffering 3426 Maximum value 3 of M code preventing buffering 3427 Minimum value 4 of M code preventing buffering 3428 Maximum value 4 of M code preventing buffering 3429 Minimum value 5 of M code preventing buffering 3430 Maximum value 5 of M code preventing buffering 3431 Minimum value 6 of M code preventing buffering 3432 Maximum value 6 of M code preventing buffering [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 65535 When a specified M code is within the range specified with parameter Nos. 3421 and 3422, 3423 and 3424, 3425 and 3426, 3427 and 3428, 3429 and 3430, or 3431 and 3432, buffering for the next block is not performed until the execution of the block is completed. NOTE 1 The specification of a minimum value that exceeds the specified maximum value is invalid. 2 When there is only one data item, set the following: minimum value = maximum value. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 141 3441 First of the M codes assigned to item numbers 100 to 199 3442 First of the M codes assigned to item numbers 200 to 299 3443 First of the M codes assigned to item numbers 300 to 399 3444 First of the M codes assigned to item numbers 400 to 499 [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 The M code group check function checks if a combination of up to three M codes specified in a block is valid, and the function issues an alarm if an invalid combination is detected. Before this function can be used, up to 500 M codes must be divided into no more than 128 groups. A set number from 0 to 499 is assigned to each of the 500 M codes. The group to which each M code with a set number assigned belongs is specified using the M code group setting screen. The set numbers 0 to 499 correspond to M000 to M499. These parameters allow arbitrary M codes to be assigned in units of 100 M codes to the set numbers 100 to 499. Parameter No.3441: Sets the M codes corresponding to the set numbers 100 to 199. Parameter No.3442: Sets the M codes corresponding to the set numbers 200 to 299. Parameter No.3443: Sets the M codes corresponding to the set numbers 300 to 399. Parameter No.3444: Sets the M codes corresponding to the set numbers 400 to 499. Each parameter sets the M code that corresponds to the first of the set numbers allocated to the parameter, thus assigning 100 successive M codes. For example, when parameter No.3441 = 10000 is set, the M codes corresponding to the set numbers 100 to 199 are M10000 to M10099. NOTE 1 When the value 0 is set in a parameter, the specification of 100 added to the value of the previous parameter is assumed. For example, when No.3441=10000, and No.3442=0 are specified: The M codes corresponding to the set numbers 100 to 199 are: M10000 to M10099 The M codes corresponding to the set numbers 200 to 299 are: M10100 to M10199 Specifying 0 for parameter No.3441 has the same effect as specifying for parameter No.3441 = 100. 2 When a is specified for parameter No.3441, b is specified for parameter No.3442, c is specified for parameter No.3443, and d is specified for parameter No.3444, the following relationships must be satisfied: a + 99 < b, b + 99 < c, c + 99 < d 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 142 #7 3450 #6 #5 #4 NPS #3 CQD CQD #2 #1 #0 AUP [Data type] Bit AUP When a command for the second miscellaneous function contains a decimal point or negative sign: 0 : The command is invalid. 1 : The command is valid. NOTE For the T series, a decimal point and negative sign are supported for commands for the second miscellaneous function, regardless of the setting made with this parameter. CQD The method used for determining the amount of travel in circular interpolation is: 0 : Series 16 type. 1 : Series 15 type. NPS A block that contains M98 Pxxx or M99, and which contains no addresses other than O and N functions: 0 : As a one–block NC statement involving no movement. (A single–block stop is caused.) 1 : As a macro statement. (A single–block stop is not caused. Moreover, the block is not regarded as a block involving no movement in tool–tip radius compensation mode.) 3460 Address for second miscellaneous function [Data type] Byte This parameter specifies the address used for the second miscellaneous function, as follows: Address A B C U V W Set value 65 66 67 85 86 87 NOTE 1 Address B is assumed when a value other than the above is set. 2 Axes names cannot be used to specify the address. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 143 Allowabledifferencebetweenthespecifiedendpositionandtheendpositionobtained fromtheincrease/decreaseandfrequencyinspiralinterpolationorconicinterpolation 3471 [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Units Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the maximum allowable difference (absolute value) between the specified end position and the end position obtained from the increase/decrease and frequency in spiral or conic interpolation. 3472 Minimum radius needed to maintain the actual speed in spiral or conic interpolation [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Units Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 1000 to 99999999 (metric input) 10000 to 99999999 (inch input) If this parameter value is 0 or a value outside the valid data range, the minimum value of the range is assumed. In spiral interpolation and conic interpolation, the speed is generally held constant. In an area near the center, the spiral radius decreases, resulting in an extremely high angular velocity. To prevent this, once the spiral radius has reached the parameter–set value, the angular velocity subsequently remains constant. As a result, the actual speed decreases. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 144 3620 Number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 0 to 1023 Set the number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position for each axis. 3 2 1 –1 –2 Pitch error compensation value (absolute value) Reference position Pitch error compensation position (number) Compensation position number Set compensating value 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 +3 –1 –1 +1 +2 –1 –3 Fig.4.19 Pitch Error Compensation Position Number and Value (Example) In the above example, set 33 as the number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position. 3621 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 0 to 1023 Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely negative position for each axis. 4.19 PARAMETERS OF PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 145 3622 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 0 to 1023 Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely positive position for each axis. NOTE This value must be larger than set value of parameter (No.3620). 3623 Magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte axis [Unit of data] 1 [Valid data range] 0 to 100 Set the magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis. If the magnification is set to 1, the same unit as the detection unit is used for the compensation data. If the magnitication is set to 0, the pith error compensation is not valid. 3624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with equal spacing. The space between two adjacent positions is set for each axis. The 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 146 minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions is limited and obtained from the following equation: Minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions = maximum feedrate (rapid traverse rate)/7500 Units: Minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions: mm, inch, deg Maximum feedrate: mm/min, inch/min, deg/min Example: When the maximum feedrate is 15000 mm/min, the minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions is 2 mm. If setting a magnification causes the absolute value of the compensation amount at a compensation position to exceed 100, enlarge the interval between the compensation positions by using a multiple calculated as follows: Multiple = maximum compensation amount (absolute value)/128 (Round the remainder up to the nearest integer.) Minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions = Value obtained from the above maximum feedrate x multiple Example 1) For linear axis D Machine stroke: –400 mm to + 800 mm D Interval between the pitch error compensation positions: 50 mm D No.of the compensation position of the reference position: 40 If the above is specified, the No.of the farthest compensation point in the negative direction is as follows: No.of the compensation position of the reference position – (Machine stroke length in the negative direction/Interval between the compensation points) + 1 = 40 – 400/50 + 1 =33 No.of the farthest compensation position in the positive direction is as follows: No.of the compensation position of the reference position + (Machine stroke length in the positive direction/Interval between the compensation positions) = 40 + 800/50 = 56 The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the compensation position No.is as follows: Machine coordinate (mm) Compensation point No. –400 –350 –100 –50 0 50 100 750 800 33 39 40 41 42 56 Therefore, set the parameters as follows: Parameter Setting No. 3620: Compensation point number for reference position 40 No. 3621: Compensation point number for farthest point in the negative direction 33 No. 3622: Compensation point number for farthest point in the positive direction 56 No. 3623: Compensation magnification 1 No. 3624: Compensation point interval 50000 B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 147 The compensation value is output at the compensationn position No.corresponding to each section between the coordinates. The following is an example of the compensation values. No. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Compensation values +2 +1 +1 –2 0 –1 0 –1 +2 +1 0 –1 –1 –2 0 +1 +2 Pitch error compensation amount (absolute value) Reference position –400 –300 –200 –100 0 100 200 300 400 (mm) –1 –2 –3 –4 +4 +3 +2 +1 Example 2) For the rotation axis D Amount of movement per rotation: 360° D Interval between pitch error compensation position: 45° D No.of the compensation position of the reference position: 60 If the above is specified, the No.of the farthest compensation position in the negative direction for the rotation axis is always equal to the compensation position No.of the reference position. The No.of the farthest compensation position in the positive direction is as follows: No.of the compensation position of the reference position + (Move amount per rotation/Interval between the compensation position) = 60 + 360/45 = 68 The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the compensation position No.is as follows: The compensation value is output at the circled position. If the sum of the compensation value from 61 to 68 is not zero, the pitch error per rotation accumulates, resulting in a positional shift. For compensation position 60, set the same compensation value as for 68. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 148 Reference position 0.0 315.0 270.0 225.0 180.0 135.0 90.0 45.0 (68) (60) (67) (66) (65) (64) (63) (62) (61) (+) Set the parameters as follows: Parameter Setting No. 3620: Compensation point number for reference position 60 No. 3621: Compensation point number for farthest point in the negative direction 60 No. 3622: Compensation point number for farthest point in the positive direction 68 No. 3623: Compensation magnification 1 No. 3624: Compensation point interval 45000 The following is an example of compensation values. No.of the compensation position 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Compensation value +1 –2 +1 +3 –1 –1 –3 +2 +1 Pitch error compensation value (absolute value) Reference position 0 100 (deg) –1 –2 –3 –4 +4 +3 +2 +1 0 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 149 #7 3700 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 NRF #0 [Data type] Bit NRF The first move command (such as G00 and G01) after the serial spindle is switched to Cs axis contouring control performs: 0 : Positioning after returning to the reference position. 1 : Normal positioning. #7 3701 #6 #5 SS3 #4 SS2 #3 #2 #1 ISI #0 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. ISI The serial interface for the first and second spindles are: 0 : Used. 1 : Not used. NOTE This parameter is valid when the spindle serial output option is provided. It is used when the CNC is started with serial interface control for the first and second serial spindles disabled temporarily (for example, for CNC startup adjustment). Usually, it should be set to 0. If the serial interface for the third serial spindle is disabled for the same reason, parameter SS3 (bit 5 of parameter No.3701) must be 0. (This parameter does not disable the serial interface of the third spindle.) If this parameter is set to 1 when using the serial spindle and analog spindle at the same time, the analog spindle is set the first axis. SS2 In serial spindle control, the second spindle is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. NOTE This parameter is valid, when the spindle serial output option is provided and parameter ISI(bit 1 of parameter No.3701)is 0. When the spindle synchronization option is provided, it is set automatically when power is switched on. Setting this parameter enables: 1 Confirmation of connection of the second serial spindle amplifier, and communication with it 2 Control of the second spindle during asynchronous control (SIND2) The simplified spindle synchronization function requires that two serial spindles be connected. So this parameter must be set; it will not be set automatically. When this parameter is set, it is also necessary to set the serial spindle parameter for the second spindle. 4.20 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE CONTROL 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 150 SS3 In serial spindle control, the third spindle is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. NOTE This parameter is valid, single–path control and the spindle output option and the three–spindle serial output option are provided. Parameter setting Serial spindles to be sed SS3 SS2 Serial spindles to be used First serial spindle only f First and second serial spindles f f First, second, and third serial spindles #7 ECS 3702 #6 ESS #5 EAS #4 ESI #3 OR2 OR2 #2 OR1 OR1 #1 EMS EMS #0 OR3 OR3 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit OR3 The spindle orientation function based on an externally set stop position is: 0 : Not used by the third spindle motor. 1 : Used by the third spindle motor. NOTE When the spindle orientation function based on an externally set stop position is used, the position coder–based spindle orientation stop position set parameters (No.4031 and No.4204) are ineffective. EMS Multi–spindle control function 0 : Used 1 : Not used NOTE If the multi–spindle control function is not required for one path in two–path control, specify this parameter for the path to which the multi–spindle control function need not be applied. OR1 Whether the stop–position external–setting type orientation function is used by the first spindle motor 0 : Not used 1 : Used OR2 Whether the stop–position external–setting type orientation function is used by the second spindle motor 0 : Not used 1 : Used B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 151 ESI The spindle positioning function is 0 : Used 1 : Not used NOTE This parameter is used when the spindle positioning option specified with two–path control, and the spindle positioning function is not required for either path. Set ESI to 1 for a system that does not require the spindle positioning function. EAS For tool post 1 (or tool post 2), the S analog output function is: 0 : Used. 1 : Not used. ESS For tool post 1 (or tool post 2), the S serial output function is: 0 : Used. 1 : Not used. ECS For tool post 1 (or tool post 2), the Cs contour control function is: 0 : Used. 1 : Not used. NOTE Parameter EAS, ESS, and ECS are used for 2–path control. These parameters are used to determine whether the optional function, S analog output function, S serial output function, and Cs contour control function, are used for each tool post. #7 3703 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 RSI #0 2SP NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit 2SP Specifies whether one or two spindles are controlled (2–path control). 0 : One spindle (two tool posts) 1 : Two spindle (two tool posts) RSI Spindle command selection for 2–path control : 0 : Affects commands from SIND for the first spindle 1 : Does not affect commands from SIND for the first spindle (Spindle commands from SIND always control spindles in the same path, regardless of spindle command selection signals SLSPA and SLSPB .) 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 152 #7 3705 #6 SFA #5 NSF #4 EVS #3 SGT #2 SGB #1 RSI GST #0 ESF ESF [Data type] Bit ESF When the spindle control function (Spindle analog outpu or Spindle serial output) is used, and the constant surface speed control function is used or bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No.3705 is set to 1: 0 : S codes and SF are output for all S commands. 1 : S codes and SF are not output for an S command in constant surface speed control mode (G96 mode) or for an S command used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping (G50S–––;). NOTE For the T series, this parametar is enabled when bit 4 (EVS) of parameter No.3705 is set to 1. For the M series, SF is not output: (1) For an S command used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping (G92S–––;) in constant surface speed control mode (2) When bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No.3705 is set to 1 GST The SOR signal is used for: 0 : Spindle orientation 1 : Gear shift SGB Gear switching method 0 : Method A (Parameters 3741 to 3743 for the maximum spindle speed at each gear are used for gear selection.) 1 : Method B (Parameters 3751 and 3752 for the spindle speed at the gear switching point are used for gear selection.) SGT Gear switching method during tapping cycle (G84 and G74) 0 : Method A (Same as the normal gear switching method) 1 : Method B (Gears are switched during tapping cycle according to the spindle speed set in parameters 3761 and 3762). EVS When the spindle control function (Spindle analog output or Spindle serial output) is used, S codes and SF are: 0 : Not output for an S command. 1 : Output for an S command. NOTE The output of S codes and SF for an S command in constant surface speed control mode (G96), or for an S command used to specify maximum spindle speed clamping (G50S–––;) depends on the setting of bit 0 (ESF) of parameter No.3705. NSF When an S code command is issued in constant surface speed control, 0 : SF is output. 1 : SF is not output. SFA The SF signal is output: 0 : When gears are switched. 1 : Irrespective of whether gears are switched. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 153 #7 TCW 3706 #6 CWM CWM #5 ORM ORM #4 GTT #3 PCS #2 #1 PG2 PG2 #0 PG1 PG1 TCW [Data type] Bit PG2 and PG1 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder Namber of spindle revolutions Number of position coder revolutions Magnification PG2 PG1 1 0 0 2 0 1 Magnification= 4 1 0 8 1 1 PCS When multi–spindle control is applied to two tool posts in two–path control, this parameter specifies whether a position coder feedback signal from the other tool post is selectable, regardless of the state of the PC2SLC signal (bit 7 of G028/bit 7 of G1028) of the other tool post: 0 : Not selectable. 1 : Selectable. (To select a position coder for the other tool post, the SLPCA signal (bit 2 of G064) and the SLPCB signal (bit 3 of G064) are used.) NOTE Multi–spindle control based on the same serial spindle must be applied to both tool posts. GTT Selection of a spindle gear selection method 0: Type M. 1 : Type T. NOTE 1 Type M: The gear selection signal is not entered. In response to an S command, the CNC selects a gear according to the speed range of each gear specified beforehand in parameters. Then the CNC reports the selection of a gear by outputting the gear selection signal. The spindle speed corresponding to the gear selected by the gear selection signal is output. Type T: The gear selection signal is entered. The spindle speed corresponding to the gear selected by this signal is output. 2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected, type T is selected, regardless of whether this parameter is specified. 3 When type T spindle gear switching is selected, the following parameters have no effect: No.3705#2 SGB, No.3751, No.3752, No.3705#3 SGT, No.3761, No.3762, No.3705#6 SFA, No.3735, No.3736 However, parameter No.3744 is valid. ORM Voltage polarity during spindle orientation 0 : Positive 1 : Negative 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 154 TCW, CWM Voltage polarity when the spindle speed voltage is output TCW CWM Voltage polarity 0 0 Both M03 and M04 positive 0 1 Both M03 and M04 negative 1 0 M03 positive, M04 negative 1 1 M03 negative, M04 positive #7 3707 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 P22 #0 P21 [Data type] Bit P22 and P21 Gear ratio of spindle to second position coder Number of spindle revolutions Number of position coder revolutions Magnification P22 P21 1 0 0 2 0 1 Magnification= 4 1 0 8 1 1 #7 3708 #6 #5 #4 SVD SVD #3 #2 #1 SAT #0 SAR SAR [Data type] Bit SAR The spindle speed arrival signal is: 0 : Not checked 1 : Checked SAT Check of the spindle speed arrival signal at the start of executing the thread cutting block 0 : The signal is checked only when SAR, #0 of parameter 3708, is set. 1 : The signal is always checked irrespective of whether SAR is set. NOTE When thread cutting blocks are consecutive, the spindle speed arrival signal is not checked for the second and subsequent thread cutting blocks. SVD When the SIND signal is on, the detection of spindle speed fluctuation is: 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 155 #7 3709 #6 #5 #4 #3 MRS #2 MSI MSI #1 #0 SAM [Data type] Bit SAM The sampling frequency to obtain the average spindle speed 0 : 4 (Normally, set to 0.) 1 : 1 MSI In multi–spindle control, the SIND signal is valid 0 : Only when the first spindle is valid (SIND signal for the 2nd, 3rd spindle becomes ineffective) 1 : For each spindle irrespective of whether the spindle is selected (Each spindle has its own SIND signal). MRS Actual spindle speed signals and S 12–bit code signals to be output when multi–spindle control is performed 0 : Signals common to the first and second spindles are used, and the signals for the spindle selected by the spindle selection signal are output. 1 : Separate signals are output to the first and second spindles. Signal When MRS is 0 When MRS is 1 Actual spindle speed signals AR0 to AR15 (F040, F041) First spindle Second spindle First spindle S 12–bit code signals R01O to R12O (F036, F037) First spindle Second spindle First spindle Actual spindle speed signals AR20 to AR215 (F206, F207) – Second spindle S12–bit code signals R01O2 to R12O2 (F204, F205) – Second spindle #7 3715 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 NSAx [Data type] Bit axis NSAx This parameter specifies an axis for which confirmation of the spindle speed reached signal (SAR) is unnecessary when a move command is executed for the axis. When a move command is issued only for an axis for which 1 is set in this parameter, the spindle speed reached signal (SAR) is not checked. 3730 Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 0.1 % [Valid data range] 700 to 1250 Set data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of spindle speed. [Adjustment method] (1) Assign standard value 1000 to the parameter. (2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed is the maximum voltage (10 V). (3) Measure the output voltage. (4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter No.3730. Set value= * 1000 Measured data (V) 10 (V) 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 156 (5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed is the maximum voltage. Confirm that the output voltage is 10V. NOTE This parameter needs not to be set for serial spindles. 3731 Compensation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of the spindle speed [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Velo [Valid data range] –1024 to+1024 Set compesation value for the offset voltage of the analog output of the spindle speed. Set value =–8191 Offset voltage (V)/12.5 [Adjustment method] (1) Assign standard value 0 to the parameter. (2) Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed is 0. (3) Measure the output voltage. (4) Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter No.3731. Set value= 12.5 –8191 * Offset voltage (V) (5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed is 0. Confirm that the output voltage is 0V. NOTE This parameter need not to be set for serial spindles. 3732 The spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 0 to 20000 Set the spindle speed during spindle orientation or the spindle motor speed during gear shift. When GST, #1 of parameter 3705, is set to 0, set the spindle speed during spindle orientation in rpm. When GST, #1 of parameter 3705, is set to 1, set the spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift calculated from the following formula. For a serial spindle Set value = * 16383 Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift Maximum spindle motor speed For an analog spindle Set value = * 4095 Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift Maximum spindle motor speed B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 157 3735 Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 4095 Set the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor. Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor Set value = * 4095 Maximum spindle motor speed 3736 Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 4095 Set the maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor. Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor Set value = * 4095 Maximum spindle motor speed Spindle motor speed Max. speed (4095, 10V) Spindle motor max. clamp speed (Parameter No.3736) Spindle motor minimum clamp speed (Parameter No.3735) Spindle speed (S command) Fig.4.20 (a) Maximum Clamp Speed of Spindle Motor 3740 Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed arrival signal [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 225 Set the time elapsed from the execution of the S function up to the checking of the spindle speed arrival signal. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 158 3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 3742 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 3743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3 3744 Maximum spindle speed for gear 4 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the maximum spindle speed corresponding to each gear. Spindle speed command (S command) Spindle motor speed Max. speed (4095, 10V) Spindle motor max. clamp speed (Parameter No.3736) Spindle motor mini- mum clamp speed (Parameter No.3735) Gear 1 Max. speed Gear 2 Max. speed Gear 3 Max. speed Fig.4.20 (b) Maximum Spindle Speed Corresponding to Gear 1/2/3 B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 159 3751 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 3752 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 4095 For gear switching method B, set the spindle motor speed when the gears are switched. Set value = * 4095 Spindle motor speed when the gears are switched Maximum spindle motor speed Spindle motor max. clamp speed Parameter No.3736 Parameter No.3752 Spindle speed command (S command) Max. speed (4095, 10V) Speed at gear 1–2 change point Parameter No.3751 Spindle motor minimum clamp speed Parameter No.3735 Spindle motor speed Gear 1 max. speed parameter No.3741 Gear 2 max. speed parameter No.3742 Gear 3 max speed parameter No.3743 Gear 1–2 change point Gear 2–3 change point Speed at gear 2–3 change point Fig.4.20 (c) Spindle Motor Speed at Gear 1–2/2–3 Change Point 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 160 3761 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping 3762 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 When method B is selected (SGT,#3 of parameter 3705, is set to 1) for the tapping cycle gear switching method, set the spindle speed when the gears are switched. Max. speed (4095, 10V) Spindle motor max. clamp speed (Parameter No.3736) Spindle motor minimum clamp speed (Parameter No.3735) Spindle motor speed Spindle speed command (S command) Gear 1 Max. speed Parameter No.3741 Gear 2 Max. speed Parameter No.3742 Gear 3 Max. speed Parameter No.3743 Gear 1–2 change point parameter No.3761 Gear 2–3 change point parameter No.3762 Fig.4.20 (d) Spindle Motor Speed at Gear 1–2/2–3 Change Point during Tapping 3770 Axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., number of control axes Set the axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed control. NOTE When 0 is set, constant surface speed control is always applied to the X–axis. In this case, specifying P in a G96 block has no effect on the constant surface speed control. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 161 3771 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed control mode (G96) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the minimum spindle speed in the constant surface speed control mode (G96). The spindle speed in constant surface speed control is clamped to the speed given by parameter 3771. 3772 Maximum spindle speed [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed of the spindle is specified , or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum speed because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed set in the parameter. NOTE 1 In the M series, this parameter is valid when the constant surface speed control option is selected. 2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected, the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed, regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is specified. 3 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is not clamped. 4 When spindle speed command control is applied using the PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed is not clamped. 5 When the multi–spindle control option is selected (T series), set the maximum speed for each spindle in the following parameters: Parameter No.3772: Sets the maximum speed for the first spindle. Parameter No.3802: Sets the maximum speed for the second spindle. Parameter No.3822: Sets the maximum speed for the third spindle. 3802 Maximum speed of the second spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Parameter sets the maximum speed for the second spindle. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed of the spindle is specified, or the speed of the spindle exceeds the maximum speed because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed set in the parameter. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 162 NOTE 1 This parameter is valid when the multi–spindle control option is selected. 2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected, the spindle speed is clamped at the specified maximum speed, regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is specified. 3 When 0 is set in this parameter, the setting of parameter No.3772 for the first spindle is used. When 0 is set in parameter No.3772, the spindle speed is not clamped. 4 When spindle speed command control is applied using the PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed is not clamped. 3811 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 of the second spindle 3812 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 of the second spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the maximum spindle speed for each gear of the second spindle. NOTE These parameters are used for the multi–spindle control. 3820 Data for adjusting the gain of the analog output of the third–spindle speed [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 0.1% [Valid data range] 700 to 1250 Set the data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output of the third spindle speed. NOTE This parameter is used for controlling the multi–spindles. 3821 Offset–voltage compensation value of the analog output of the third–spindle speed [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Velo [Valid data range] –1024 to 1024 Set the offset–voltage compensation value of the analog output of the third–spindle speed. NOTE This parameter is used for controlling the multi–spindles. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 163 3822 Maximum speed of the third spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum speed for the third spindle. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum spindle speed is specified, or the spindle speed exceeds the maximum speed because of the spindle speed override function, the spindle speed is clamped at the maximum speed set in the parameter. NOTE 1 This parameter is valid when the multi–spindle control option is selected. 2 When the constant surface speed control option is selected, the spindle speed is clamped at the specified maximum speed, regardless of whether the G96 mode or G97 mode is set. 3 When 0 is set in this parameter, the setting of parameter No.3772 for the first spindle is used. When 0 is set in parameter No.3772, the spindle speed is not clamped. 4 When spindle speed command control is applied using the PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the speed of the spindle is not clamped. 3831 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 of the third spindle 3832 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 of the third spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the maximum spindle speed for each gear of the third spindle. NOTE These parameters are used for the multi–spindle control. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 164 Table 4.20 (a) Parameters for Control of Serial Interface Spindle Cs Contouring Control Axis No. Data type Description 3900 3901 3902 3903 3904 Byte Word Word Word Word First group for the first spindle Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to be changed according to the set values of parameters 3901 to 3904 when the Cs contouring axis is controlled (set values 0 to 8) Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 1 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 2 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 3 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 4 selection 3910 3911 3912 3913 3914 Byte Word Word Word Word Second group for the first spindle Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to be changed according to the set values of parameters 3911 to 3914 when the Cs contouring axis is controlled (set values 0 to 8) Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 1 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 2 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 3 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 4 selection 3920 3921 3922 3923 3924 Byte Word Word Word Word Third group for the first spindle Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to be changed according to the set values of parameters 3921 to 3924 when the Cs contouring axis is controlled (set values 0 to 8) Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 1 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 2 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 3 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 4 selection 3930 3931 3932 3933 3934 Byte Word Word Word Word Fourth group for the first spindle Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to be changed according to the set values of parameters 3931 to 3934 when the Cs contouring axis is controlled (set values 0 to 8) Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 1 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 2 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 3 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 4 selection 3940 3941 3942 3943 3944 Byte Word Word Word Word Fifth group for the first spindle Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to be changed according to the set values of parameters 3941 to 3944 when the Cs contouring axis is controlled (set values 0 to 8) Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 1 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 2 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 3 selection Loop gain for the servo axis when the Cs contouring axis is controlled for spindle gear 4 selection B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 165 First, select servo axes which perform interpolation with the Cs contouring axis. (Up to five axes can be selected.) When there is no servo axis for interpolation with the Cs contouring axis, set the parameters 3900, 3910, 3920, 3930, and 3940 to 0 to terminate parameter setting. When there are servo axes for interpolation with the Cs contouring axis, the parameters must be set according to the procedure below for each axis. (1) Set the number of a servo axis (1 to 8) for interpolation with the Cs contouring axis in parameters 39n0 (n = 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4). (2) Set loop gain values of the servo axis specified in (1) above which is used when the Cs contouring axis is controlled in parameters 39n1, 39n2, 39n3, and 39n4. (There are four stages for main gears used.) (3) When the number of specified servo axes is less than 5, set the remaining parameters (39n0) to 0 to terminate parameter setting. When the number of a Cs contouring axis is set to parameter 39n0, the parameter is assumed to be set to 0. NOTE The loop gain used for Cs contouring control is selected when the mode changes from the spindle mode to the Cs contouring axis control mode according to the gears set at this time. If gears are switched in the Cs contouring axis control mode, the loop gain cannot be changed. Table 4.20 (b) Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (1/7) No. Data type Description 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4008 4009 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter (Cannot be changed by the user. See Note 1.) Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter (for setting parameters automatically. See Note 2.) 4020 4021 4022 4023 4024 4025 4026 4027 4028 4029 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Maximum motor speed Maximum speed when the C axis is controlled Speed arrival detection level Speed detection level Speed zero detection level Torque limit value Load detection level 1 Load detection level 2 Output limit pattern Output limit value 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 166 Table 4.20 (b) Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (2/7) No. Description Data type 4030 4031 4032 4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Soft start/stop time Position coder method orientation stop position Acceleration/deceleration time constant when the spindle synchronization is controlled Arrival level for the spindle synchronization speed Shift amount when the spindle phase synchronization is controlled Spindle phase synchronization compensation data Feed forward factor Velocity loop feed forward factor Orientation speed Slip compensation gain 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046 4047 4048 4049 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Normal velocity loop proportional gain (HIGH) Normal velocity loop proportional gain (LOW) Velocity loop proportional gain during orientation (HIGH) Velocity loop proportional gain during orientation (LOW) Velocity loop proportional gain in servo mode/synchronous control (HIGH) Velocity loop proportional gain in servo mode/synchronous control (LOW) Velocity loop proportional gain when the C axis is controlled (HIGH) Velocity loop proportional gain when the C axis is controlled (LOW) Normal velocity loop integral gain (HIGH) Normal velocity loop integral gain (LOW) 4050 4051 4052 4053 4054 4055 4056 4057 4058 4059 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Velocity loop integral gain during orientation (HIGH) Velocity loop integral gain during orientation (LOW) Velocity loop integral gain in servo mode/synchronous control (HIGH) Velocity loop integral gain in servo mode/synchronous control (LOW) Velocity loop integral gain when the C axis is controlled (HIGH) Velocity loop integral gain when the C axis is controlled (LOW) Gear ratio (HIGH) Gear ratio (MEDIUM HIGH) Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW) Gear ratio (LOW) 4060 4061 4062 4063 4064 4065 4066 4067 4068 4069 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Position gain during orientation (HIGH) Position gain during orientation (MEDIUM HIGH) Position gain during orientation (MEDIUM LOW) Position gain during orientation (LOW) Position gain change ratio when orientation is completed Position gain in servo mode/synchronous control (HIGH) Position gain in servo mode/synchronous control (MEDIUM HIGH) Position gain in servo mode/synchronous control (MEDIUM LOW) Position gain in servo mode/synchronous control (LOW) Position gain when the C axis is controlled (HIGH) 4070 4071 4072 4073 4074 4075 4076 4077 4078 4079 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Position gain when the C axis is controlled (MEDIUM HIGH) Position gain when the C axis is controlled (MEDIUM LOW) Position gain when the C axis is controlled (LOW) Grid shift amount in servo mode Reference position return speed in Cs contouring control mode or servo mode Orientation completion signal detection level Motor velocity limit value during orientation Orientation stop position shift amount MS signal constant = (L/2)/(2 x π x H) x 4096 MS signal gain adjustment 4080 4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Regenerative power limit Delay time prior motor power shut–off Acceleration/deceleration time setting Motor voltage during normal rotation Motor voltage during orientation Motor voltage in servo mode/synchronous control Motor voltage when the C axis is controlled Over–speed detection level Excessive velocity deviation detection level when the motor is constrained Excessive velocity deviation detection level when the motor is rotated B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 167 Table 4.20 (b) Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (3/7) No. Description Data type 4090 4091 4092 4093 4094 4095 4096 4097 4098 4099 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Overload detection level Position gain change ratio when returning to the origin in the servo mode Position gain change ratio when returning to the origin in C axis control Reserved Disturbance torque compensation constant (Acceleraton feedback gain) Speed meter output voltage adjustment value Load meter output voltage adjustment value Spindle velocity feedback gain Maximum speed at which position coder signal can be detected Delay time for energizing the motor 4100 4101 4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Base velocity of the motor output specification Limit value for the motor output specification Base speed Magnetic flux weakening start velocity Current loop proportional gain during normal operation Current loop proportional gain when the C axis is controlled Current loop integral gain during normal operation Current loop integral gain when the C axis is controlled Zero point of current loop integral gain Current loop proportional gain velocity factor 4110 4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4119 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Current conversion constant Secondary current factor for exciting current Current expectation constant Slip constant High–speed rotation slip compensation constant Compensation constant of voltage applied to motor in the dead zone Electromotive force compensation constant Electromotive force phase compensation constant Electromotive force compensation velocity factor Time constant of voltage filter for electromotive force compensation 4120 4121 4122 4123 4124 4125 4126 4127 4128 4129 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Dead zone compensation data Time constant for changing the torque Velocity filter Overload detection time setting Voltage compensation factor during deceleration Timer during automatic running Velocity command during automatic running Load meter displayed value for maximum output Maximum output zero point Secondary current factor during rigid tapping 4130 4131 4132 4133 4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 Word Word Word Word 2–Word 2–Word Word Word Word Word Constant for compensating for the phase of the electromotive force at deceleration Time constant of the speed detection filter at the Cs contour control Conversion constant of the phase–V current Motor model code Reserved Grid shift amount when the C axis is controlled Motor voltage during normal rotation Motor voltage in the servo mode/synchronous control mode Base speed of the motor output specifications Limit value for the motor output specifications 4140 4141 4142 4143 4144 4145 4146 4147 4148 4149 Word Word Word Word 2–word 2–word Word Word Word Word Base speed Magnetic flux weakening start velocity Current loop proportional gain during normal operation Current loop integral gain during normal operation Zero point of the current loop integral gain Velocity factor of the current loop proportional gain Current conversion constant Secondary current factor for activating current Current expectation constant Slip constant 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 168 Table 4.20 (b) Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (4/7) No. Description Data type 4150 4151 4152 4153 4154 4155 4156 4157 4158 4159 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word High–speed rotation slip compensation constant Compensation constant for voltage applied to motor in the dead zone Electromotive force compensation constant Electromotive force phase compensation constant Velocity factor of the electromotive force compensation Voltage compensation factor during deceleration Slip compensation gain Time constant for changing the torque Maximum output zero point Secondary current factor during rigid tapping 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164 4165 4166 4167 4168 4169 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Hysteresis of the speed detection level Constant for compensating for the phase of the electromotive for at deceleration Velocity loop integral gain (HIGH) in Cs contour control cutting feed Velocity loop integral gain (LOW) in Cs contour control cutting feed Conversion constant of phase–V current Time constant of voltage filter for eletromotive force compensation Regenerative power limit Reserved Overload current alarm detection level (for low speed characteristic) Overload current alarm detection time constant 4170 4171 4172 4173 4174 4175 4176 4177 4178 4179 4180 4181 4182 4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188 4189 Word Word Word Word Word Word Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Overload current alarm detection level (for high speed characteristic) Arbitrary gear data between spindle and Position coder (HIGH No.of teeth on the spindle) Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (HIGH No.of teeth on PC) Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (LOW No.of teeth on spindle) Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (LOW No.of teeth on PC) Delay timer at ON of electromagnetic contactor in unit (S series) Spindle analog override zero level (α series) Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter 4190 4192 4193 4194 4195 4196 4197 4198 4199 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Bit parameter Maximum motor speed Reached speed level Speed detection level Speed zero detection level 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Torque limit value Load detection level 1 Output limit pattern Output limit value Position coder method orientation stop position Orientation speed Proportional gain (HIGH) of the normal velocity loop Proportional gain (LOW) of the normal velocity loop Velocity loop proportional gain during orientation (HIGH) Velocity loop proportional gain during orientation (LOW) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 169 Table 4.20 (b) Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (5/7) No. Description Data type 4210 4211 4212 4213 4214 4215 4216 4217 4218 4219 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Velocity loop proportional gain in the servo mode (HIGH) Velocity loop proportional gain in the servo mode (LOW) Normal velocity loop integral gain Velocity loop integral gain during orientation Velocity loop integral gain in the servo mode (HIGH) Reserved Gear ratio (HIGH) Gear ratio (LOW) Position gain during orientation (HIGH) Position gain during orientation (LOW) 4220 4221 4222 4223 4224 4225 4226 4227 4228 4229 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Position gain change ratio when orientation is completed Position gain in the servo mode (HIGH) Position gain in the servo mode (LOW) Grid shift amount in the servo mode Reserved Reserved Detection level of orientation completion signal Motor velocity limit value during orientation Shift amount of orientation stop position MS signal constant = (L/2)/(2 x π x H) x 4096 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234 4235 4236 4237 4238 4239 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word MS signal gain adjustment Regenerative power limit Delay time up to motor power shut–off Acceleration/deceleration time setting Spindle load monitor observer gain 1 Spindle load monitor observer gain 2 Motor voltage during normal rotation Motor voltage during orientation Motor voltage in the servo mode Position gain change ratio when returning to the origin in the servo mode 4240 4241 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Feed forward coefficient Feed forward coefficient in velocity loop Reserved Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (SUB/HIGH No.of teeth on spindle) Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (SUB/HIGH No.of teeth on PC) Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (SUB/LOW No.of teeth on spindle) Arbitrary gear data between spindle and position coder (SUB/LOW No.of teeth on PC) Word Spindle load monitor magnetic flux compensation time constant (for high–speed characteristic on the MAIN side) Word Spindle load motor torque constant (for high–speed characteristic on the MAIN side) Word Spindle load monitor observer gain 1 (on the MAIN side) 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258 4259 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Spindle load monitor observer gain 2 (on the MAIN side) Word Spindle load monitor magnetic flux compensation time constant (for low–speed characteristic on the MAIN side) Word Spindle load monitor magnetic flux compensation time constant (for high–speed characteristic) Word Spindle load monitor magnetic flux compensation time constant (for low–speed characteristic) Word Slip correction gain (for high–speed characteristic) Word Slip correction gain (for low–speed characteristic) Base velocity of the motor output specifications Limit value for the motor output specifications Base speed Magnetic flux weakening start velocity 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 170 Table 4.20 (b) Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (6/7) No. Description Data type 4260 4261 4262 4263 4264 4265 4266 4267 4268 4269 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Current loop proportional gain during normal operation Current loop integral gain during normal operation Zero point of current loop integral gain Velocity factor of current loop proportional gain Current conversion constant Secondary current factor for excitation current Current expectation constant Slip constant Compensation constant for high–speed rotation slip Compensation constant for voltage applied to motor in the dead zone 4270 4271 4272 4273 4274 4275 4276 4277 4278 4279 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Electromotive force compensation constant Phase compensation constant of electromotive force Compensation velocity factor for electromotive force Time constant for changing the torque Displayed value of load meter for maximum output Maximum output zero point Secondary current factor in rigid tapping Constant for compensating for the phase of the electromotive force at deceleration Time constant of the speed detection filter Reserved 4280 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Time constant of voltage filter for electromotive force compensation Word Spindle load monitor torque constant (for low–speed characteristic on the MAIN side) Word Spindle load monitor torque constant (for high–speed characteristic) Word Spindle load monitor torque constant (for low–speed characteristic) Motor voltage during normal rotation Motor voltage in the servo mode Base speed of the motor output specifications Limit value for the motor output specifications Base speed Magnetic flux weakening start velocity 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295 4296 4297 4298 4299 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Current loop proportional gain during normal operation Current loop integral gain during normal operation Zero point of current loop integral gain Velocity factor of current loop proportional gain Current conversion constant Secondary current factor for excitation current Current expectation constant Slip constant Compensation constant for high–speed rotation slip Compensation constant for voltage applied to motor in the dead zone 4300 4301 4302 4303 4304 4305 4306 4307 4308 4309 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Electromotive force compensation constant Phase compensation constant for electromotive force Compensation velocity factor for electromotive force Time constant for changing the torque Maximum output zero point Secondary current factor in rigid tapping Constant for compensating for the phase of the electromotive force at deceleration Limit of regenerative power Time constant of voltage filter for electromotive voltage compensation Motor model code 4310 4311 4312 4313 4314 4315 4316 4317 4318 4319 2–word 2–word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Reserved Reserved Position coder method orientation end signal width 2 (MAIN) Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal width 1 (MAIN) Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal width 2 (MAIN) Magnetic sensor method orientation stop position shift amount (MAIN) Position coder method orientation end signal width 2 (SUB) Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal width 1 (SUB) Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal width 2 (SUB) Magnetic sensor method orientation stop position shift amount (SUB) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 171 Table 4.20 (b) Parameters for Serial Interface Spindle Amplifier (α series, S series) (7/7) No. Description Data type 4320 4321 4322 4323 4324 4325 4326 4327 4328 4329 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Spindle orientation deceleration constant (MAIN/HIGH) Spindle orientation deceleration constant deceleration (MAIN/MEDIUM HIGH) Spindle orientation deceleration constant deceleration (MAIN/MEDIUM LOW) Spindle orientation deceleration constant deceleration (MAIN/LOW) Spindle orientation deceleration constant deceleration (SUB/HIGH) Spindle orientation deceleration constant deceleration (SUB/LOW) Width of pulses when switching to the spindle orientation control mode (MAIN) Width of pulses when switching to the spindle orientation control mode (SUB) Word Position coder–based spindle orientation command multiplication (MAIN) Word Position coder–based spindle orientation command multiplication (SUB) 4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335 4336 4337 4338 4339 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Motor excitation delay time at spindle orientation (MAIN) Word Motor excitation delay time at spindle orientation (SUB) Reserved Reserved No.of arbitrary pulses of speed detector (MAIN) No.of arbitrary pulses of speed detector (SUB) Magnetic flux change point for spindle synchronus acc./dec/ time calculation. Velocity compensation factor of velocity loop gain (MAIN) Velocity compensation factor of velocity loop gain (SUB) Word Torque clamp level 4340 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345 4346 4347 4348 4349 Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Word Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant for spindle synchronization Word Abnormal load detection level Reserved N pulse suppress Loock–ahead feed forward coefficient Word Spindle motor speed command detection level Incomplete integral coefficient Word Detection level for spindle 1–to–2 speed difference at slave operation Overload current alarm detection level (for low speed characteristic) Overload current alarm detection time constant 4350 4351 Word Word Overload current alarm detection level (for high speed characteristic) Compensation for current detection offset 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 172 Notes on parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial interface NOTE 1 Among the parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial interface, parameters Nos. 4015 and 4191 cannot be changed by the users. These parameters require to assign optional software to the CNC and are automatically set depending on the type of the software. 2 To set the parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial interface automatically, set #7 of parameter No.4019 (if the sub spindle is set in the CNC with the spindle switching function, use parameter No.4195) to 1, assign the model code of the motor to be used to parameter No.4133 (if the sub spindle is set in the CNC with the spindle switching function, use parameter No.4309), turn off the power of the CNC and spindle amplifier, and restart the CNC and spindle amplifier. 3 Parameters No.4000 to No.4351 are used in the processing on the spindle amplifier. See FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series PARAMETER MANUAL (B–65150E) and FANUC AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT serial interface S series MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–65045E). 4 The CNC can control up to two spindle amplifier with the serial interface. Up to three spindle amplifiers can be controlled in the Series 16 performing single–path control. When the spindle control amplifier provides the spindle switching function, one spindle amplifier can control two spindle motors using the switching function. The output switching function can be used in spindle motors to be connected. Up to four spindles, or eight types, (or, for the Series 16 performing single–path control, up to six spindles, or 12 types) can be used by switching the spindle motors. (The number of spindles that can controlled simultaneously is the same as the number of spindle amplifiers, that is two spindles (or, for the Series 6 performing single–path control, three spindles).) Parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial interface correspond to the above functions as follows: (1) Parameter No.4000 to No.4351 "S1": First spindle amplifier Parameter No.4000 to No.4351 "S2": Second spindle amplifier Parameter No.4000 to No.4351 "S3": Third spindle amplifier (2) Parameter No.4000 to No.4175 "S1"/"S2"/"S3": When the spindle switching function is not provided, or for the main spindle in the spindle amplifier when the function is provided. Parameter No.4176 to No.4351 "S1"/"S2"/"S3": For the sub spindle in the spindle amplifier when the spindle switching function is provided. (3) Parameters at low speed when the output switching function is provided. Parameters No.4136 to No.4175 "S1"/"S2"/"S3": When the spindle switching function is not provided, or for the main spindle when the function is provided. Parameters No.4284 to No.4351 "S1"/"S2"/"S3": For the sub spindle when the spindle switching function is provided. 5 The CNC stores the parameters of the spindle amplifier with the serial interface. The CNC sends them to the spindle amplifier at the system power on and they are used in the unit. These parameters are sent from the CNC to the spindle amplifier in a batch when: – The CNC is switched on. – The serial spindle is restarted by a reset that is carried out after spindle communication alarm 749 occurs (because the spindle control unit is switched off or because of noise). If these parameters are rewritten, they are sent from the CNC to the spindle amplifier sequentially when: – The parameters have been entered from the MDI. – The parameters have been entered as programmable (G10). – The parameters have been entered via the reader/punch interface. To set parameters automatically, upload parameters corresponding to the motor model from the spindle amplifier to the CNC prior to the procedure specified above. The parameters of the spindle amplifier with serial interface can be changed after the system starts. Changing the parameters (No.4000 to No.4351 "S1", "S2", "S3") in the CNC sends them to the spindle amplifier at an appropriate time and the parameters in the unit are updated. Be careful not to change parameters incorrectly. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 173 4345 Serial spinsle motor detection speed [Data type] Word type [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 S1 : for First spindle / S2 : for Second spindle / S3 : for Third spindle This parameter sets the serial spindle motor speed at which the motor speed detection signal is output. The speeds of the serial spindle motors for the first, second, and third spindles are monitored, and the motor speed detection signal, indicating whether the speed of each spindle exceeds the value set in this parameter, is output to the Y address specified with parameter No.1891. NOTE 1 The motor speed detection signals are not output when the servo/spindle motor speed detection function is not used, or 0 is set for this parameter. 2 For this parameter, set a motor speed rather than a spindle speed. #7 SPK 4800 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ND2 #0 ND1 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit type ND1 In controlling the spindle synchronization, the direction of the first spindle (master spindle) motor rotation is: 0 : The direction indicated by the command sign 1 : The opposite direction to that indicated by the command sign ND2 In controlling the spindle synchronization, the direction of the 2nd spindle (slave spindle) motor rotation is: 0 : The direction indicated by the command sign 1 : The opposite direction to that indicated by the command sign SPK As the parking signals for simple spindle synchronous control: 0 : PKESS1 (first spindle) and PKESS2 (second spindle) are used. 1 : PKESS1 (first spindle) and PKESS2 (second spindle) are used. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 174 4810 Error pulse between two spindles when synchronizing phases in the serial spindle synchronization control mode [Data type] Byte type [Unit of data] Pulse [Valid data range] 0 to 255 Set the difference in error pulses between two spindles when synchronizing phases in the serial spindle synchronization control mode. When the difference in error pulse between two spindles is within the value set in this parameter, the spindle phase synchronization completion signal FSPPH becomes "1". This parameter is used to check the difference in phase in synchronization control and to confirm the completion of synchronization in the serial spindle synchronization control mode. 4811 Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the serial spindle synchronization control mode or simple synchronous control mode [Data type] Word type [Unit of data] Pulse [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the serial spindle synchronization control mode or simple synchronous control mode. NOTE This parameter is used to output the inter–spindle phase error detection signal SYCAL in the serial spindle synchronization control mode. The SYCAL signal becomes "1" when a phase error exceeding the value set in this parameter is found. When you are going to use this parameter to detect error pulses during simplified synchronization control, pay attention to the mode of the spindle, and set the parameter as required. (The parameter is invalid in spindle mode. It is valid in Cs contour control, rigid tapping, and spindle positioning mode; the detection unit per pulse differs, however.) #7 4900 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 FLR [Data type] Bit FLR When the spindle speed fluctuation detection function is used, the rates of allowance (q) and fluctuation (r) those are set in parameter No.4911 and No.4912, respectively are set in steps of: 0 : 1% 1 : 0.1% B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 175 4911 Rapid (q) of the fluction of spindle speed which is assumed to be the speci- fied spindle speed [Data type] Word type Unit of data 1% 0. 1% (T series) Data range 1 to 100 1 to 1000 NOTE Unit of data depends on parameter No.4900#0 FLR (T series only) Set the ratio (q) of the spindle speed which is assumed to be the specified spindle speed in the spindle speed fluctuation detection function. Let the commanded speed be Sc. When the actual spindle speed reaches between (Sc–Sq) and (Sc + Sq), it is assumed to be the commanded speed. The spindle speed fluctuation detection starts. where, Sq = Sc 100 q 4912 Spindle speed fluctuation ratio (r) for which no alarm is activated in the spindle speed fluctuation detection function [Data type] Word Unit of data 1% 0. 1% (T series) Data range 1 to 100 1 to 1000 NOTE Unit of data depends on parameter No.4900#0 FLR (T series only). Set the spindle speed fluctuation ratio (r) for which no alarm is activated in the spindle speed fluctuation detection function (see Fig.4.20 (e)). 4913 Spindle speed fluctuation value (d) for which no alarm is activated in the spindle speed fluctuation detection function [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the allowable fluctuation speed (Sd) for which no alarm is activated in the spindle speed fluctuation detection function. The function for detecting spindle speed fluctuation checks whether the actual speed varies for the specified speed or not. Sd or Sr, whichever is greater, is taken as the allowable fluctuation speed (Sm). An alarm is activated when the actual spindle speed varies for the commanded speed (Sc) under the condition that the variation width exceeds the allowable variation width (Sm). Sd: The allowable constant variation width which is independent of the specified spindle speed (Sd is set with parameter 4913.) [Unit of data] [Valid data range] [Unit of data] [Valid data range] 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 176 Sr: The allowable variation width which is obtained by multiplying Sc (commanded spindle speed) by r (constant ratio). (r is set with parameter 4912.) Sm: Sd or Sr, whichever is greater No check Spindle speed Specified speed Actual speed Alarm Time Check start Command another speed Check Check Sm Sm Sd Sd Fig.4.20 (e) Sd and Sm 4914 Time (p) elapsed from when the commanded spindle speed is changed to the start of spindle speed fluctuation detection [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 999999 Set the time elapsed from when the specified spindle speed is changed to the start of spindle speed fluctuation detection in the spindle speed fluctuation detection function. That is, the fluctuation in the spindle speed is not detected until the specified time elapses from when the specified spindle speed is changed. Sd Sd No check Spindle speed Specified speed Actual speed Alarm Time Check start Command another speed Check Sm Sm P Fig.4.20 (f) Sd and Sm B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 177 #7 IMB 4950 #6 ESI #5 TRV #4 #3 #2 ISZ #1 IDM #0 IOR [Data type] Bit IOR Resetting the system in the spindle positioning mode 0 : Does not releases the mode. 1 : Releases the mode IDM The positioning direction for the spindle using a M code is 0 : The positive direction 1 : The negative direction ISZ When an M code for spindle orientation is specified in spindle positioning: 0 : The spindle rotation mode is cleared and the mode is switched to the spindle positioning mode, and spindle orientation operation is performed. 1 : The spindle rotation mode is cleared and the mode is switched to the spindle positioning mode but spindle orientation operation is not performed. TRV Rotation direction of spindle positioning is set to: 0 : The positive direction 1 : The reverse direction ESI Selection of a spindle positioning specification 0 : The conventional specificaion is used. 1 : The extended specificaion is used. NOTE The extended specification includes the following two extensions: (1) With the conventional specification, the number of M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle is always 6. With the extended specification, an arbitrary number of such M codes from 1 to 256 can be selected by parameter setting (See parameter No.4964.) (2) The maximum feedrate for spindle positioning (setting of parameter No.1420) can be extended from 240000 to 269000 (in increments of 10 deg/min). IMB When the spindle positioning function is used, half–fixed angle positioning based on M codes uses: 0 : Specification A 1 : Specification B 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 178 NOTE In the case of half–fixed angle positioning based on M codes, three types of spindle positioning operations can occur: (1) The spindle rotation mode is cleared, then the mode is switched to the spindle positioning mode. (2) Spindle positioning is performed in the spindle positioning mode. (3) The spindle positioning mode is cleared, then the mode is switched to the spindle rotation mode. In the case of specifiection A: Operations (1) to (3) are specified using separate M codes. (1) Specified using M codes for performing spindle orientation. (See parameter No.4960) (2) Specified using M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle. (See parameter No.4962) (3) Specified using M codes for clearing spindle positioning operation. (See parameter No.4961.) In the case of specification B: When M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle are specified, operations (1) to (3) are performed successively. (See parameter No.4962.) 4960 M code specifying the spindle orientation [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Integer [Valid data range] 6 to 97 Set an M code to change the spindle rotating mode to the spindle positioning mode. Setting the M code performs the spindle orientation. Spindle positioning can be specified from the next block. 4961 M code releasing the spindle positioning mode [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Integer [Valid data range] 6 to 97 Set the M code to release the spindle positioning mode and to change the mode to the spindle rotating mode. 4962 M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Integer [Valid data range] 6 to 92 Two methods are availablel for specifying spindle positioning. One method uses address C for arbitrary–angle positioning. The other use an M code for half–fixed angle positioning. This parameter sets an M code for the latter method. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 179 D When bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No.4950=0 Six M code from M a to M(a+5) are used for half–fixed angle positioning, when a is the value of this parameter. D When bit 6(ESI) of parameter No.4950=1 Set the start M code in this parameter, and set the number of M codes in parameter No.4964. Then b M codes from Ma to M(a+b–1) are used for half fixed angle positioning. The table below indicates the relationship between the M codes and positioning angles. M code Positioning angle Example: Positioning angle when q = 30_ Mα θ 30° M (α+1) 2θ 60° M (α+2) 3θ 90° M (α+3) 4θ 120° M (α+4) 5θ 150° M (α+5) 6θ 180° L L L M (α+n) (n+1) θ NOTE q represents the basic angular diplacement set in pamrameter No.4963. 4963 M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] deg [Valid data range] 1 to 60 This parameter sets a basic angular displacement used for half–fixed angle positioning using M codes. 4964 Number of M codes for specifying a spindle positioning angle [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Integer [Valid data range] 0, 1 to 255 This parameter sets the number of M codes used for Half–fixed angle positioning using M codes. As many M codes as the number specified in this parameter, starting with the M code specified in parameter No.4962, are used to specify half–fixed angle positioning. Let a be the value of parameter No.4962, and let b be the value of parameter No.4964. That is, M codes from Ma to M (a+5) are used for half–fixed angle positioning. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 180 NOTE 1 This parameter is valid when bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No.4950=1. 2 Make sure that M codes from Mα to M (α+β–1) do not duplicate other M codes. 3 Setting this parameter to 0 has the same effect as setting 6. That is, M code from Mα to M (α+5) are used for half–fixed angle positioning. 4970 Servo loop gain of the spindle [Data type] Word type [Unit of data] 0.01 s–1 [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 Set the servo loop gain of the spindle in the spindle positioning mode. 4971 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 1 4972 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 2 4973 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 3 4974 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for gear 4 [Data type] Word type [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Set the servo loop gain multipliers of the spindle for gears 1 to 4. The multipliers are used to convert the amount of the position deviation to the voltage used in the velocity command. Assign the data obtained from the following equation to the parameters. Loop gain multiplier = 2048000 E A/L where; E : Voltage required to rotate the spindle motor at 1000 rpm in the velocity command L : Rotation angle of the spindle per one motor rotation (normally 360) A : Unit used for the detection (degree) Let E be 2.2 V, L be 360 degrees, and A be 0.088 degrees/pulse. Loop gain multiplier = 2048000 2.2 0.088/360 = 1101 * When the voltage specified for the spindle motor is 10 V at a spindle speed of 4500 rpm, E is regarded as 2.2 V. NOTE The above parameters No.4970 to No.4974 are for analog spindles. Example B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 181 #7 5000 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SBK [Data type] Bit type SBK In HPCC mode, an internally created block for cutter compensation: 0 : Does not cause a single block stop. 1 : Causes a single block stop. #7 5001 #6 EVO #5 TPH #4 EVR #3 TAL #2 OFH #1 TLB #0 TLC [Data type] Bit type TLC Tool length compensation 0 : Tool length compensation A or B (Conforms to TLB in parameter No.5001) 1 : Tool length compensation C TLB Tool length compensation axis 0 : Always Z axis irrespective of plane specification (Tool length compensation A) 1 : Axis perpendicular to plane specification (G17, G18, and G19) (Tool length compensation B) OFH Offset number of tool length compensation, cutter compensation and tool offset 0 : Specifies the tool length compensation using an H code, and cutter compensation C using a D code Tool offset conforms to TPH in parameter No.5001#5. 1 : Specifies the tool length compensation, cutter compensation and tool offset using H codes NOTE Be sure to set this parameter to 1 for cutter compensation B. TAL Tool length compensation C 0 : Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset 1 : Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset EVR When a tool compensation value is changed in cutter compensation C mode: 0 : Enables the change, starting from that block where the next D or H code is specified. 1 : Enables the change, starting from that block where buffering is next performed. TPH Specifies whether address D or H is used as the address of tool offset number (G45 to G48). 0 : D code 1 : H code NOTE TPH is valid when OFH in parameter No.5001#2 is 0. 4.21 PARAMETERS OF TOOL COMPENSATION 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 182 EVO Specifies whether an offset is effective in the next block to be buffered or the next block for which an H code is specified when the offset value is changed in tool length offset A or B. 0 : Next block in which an H code is specified. 1 : Next block to be buffered. #7 WNP 5002 #6 LWM #5 LGC #4 LGT #3 #2 LWT #1 LGN #0 LD1 [Data type] Bit LD1 Offset number of tool offset (Wear offset number when option of tool geometry/wear compensation is selected) 0 : Specified using the lower two digits of a T code 1 : Specified using the lower one digit of a T code LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset (When the option of tool geometry/wear compensation is selected, it is effective.) 0 : Is the same as wear offset number 1 : Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number LWT Tool wear compensation is performed by: 0 : Moving the tool. 1 : Shifting the coordinate system. (Only when the LGT parameter (bit 4 of No.5002) is set to 0) LGT Tool geometry compensation (When the option of tool geometry/wear compensation is selected, this parameter is effective. Whenever the option is not selected, compensation is made according to the tool movement. 0 : Compensated by the shift of the coordinate system (Compensation is made in the block of T code regardless of LWM at this time.) 1 : Compensated by the tool movement LGC Tool geometry compensation (It is effective when the option of tool geometry / wear compensation is selected and LGT = 0. When LGT is 1, it is always canceled.) 0 : Not canceled by offset number 0 1 : Canceled by offset number 0 LWM Tooloffset(Wearcompensationwhenoptionoftoolgeometry/wearoffset is selected, or geometry and wear compensation when LGT = 1.) 0 : is done in the T code block 1 : is done together with the axis movement NOTE When the option of tool geometry/wear compensation is equipped and LGT = 0, the offset is done in a T code block regardless of this parameter. WNP Imaginary tool tip direction used for tool nose radius compensation, when the geometry/wear compensation option is equipped, is the direction specified by: 0 : Geometry offset number 1 : Wear offset number B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 183 #7 TGC 5003 #6 LVC LVK #5 #4 BCK #3 ICK #2 CCN CCN #1 SUV #0 SUP [Data type] Bit SUP Start up or cancel in cutter compensation C 0 : Type A 1 : Type B SUV When G40, G41, and G42 are specified independently, 0 : The start up and cancel operation conforms to the standard specification. 1 : Moves by a distance corresponding to the offset vector which is vertical to the next block movement. CCN When automatic reference position return (G28) is specified in the cutter compensation C mode (M series) or in tool nose radius compensation (T series): 0 : The tool nose radius compensation vector is cancelled in movement to an intermediate position. 1 : The tool nose radius compensation vector is not cancelled in movement to an intermediate position, but is cancelled in movement to the reference position. ICK In HPCC mode, a cutter compensation interference check is: 0 : Done 1 : Not done BCK In HPCC mode, when a cutter compensation interference check determines that the programmed move direction differs from the offset move direction by between 90 and 270 degrees: 0 : An alarm is issued. 1 : No alarm is issued. LVC Offset value of tool offset 0 : Not cleared, but held by reset 1 : Cleared by reset LVK Tool length offset value 0 : Cleared by reset 1 : Not cleared, but held by reset TGC Tool geometry compensation value 0 : Not canceled by reset 1 : Canceled by reset (Valid when LVC, #6 of parameter No.5003, is "1") 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 184 #7 Y03 5004 #6 #5 #4 #3 TS1 #2 ODI #1 ORC #0 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit type ORC Tool offset value 0 : Set by the diameter specification (Can be set in only the axis under diameter programming) 1 : Set by the radius specification ODI A cutter compensation amount is set using: 0 : A radius. 1 : A diameter. TS1 When the tool offset measurement value direct input B function is used, touch sensor contact detection is based on: 0 : Four–contact input. 1 : One–contact input. Y03 Y axis offset is : 0 : Used for 4th axis. 1 : Used for 3rd axis. #7 5005 #6 TLE #5 QNI #4 #3 #2 PRC #1 #0 CNI CNI On the offset screen, Y–axis offset screen, and macro screen, the [INP.C] soft key is: 0: Used. 1: Not used. (The [INP.C] soft key is not displayed.) PRC Direct input of tool offset value and workpiece coordinate-system shift value 0 : Not use a PRC signal 1 : Uses a PRC signal QNI In the function of input of offset value measured B 0 : Not automatically select the tool offset number 1 : Automatically selects a tool offset number TLE When the tool offset measurement value direct input B function is used, a tool offset value, set by the offset write signal, is: 0 : Always received in offset write mode. 1 : Received only in offset write mode and during movement along an axis (where "during movement along an axis" means that the positional deviation value is other than 0). B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 185 #7 5006 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 TGC #0 OIM OIM [Data type] Bit OIM When the unit is switched between the inch and metric systems, automatic tool offset value conversion is: 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed TGC When a T code is specified in a block containing G50, G04, or G10: 0 : No alarm occurs. 1 : P/S alarm No.245 occurs. #7 5008 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 G39 #1 CNC CNC #0 CNI CNI [Data type] Bit CNI Interference check for cutter compensation C (M series) or tool–tip radius compensation (T series) is: 0 : Performed 1 : Not performed CNC During interference check for cutter compensation C (M series) or tool–tip radius compensation (T series), when the direction of movement after application of the offset differs from the programmed direction by between 90_ and 270_: 0 : An alarm is issued. 1 : No alarm is issued. G39 The corner rounding function (G39) in cutter compensation C mode is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 5010 Limit value that ignores the vector when a tool moves on the outside of a corner during cutter compensation C Limitvaluethatignoresthevectorwhenatoolmovesontheoutsideofacornerduring tool nose radius compensation [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 16383 This parameter sets the limit value that ignores a slight movement occurring when a tool moves on the outside of the corner during cutter compensation C. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 186 Very small amount of travel to be ignored Programmed path Actual tool path Very small amount of travel to be ignored 5011 Denominator constant for finding a three–dimensional tool compennsation vector [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 This parameter sets the value of p in the expressions used for finding a three–dimensional tool compensation vector: Vx = i r/p Vy = j r/p Vz = k r/p where, Vx, Vy, Vz : Components of a three–dimensional tool compensation vector along the X–axis, Y–axis, and Z–axis, or their parallel axes i, j, k : Values specified in addresses I, J, and K in the program r : Compensation value p : Value set in this parameter When 0 is set in this parameter, the following is assumed: p + i2 ) J2 ) K2 ? B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 187 5013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Units Millimeter input 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] Increment system IS–B IS–C Millimeter input 0 to 999999 0 to 9999999 Inch input 0 to 999999 0 to 9999999 This parameter sets the maximum allowable tool wear compensation value. If an attempt is made to set a tool wear compensation value, the absolute value of which exceeds the value set in this parameter, the following alarm or warning is output: Input from MDI Warning: Too many digits Input by G10 P/S alarm No.032: Offset value is out of range by G10. 5014 Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear compensation [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Units Millimeter input 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] Increment system IS–B IS–C Millimeter input 0 to 999999 0 to 9999999 Inch input 0 to 999999 0 to 9999999 Set the maximum allowable value for the tool wear compensation value, input as an incremental value. If the incremental input value (absolute value) exceeds the set value, the following alarm or warning message is output: Input from MDI Warning: Setting value out of range. Input using G10 P/S alarm No.032: Offset value is out of range by G10. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 188 5015 Distance (XP) betweeen reference position and X axis + contact surface 5016 Distance (XM) betweeen reference position and X axis – contact surface 5017 Distance (ZP) betweeen reference position and Z axis + contact surface 5018 Distance (ZM) betweeen reference position and Z axis – contact surface [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 These parameters are related to the function of input of tool offset value measured B. They set the distance (with sign) between the measurement reference position and sensor contact surface. For an axis under diameter programming, set it by a diameter value. Xm Xp Z–axis +contact face Z–axis –contact face X–axis –contact face X–axis +contact face Zm Zp +Z +X mesurement reference position Fig.4.21 Distance along X and Z Axes from the Reference Position to +/– Contact Surfaces NOTE When the tool setter function for 1–turret, 2–spindle lathes is used with two touch sensors, set the distance of touch sensor 1. For touch sensor 2, set parameter No.5056 through No.5059. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 189 5020 Tool offset number used for the input of tool offset value measured B [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to the number of tools to be compensated. Set tool offset number used for the input of tool offset value measured B function (i.e. when workpiece coordinate system shift value is set). (The tool offset number corresponding to the measured tool shall be set in advance.) This parameter is valid when the tool offset number is not selected automatically (QNI, #5 of parameter 5005, is zero). 5021 Number of pulse interpolation cycles memorized prior to contacting the touch sensor [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Interpolation cycle [Valid data range] 0 to 8 This parameter sets the number of pulse interpolation cycles to be memorized until the operator manually touches the tool with a one–contact input touch sensor when the tool offset measurement value direct input B function is used. If 0 is set for this parameter, the specification of 8 (maximum allowable value) is assumed. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the TS1 parameter (bit 3 of parameter No.5004) is set to 1. 5030 Minimum grinding wheel diameter in minimum grinding wheel diameter check [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Input in inches 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] Increment system IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millimeter input –999999 to 999999 –9999999 to 9999999 Input in inches –999999 to 999999 –9999999 to 9999999 If the compensation value corresponding to an offset number specified by an H code is smaller than the minimum grinding wheel diameter specified in this parameter during compensation with G43 or G44, the signal F0065#3 GWLF is output to the PMC. NOTE This is a parameter for cylindrical grinding machines. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 190 #7 5051 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 WNI #0 DSN [Data type] Bit DSN When the tool setter function for 1–turret, 2–spindle lathes is used: 0 : One touch sensor is used for both main spindle 1 and main spindle 2. 1 : Two touch sensors are used for both main spindle 1 and main spindle 2. WNI When a workpiece reference point offset value is set in workpiece coordinate system memory with the tool setter function for 1–turret, 2–spindle lathes: 0 : The value is set at the current cursor position. 1 : A memory is automatically selected. (The workpiece coordinate system memory set in parameter No.5054 or No.5055 is selected.) 5053 Bias for tool offset numbers for measured tool offset value setting [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 1 to maximum tool offset count When the tool setter function for 1–turret, 2–spindle lathes is used, this parameter allocates tool offset numbers for measured tool offset measurement values to spindle 1 and spindle 2. Example: When the tool offset count is 16 pairs Tool offset number When setting = 8 When setting = 10 Spindle 1 1 to 8 1 to 10 Spindle 2 9 to 16 11 ro 16 If 0 is set for this parameter, or if the maximum tool offset count is exceeded, the following is assumed: Tool offset number 16 pairs 32 pairs 64 pairs 99 pairs Spindle 1 1 to 8 1 to 16 1 to 32 1 to 49 Spindle 2 9 to 16 17 to 32 33 to 64 50 to 98 5054 Workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 1 5055 Workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 2 [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 54 to 59 When the WNI parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5051) is set to 1 specify, in each of these parameters, a workpiece coordinate system from G54 to G59 for workpiece reference point offset value setting. NOTE If the value set in this parameter is 0, or if the value falls outside the valid data range, 54 is assumed for the workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 1, while 57 is assumed for the workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 2. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 191 5056 X–axis + (distance to contact surface) on the touch sensor 2 side (XP) 5057 X–axis – (distance to contact surface) on the touch sensor 2 side (XM) 5058 Z–axis + (distance to contact surface) on the touch sensor 2 side (ZP) 5059 Z–axis – (distance to contact surface) on the touch sensor 2 side (ZM) [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Units Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 When two touch sensors are used with the tool setter function for 1–turret, 2–spindle lathes, each parameter sets the distance (with a sign) between the measurement reference position on touch sensor 2 and each sensor contact surface. For an axis subject to diameter specification, specify a diameter. X–axis – (contact surface) ± Touch sensor 1 Z–axis – (contact surface) ° X–axis + (contact surface) Measurement reference position ? Z–axis + (contact surface) Xp1 Xm1 Zm1 Zp1 +X +Z Xp2 Xm2 Zm2 Zp2 Touch sensor 2 ? ° Touch sensor 1 side Touch sensor 2 side Xp1: Parameter No.5015 Xp2: Parameter No.5056 Xm1: Parameter No.5016 Xm2: Parameter No.5057 Zp1: Parameter No.5017 Zp2: Parameter No.5058 Zm1: Parameter No.5018 Zm2: Parameter No.5059 X–axis – (contact surface ± ? Z–axis + (contact surface) ? Z–axis – (contact surface) X–axis + (contact surface) NOTE These parameters are enabled when the DSN parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.5051) is set to 1. Set the data for touch sensor 1 in parameter No.5015 through No.5018. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 192 5071 Number of first axis for grinding–wheel wear compensation 5072 Number of second axis for grinding–wheel wear compensation [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to the number of controlled axes These parameters specify the controlled axis numbers of the first and second axes for which grinding–wheel wear compensation is applied. 5081 Coordinate of first compensation center along first axis on compensation plane 5082 Coordinate of first compensation center along second axis on compensation plane 5083 Coordinate of second compensation center along first axis on compensation plane 5084 Coordinateofsecondcompensationcenteralongsecondaxisoncompensationplane 5085 Coordinate of third compensation center along first axis on compensation plane 5086 Coordinate of third compensation center along second axis on compensation plane [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 These parameters specify the coordinates (in the workpiece coordinate system) of the compensation center for grinding–wheel wear compensation. 4.22 PARAMETERS OF GRINDING–WHEEL WEAR COMPENSATION B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 193 #7 5101 M5B #6 M5T M5T #5 RD2 #4 RD1 #3 ILV #2 RTR #1 EXC #0 FXY FXY [Data type] Bit FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle is: 0 : Always the Z–axis 1 : The axis selected by the program NOTE In the case of the T system, this parameter is valid only for the drilling canned cycle in the Series 15 format. EXC G81 0 : Specifies a drilling canned cycle 1 : Specifies an external operation command RTR G83 and G87 0 : Specify a high–speed peck drilling cycle 1 : Specify a peck drilling cycle ILV Initial point position in drilling canned cycle 0 : Not updated by reset 1 : Updated by reset RD2, RD1 Set the axis and direction in which the tool in drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 is got free. RD2 and RD1 are set as shown below by plane selection. RD2 RD1 G17 G18 G19 0 0 +X +Z +Y 0 1 –X –Z –Y 1 0 +Y +X +Z 1 1 –Y –X –Z M5T When a spindle rotates from the forward to the reverse direction and vice versa in tapping cycles G84 and G74 for M series (G84 and G88 for T series), befor M04 or M03 is output: For T series 0 : Not output M05 1 : Outputs M05 For M series 0 : Outputs M05 1 : Not output M05 M5B In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87: 0 : Outputs M05 before an oriented spindle stops 1 : Not output M05 before an oriented spindle stops 4.23 PARAMETERS OF CANNED CYCLES 4.23.1 Parameter of canned Cycle for Drilling 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 194 #7 RDI 5102 #6 RAB #5 #4 K0E #3 F16 #2 QSR #1 MRC #0 [Data type] Bit MRC When a target figure other than a monotonically increasing or monotonically decreasing figure is specified in a multiple repetitive turning canned cycle (G71, G72): 0 : No alarm occurs. 1 : P/S alarm No.064 is occurs. NOTE This parameter is valid for multiple repetitive turning canned cycle type I. QSR Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G73) is started, a check to see if the program contains a block that has the sequence number specified in address Q is: 0 : Not made. 1 : Made. (If the sequence number specified in address Q cannot be found, an alarm occurs and the canned cycle is not executed.) F16 When the Series 15 format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.0001 set to 1), a canned drilling cycle is specified using : 0 : Series 15 format 1 : Series 16 format. (However, the number of repetitions is specified using address L.) K0E When K0 is specified in a hole machining canned cycle (G80 to G89): 0 : Hole machining is performed once. 1 : Hole machining is not performed. Instead, the hole machining data is merely memorized. RAB The R command for the drilling canned cycle in the Series 15 format is: 0 : Regarded as an incremental command 1 : Regarded as: An absolute command in the case of G code system A An absolute command in the case of G code system B or C when the G90 mode is specified. An incremental command in the case of G code system B or C when the G91 mode is specified. RDI The R command for the drilling canned cycle in the Series 15 format: 0 : Is regarded as the specification of a radius 1 : Follows the specification of a diameter/radius for the drilling axis #7 5103 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 P15 #1 QZA #0 SIJ [Data type] Bit SIJ A tool shift value for the drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 is specified by: 0 : Address Q 1 : Address I, J, or K B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 195 QZA When the specification of the depth of cut (Q) for each time is omitted, or if Q0 is specified in a high–speed peck drilling canned cycle (G73) or peck drilling canned cycle (G83): 0 : No alarm is issued. 1 : An alarm (No.045) is issued. P15 When the FS15 command format is used, the machining sequence for pocketing using multiple repetitive canned cycle G71 or G72 follows: 0 : FS16 specification 1 : FS15 specification 5110 C–axis clamp M code in drilling canned cycle [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 99 This parameter sets the C–axis clamp M code in a drilling canned cycle. 5111 Dwell time when C–axis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the dwell time when C–axis unclamping is specified in a drilling canned cycle. 5112 Spindle forward–rotation M code in drilling canned cycle [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter sets the spindle forward–rotation M code in a drilling canned cycle. NOTE M03 is output when "0" is set. 5113 Spindle reverse–rotation M code in drilling canned cycle [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter sets the spindle reverse–rotation M code in a drilling canned cycle. NOTE M04 is output when "0" is set. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 196 5114 Return or clearance value of drilling canned cycle G83 Return value of high–speed peck drilling cycle G73 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 For 16–MC, this parameter sets the return value in high–speed peck drilling cycle G73 (G83 for 16–TC). q : Depth of cut d : Return value R point Z point q q q d d G73 for M series Fig.4.23.1 (a) High–speed Peck Drilling Cycle G73 For 16–TC, this parameter sets the return or clearance value in drilling canned cycle G83. Parameter No.5101 #2 RTR=0 (Peck drilling cycle) Parameter No.5101 #2 RTR=0 (High speed peck drilling cycle) q : Depth of cut d : Return value R point Z point q q q d d q : Depth of cut d : Clearance value R point Z point q q q d d G83 for T series Fig.4.23.1 (b) Drilling Canned Cycle G83 B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 197 5115 Clearance of canned cycle G83 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the clearance of peck drilling cycle G83. G83 for 16–MC q : Depth of cut d : Clearance value R point Z point q q q d d Fig.4.23.1 (c) Peck drilling cycle G83 5130 Chamfering distance in the thread cutting cycles G76 and G92 [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 0.1 pitch [Valid data range] 0 to 127 This parameter sets the chamfering in the thread cutting cycles G76 and G92. 5132 Depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72 [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit Millimeter input 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72. 4.23.2 Parameter of Thread Cutting Cycle 4.23.3 Parameter of Multiple Repetitive Canned Cycle 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 198 5133 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit Millimeter input 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G71 and G72. 5135 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in X–axis direction 5136 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 in Z–axis direction [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit Input in mm 0.001 0.001 mm Input in inches 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 of an X, then Z axis. 5137 Division count in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Cycle [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter sets the division count in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73. 5139 Return in multiple canned cycles G74 and G75 [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS-B IS-C Unit Metric input 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74 and G75. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 199 5140 Minimium depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Metric input 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76. 5141 Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Metric input 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter sets the finishing allowance in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76. 5142 Repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Cycle [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter sets the repetition count in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76. 5143 Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76 [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Degree [Valid data range] When FS15 format is used: 0 to 120 When FS15 format is not used: 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80 This parameter sets the tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 200 #7 5160 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 NOL #1 OLS #0 [Data type] Bit OLS When an overload torque signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feed and spindle speed are 0 : Not changed. 1 : Changed. NOL When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no overload torque signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feed and spindle speed are: 0 : Not changed. 1 : Changed. 5163 M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter sets an M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter. 5164 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed when the tool is retracted after an overload torque signal is received [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 255 This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed when the tool is retracted because the overload torque signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter. S2 = S1 d1 B 100 S1: Spindle speed to be chaged S2: Spindle speed changed d1 is set as a percentage. 5165 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed when the tool is retracted with- out an overload torque signal received [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 255 This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed when the tool is retracted without the overload torque signal received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter. S2 = S1 d2 B 100 S1: Spindle speed to be chaged S2: Spindle speed changed d2 is set as a percentage. 4.23.4 Parameters of Peck Drilling Cycle of a Small Diameter B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 201 5166 Percentage of cutting feedrate to be changed when the tool is retracted after an overload torque signal is received [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 255 This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed when the tool is retracted because the overload torque signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter. F2 = F1 b1 B 100 F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed F2: Changed cutting feedrate b1 is set as a percentage. 5167 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed when the tool is retracted without an overload torque signal received [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 255 This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate tot be changed when the tool is retracted without the overload torque signal received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter. F2 = F1 b2 B 100 F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed F2: Changed cutting feedrate b2 is set as a percentage. 5168 Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter sets the lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate changed repeatedly in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter to the specified cutting feedrate. FL = F b3 B 100 F: Specified cutting feedrate FL:Changed cutting feedrate Set b3 as a percentage. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 202 5170 Number of the macro variable to which the total number of retractions during cutting is output [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 100 to 149 This parameter sets the number of the macro variable to which the total number of times the tool is retracted during cutting in a peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter is output. NOTE The total number cannot be output to common variables 500 to 531. 5171 Number of the macro variable to which the total umber of retractions because of an overload signal is output [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 100 to 149 This parameter sets the common variable number of the custom macro to which the number of times the tool is retracted after the overload signal is received during cutting in a peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter is output. NOTE The total number cannot be output to common variables 500 to 531. 5172 Speed of retraction to point R when no address I is issued [Data type] Word [Unit of data] mm/min [Valid data range] 0 to 400 This parameter sets the speed of retraction to point R when no address I is issued in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter. 5173 Speed of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a hole when no address I is issued [Data type] Word [Unit of data] mm/min [Valid data range] 0 to 400 This parameter sets the speed of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a previously machined hole when no address I is issued in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 203 5174 Clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Linear axis (millimeter input) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Linear axis (inch input) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 204 #7 SRS 5200 #6 FHD FHD #5 PCP #4 DOV DOV #3 SIG SIG #2 CRG CRG #1 VGR VGR #0 G84 G84 [Data type] Bit G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping 0 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to the issue of the G84 (or G74) command. (See parameter No.5210). 1 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is not used. (G84 cannot be used as a G code for the tapping cycle; G74 cannot be used for the reverse tapping cycle.) VGR Any gear ratio between spindle and position coder in rigid tapping 0 : Not used (The gear ratio is set in parameter No.3706.) 1 : Used (The gear ratio is set by parameters Nos. 5221 through 5224 and 5231 through 5234.) NOTE For serial spindles, set this parameter to 0 when using the DMR function for position coder signals on the spindle side. CRG Rigid mode when a rigid mode cancel command is specified (G80, G01 group G code, reset, etc.) 0 : Canceled after rigid tapping signal RGTAP is set to "0". 1 : Canceled before rigid tapping signal RGTAP is set to "0". SIG When gears are changed for rigid tapping, the use of SIND is 0 : Not permitted. 1 : Permitted. DOV Override during extraction in rigid tapping 0 : Invalidated 1 : Validated (The override value is set in parameter No.5211.) PCP Rigid tapping 0 : Used as a high–speed peck tapping cycle 1 : Not used as a high–speed peck tapping cycle FHD Feed hold and single block in rigid tapping 0 : Invalidated 1 : Validated SRS To select a spindle used for rigid tapping in multi–spindle control: 0 : The spindle selection signals SWS1 and SWS2 (bits 0 and 1 of G027) are used. (These signals are used also for multi–spindle control.) 1 : The rigid tapping spindle selection signals RGTSP1 and RGTSP2 (bits 4 and 5 of G061) are used. (These signals are provided expressly for rigid tapping.) 4.24 PARAMETERS OF RIGID TAPPING B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 205 #7 5201 #6 #5 #4 OV3 OV3 #3 OVU OVU #2 TDR TDR #1 #0 NIZ [Data type] Bit NIZ Smoothing in rigid tapping is: 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. TDR Cutting time constant in rigid tapping 0 : Uses a same parameter during cutting and extraction (Parameter Nos. 5261 through 5264) 1 : Not use a same parameter during cutting and extraction Parameter Nos. 5261 to 5264: Time constant during cutting Parameter Nos. 5271 to 5274: Time constant during extraction OVU The increment unit of the override parameter (No.5211) for tool rigid tapping extraction is: 0 : 1% 1 : 10% OV3 The spindle speed for tool extraction is specified by program. Overriding based on this spindle speed is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. #7 5202 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ORI NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit ORI When rigid tapping is started: 0 : Spindle orientation is not performed. 1 : Spindle orientation is performed. NOTE This parameter can be used only for a serial spindle. #7 5203 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 HRM #0 HRG HRG Rigid tapping by the manual handle is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. HRM When the tapping axis moves in the negative direction during rigid tapping controlled by the manual handle, the direction in which the spindle rotates is determined as follows: 0 : In G84 mode, the spindle rotates in a normal direction. In G74 mode, the spindle rotates in reverse. 1 : In G84 mode, the spindle rotates in reverse. In G74 mode, the spindle rotates in a normal direction. NOTE 1 When switching between the rigid tapping parameters on a spindle–by–spindle basis in rigid tapping using the second and third serial spindles, set this parameter to 1. The following parameters are supported for each spindle: 2 For rigid tapping using the second and third serial spindles, the multispindle control option is required. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 206 #7 5204 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 SPR #0 DGN NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit DGN On the diagnosis screen: 0 : A rigid tapping synchronization error is displayed. (Nos. 455 to 457) 1 : An error difference between the spindle and tapping axis is displayed. (Nos. 452 and 453) SPR In rigid tapping, the parameters are: 0 : Not changed on a spindle–by–spindle basis. 1 : Changed on a spindle–by–spindle basis. First spindle (4–stage gear) Second spindle (2–stage gear) Third spindle (2–stage gear) No.5214 No.5215 No.5216 No.5221 to No.5224 No.5225, No.5226 No.5227, No.5228 No.5231 to No.5234 No.5235, No.5236 No.5237, No.5238 No.5241 to No.5244 No.5245, No.5246 No.5247, No.5248 No.5261 to No.5264 No.5265, No.5266 No.5267, No.5268 No.5271 to No.5274 No.5335, No.5336 No.5337, No.5338 No.5280 No.5341 No.5344 No.5281 to No.5284 No.5242, No.5243 No.5345, No.5346 No.5300, No.5301 No.5302, No.5303 No.5304, No.5305 No.5310 to No.5314 No.5350 to No.5353 No.5354 to No.5357 No.5321 to No.5324 No.5325, No.5326 No.5327, No5328 5210 Rigid tapping mode specification M code [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter sets an M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode. To set an M code larger than 255, set it to parameter No.5212. NOTE 1 The M code is judged to be 29 (M29) when "0" is set. 2 To use an M code whose number is greater than 255, Specify the code number with parameter No.5212. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 207 5211 Override value during rigid tapping extraction [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 1 % or 10 % [Valid data range] 0 to 200 The parameter sets the override value during rigid tapping extraction. NOTE The override value is valid when DOV in parameter No.5200 #4 is "1". When OVU (bit 3 of parameter No.5201) is 1, the unit of set data is 10%. An override of up to 200% can be applied to extraction. 5212 M code that specifies a rigid tapping mode [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Integer [Valid data range] 0 to 65535 This parameter sets the M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode. The M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode is usually set by parameter 5210. To use an M code whose number is greater than 255, specify the code number with parameter 5212. NOTE If the setting of this parameter is 0, the M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is determined by the setting of parameter 5210. Otherwise, it is determined by the setting of parameter 5212. The setting of parameter 5212 must always be within the above valid range. 5213 Return or clearance in peck tapping cycle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Input in incluse 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the return or clearance in the peck tapping cycle. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 208 Parameter No.5200 PCP=1 (Peck drilling cycle) Parameter No.5200 PCP=0 (High–speed peck drilling cycle) q : Depth of cut d : Return value R point Z point q q q d d q : Depth of cut d : Clearance value R point Z point q q q d d Fig.4.24 (a) High–speed Peck Drilling and Peck Drilling Cycles 5214 Setting of an allowable rigid tapping synchronization error range 5215 Setting of an allowable rigid tapping synchronization error range for the second spindle 5126 Setting of an allowable rigid tapping synchronization error range for the third spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Each of these parameters is used to set an allowable synchronization error range between a spindle used for rigid tapping and the tapping axis. If the value set with each parameter is exceeded, servo alarm No.411 (excessive error during movement) for the tapping axis is issued. When 0 is set, a synchronization error check is not made. NOTE When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the setting of parameter No.5214 is applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameter No.5215 and No.5216 are applied to the second and third spindles, respectively. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 209 5221 Number of spindle gear teeth (first–stage gear) 5222 Number of spindle gear teeth (second–stage gear) 5223 Number of spindle gear teeth (third–stage gear) 5224 Number of spindle gear teeth (fourth–stage gear) 5225 Number of second spindle gear teeth (first–stage gear) 5226 Number of second spindle gear teeth (second–stage gear) 5227 Number of third spindle gear teeth (first–stage gear) 5228 Number of third spindle gear teeth (second–stage gear) [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 When an arbitrary gear ratio is used in rigid tapping, each of these parameters sets the number of teeth of each spindle gear. NOTE 1 These parameters are enabled when the VGR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5200) is set to 1. 2 When a position coder is attached to the spindle, set the same value for all of parameters No.5221 through No.5224. 3 When the DMR function of the position coder signal is used with a serial spindle, set the VGR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5200) to 0, and set these parameters to 0. 4 When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the settings of parameters No.5221 and No.5222 are applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5225 and No.5226 are applied to the second spindle, while the settings of parameters No.5227 and No.5228 are applied to the third spindle. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 210 5231 Number of position coder gear teeth (first–stage gear) 5232 Number of position coder gear teeth (second–stage gear) 5233 Number of position coder gear teeth (third–stage gear) 5234 Number of position coder gear teeth (fourth–stage gear) 5235 Number of position coder gear teeth for the second spindle (first–stage gear) 5236 Number of position coder gear teeth for the second spindle (second–stage gear) 5237 Number of position coder gear teeth for the third spindle (first–stage gear) 5238 Number of position coder gear teeth for the third spindle (second–stage gear) [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 When an arbitrary gear ratio is used in rigid tapping, each of these parameters sets the number of teeth of each position coder gear. NOTE 1 These parameters are enabled when the VGR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5200) is set to 1. When a position coder is attached to the spindle, set the same value for all of parameters No.5231 through No.5234. When a spindle motor with a built–in position coder is used, a position coder with a resolution of 2048 pulses/rev may be used. In such a case, set the actual number of teeth, multiplied by 2 (for conversion to 4096 pulses/rev). 2 When the DMR function of the position coder signal is used with a serial spindle, set the VGR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5200) to 0, and set these parameters to 0. 3 When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the settings of parameters No.5231 and No.5232 are applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5235 and No.5236 are applied to the second spindle, while the settings of parameters No.5237 and No.5238 are applied to the third spindle. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 211 5241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (first–stage gear) 5242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (second–stage gear) 5243 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (third–stage gear) 5244 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (fourth–stage gear) 5245 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping using the second spindle (first–stage gear) 5246 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping using the second spindle (second–stage gear) 5247 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping using the third spindle (first–stage gear) 5248 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping using the third spindle (second–stage gear) [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] Spindle position coder gear ratio 1:1 0 to 7400 1:2 0 to 9999 1:4 0 to 9999 1:8 0 to 9999 Each of these parameters is used to set a maximum spindle speed for each gear in rigid tapping. NOTE 1 For the M series, set the same value for both parameter No.5241 and parameter No.5243 for a one–stage gear system. For a two–stage gear system, set the same value for parameter No.5242 and parameter No.5243. Otherwise, P/S alarm No.200 will be issued. 2 When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the settings of parameters No.5241 and No.5242 are applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5245 and No.5246 are applied to the second spindle, while the settings of parameters No.5247 and No.5248 are applied to the third spindle. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 212 5261 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and tapping axis (first–stage gear) 5262 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and tapping axis (second–stage gear) 5263 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and tapping axis (third–stage gear) 5264 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and tapping axis (fourth–stage gear) 5265 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the second spindle and tap- ping axis (first–stage gear) 5266 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the second spindle and tap- ping axis (second–stage gear) 5267 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the third spindle and tapping axis (first–stage gear) 5268 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the third spindle and tapping axis (second–stage gear) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Each of these parameters is used to set a linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle of each gear and the tapping axis in rigid tapping. Set the period required to reach each maximum spindle speed (parameters No.5241 through No.5248). The set time constant, multiplied by the ratio of a specified S value to a maximum spindle speed, is actually used as a time constant. NOTE When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the settings of parameters No.5261 and No.5262 are applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5265 and No.5266 are applied to the second spindle, while the settings of parameters No.5267 and No.5268 are applied to the third spindle. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 213 5271 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation (first–stage gear) 5272 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation (second–stage gear) 5273 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation (third–stage gear) 5274 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation (fourth–stage gear) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Each of these parameters is used to set a linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle of each gear and tapping axis in extraction operation during rigid tapping. NOTE 1 These parameters are enabled when the TDR parameter (bit 2 of parameter No.5201) is set to 1. 2 When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the settings of parameters No.5271 and No.5272 are applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5335 and No.5336 are applied to the second spindle, while the settings of parameters No.5337 and No.5338 are applied to the third spindle. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 214 5280 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (common to all gears) 5281 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (first–stage gear) 5282 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (second–stage gear) 5283 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (third–stage gear) 5284 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (fourth–stage gear) NOTE Once these parameters have been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the settings to become effective. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 0.01 s–1 [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 Each of these parameters is used to set a position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping. These parameters significantly affect the precision of threading. Optimize these parameters as well as the loop gain multipliers by conducting a cutting test. NOTE 1 To use a varied loop gain on a gear–by–gear basis, set parameter No.5280 to 0, and set a loop gain for each gear in parameters No.5281 through No.5284. The specification of a loop gain on a gear–by–gear basis is disabled if parameter No.5280 is set to a value other than 0. In such a case, the value set in parameter No.5280 is used as a loop gain that is common to all the gears. 2 When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the setting of parameter No.5280 or the settings of parameters No.5281 and No.5282 are applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5341 through No.5343 are applied to the second spindle, while the settings of parameters No.5344 through No.5346 are applied to the third spindle. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 215 5291 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 1) 5292 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 2) 5293 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 3) 5294 Spindle loop gain multioplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear4) [Data type] Word type [Unit of data] [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the spindle loop gain multipliers for gears 1 to 4 in the rigid tapping mode. The thread precision depends on the multipliers. Find the most appropriate multipliers by conducting the cutting test and assign them to the parameters. NOTE These parameters are used for analog spindles. Loop gain multiplier = 2048 E/L α 1000 where; E : Voltage in the velocity command at 1000 rpm L : Rotation angle of the spindle per one rotation of the spindle motor α : Unit used for the detection Spindle Motor Spindle Position coder 1 : 1 : 2 P.C When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are connected as shown left, let the variables be as follows: E = 1.667 (V) (A motor speed of 6000 rpm corresponds to 10 V.) L = 360_ (One rotation of the spindle corresponds to one rotation of the spindle motor.) α = La/4096 = 720_/4096 = 0.17578 La = 720_ (= 360_ 2. One rotation of the position coder corresponds to two rotations of the spindle.) 4096 = The number of detected pulses per rotation of the position coder Gear ratio between the spindle and the position coder 1:1 0.08789 degrees 1:2 0.17578 degrees 1:4 0.35156 degrees 1:8 0.70313 degrees According to above ratio the loop gain multiplier is calculated as 2048 1.667/360 0.17578 1000 = 1667 * When the position coder which is built in a spindle motor sends 512 pulses per rotation, the unit used for the detection, α, is La/2048. Fig.4.24 (b) Connection among the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder Examples 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 216 5300 Tapping axis in–position width in rigid tapping 5301 Spindle in–position width in rigid tapping [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 These parameters are used to set tapping axis and spindle in–position widths in rigid tapping. NOTE 1 If an excessively large value is specified, the threading precision will deteriorate. 2 When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the settings of parameter No.5300 and No.5301 are applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5302 and No.5303 are applied to the second spindle, while the settings of parameters No.5304 and No.5305 are applied to the third spindle. 5302 Tapping axis in–position width in rigid tapping using the second spindle 5303 Spindle in–position width in rigid tapping using the second spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 These parameters are used to set spindle and tapping axis in–position widths in rigid tapping using the second spindle. NOTE These parameters are enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 217 5304 Tapping axis in–position width in rigid tapping using the third spindle 5305 Spindle in–position width in rigid tapping using the third spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 These parameters are used to set spindle and tapping axis in–position widths in rigid tapping using the third spindle. NOTE These parameters are enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. 5310 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping. A value that falls outside the valid data range, described above, can be specified in parameter No.5314. NOTE 1 When a high–resolution detector is used, the unit must be multiplied by 10. 2 When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the setting of parameter No.5310 (or No.5314) is applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5350 and No.5354 are applied to the second spindle and third spindle, respectively. 5311 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping. [Data type] Word type [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter sets the limit value of a spindle positioning deviation during movement in rigidtapping. Limit value = S 360 100 1.5 / (60 G α) where S : Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (Setting value of parameter Nos. 5241 and greater) G : Loop gain of rigid tapping axis (Setting value of parameter Nos. 5280 and greater) α : Detection unit 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 218 Spindle Motor Spindle Position coder 1 : 1 : 2 P.C S = 3600 G = 3000 L = 360 degrees (One spindle rotation per spindle motor rotation) α = La/4096 = 720 degrees/4096 = 0.17578 degrees La = 720 degrees (One position coder rotation requires two spindle rotations (= 360 degrees 2)). 4096 = Detection pulse per position coder rotation Setting value = = 6144 3600 360 100 1.5 60 3000 0.17578 Fig.4.24 (c) Connection Among Spindle Motor, Spindle and Position Coder NOTE 1 The detection unit is α = La/2048 when the position coder built–in spindle motor uses a position coder of 512 pulses per revolution. 2 When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the setting of parameter No.5311 is applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5351 and No.5355 are applied to the second spindle and third spindle, respectively. 5312 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping. NOTE When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the setting of parameter No.5312 is applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5352 and No.5356 are applied to the second spindle and third spindle, respectively. (Calculation example) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 219 5313 Positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is stopped in rigid tapping [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is stopped in rigid tapping. NOTE When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the setting of parameter No.5313 is applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5353 and No.5357 are applied to the second spindle and third spindle, respectively. 5314 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Usually, parameter No.5310 is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping. However, parameter No.5314 can be used to set a value greater than the valid data range of parameter No.5310 because of the resolution of the detector being used. NOTE 1 When parameter No.5314 is set to 0, the setting of parameter No.5310 is used. When parameter No.5314 is set to a value other than 0, parameter No.5310 is disabled; in this case, the setting of parameter No.5314 is used. 2 When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the setting of parameter No.5314 (or No.5310) is applied to the second and third spindles, as well as to the first spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5350 and No.5354 are applied to the second spindle and third spindle, respectively. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 220 5321 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (first–stage gear) Spindle backlash in rigid tapping 5322 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (second–stage gear) 5323 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (third–stage gear) 5324 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (fourth–stage gear) 5325 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping using the second spindle (first–stage gear) Spindle backlash in rigid tapping using the second spindle 5326 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping using the second spindle (second–stage gear) 5327 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping using the third spindle (first–stage gear) Spindle backlash in rigid tapping using the third spindle 5328 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping using the third spindle (second–stage gear) [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 127 Each of these parameters is used to set a spindle backlash. NOTE When rigid tapping is performed using the second and third spindles ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1, the settings of parameters No.5325 and No.5326 are applied to the second spindle, while the settings of parameters No.5227 and No.5228 are applied to the third spindle. ? When the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 0, the settings of parameters No.5321 and No.5322 are applied to the second spindle and third spindle, as well as to the first spindle. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 221 5335 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in second spindle extraction operation (first–stage gear) 5336 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in second spindle extraction operation (second–stage gear) 5337 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in third spindle extraction opera- tion (first–stage gear) 5338 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in third spindle extraction opera- tion (second–stage gear) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Each of these parameters is used to set a linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation during rigid tapping on a gear–by–gear basis. NOTE This parameter is enabled when both the TDR parameter (bit 2 of parameter No.5201) and the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) are set to 1. 5341 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping using the second spindle (common to all the gears) 5342 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping using the second spindle (first–stage gear) 5343 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping using the second spindle (second–stage gear) NOTE After these parameters have been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the settings to become effective. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 0.01 s–1 [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 Each of these parameters is used to set a position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping using the second spindle. NOTE 1 To use a varied loop gain on a gear–by–gear basis, set parameter No.5341 to 0, and set a loop gain for each gear in parameters No.5342 and No.5343. 2 This parameter is enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 222 5344 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping using the third spindle (common to all the gears) 5345 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping using the third spindle (first–stage gear) 5346 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping using the third spindle (second–stage gear) NOTE After these parameters have been set, the power must be turned off then back on for the settings to become effective. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 0.01 s–1 [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 Each of these parameters is used to set a position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping using the third spindle. NOTE 1 To use a varied loop gain on a gear–by–gear basis, set parameter No.5344 to 0, and set a loop gain for each gear in parameters No.5345 and No.5346. 2 This parameter is enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. 5350 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping using the second spindle [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter sets a positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping using the second spindle. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. 5351 Positional deviation limit imposed during spindle movement in rigid tapping using the second spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed during spindle movement in rigid tapping using the second spindle. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 223 5352 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tap- ping using the second spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping using the second spindle. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. 5353 Positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is stopped in rigid tapping using the second spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is stopped in rigid tapping using the second spindle. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. 5354 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping using the third spindle [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis movement in rigid tapping using the third spindle. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 224 5355 Positional deviation limit imposed during spindle movement in rigid tapping using the third spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed during spindle movement in rigid tapping using the third spindle. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. 5356 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tap- ping using the third spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping using the third spindle. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. 5357 Positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is stopped in rigid tapping using the third spindle [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 This parameter is used to set a positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is stopped in rigid tapping using the third spindle. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the SPR parameter (bit 1 of parameter No.5204) is set to 1. 5382 Amount of return for rigid tapping return [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Input increments [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 During rigid tapping return for the machining return and restart function, the tool can be pulled out, along the tapping axis, going beyond the stored rigid tapping start position by the amount specified with this parameter. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 225 #7 5400 #6 XSC #5 #4 #3 #2 D3R D3R #1 #0 RIN RIN SCR [Data type] Bit type RIN Coordinate rotation angle command (R) 0 : Specified by an absolute method 1 : Specified by G90 or G91 D3R The three–dimensional coordinate conversion mode can be cancelled by: 0 : The G69 (M series) command, the G69.1 (T series) command, a reset operation, or a CNC reset by signal input from the PMC. 1 : The G69 (M series) command or G69.1 (T series) command only. XSC Axis scaling and programmable mirror image 0 : Invalidated (The scaling magnification is specified by P.) 1 : Validated SCR Scaling magnification unit 0 : 0.00001 times (1/100,000) 1 : 0.001 times #7 5401 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SCLx [Data type] Bit axis SCLx Scaling for every axis 0 : Invalidated 1 : Validated 5410 Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for coor- dinate system rotation [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] 0.001 degrees [Valid data range] –360000 to 360000 This parameter sets the angular displacement for coordinate system rotation. When the angular displacement for coordinate system rotation is not specified with address R in the block where G68 is specified, the setting of this parameter is used as the angular displacement for coordinate system rotation. 4.25 PARAMETERS OF SCALING/COORDINA TE ROTATION 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 226 5411 Magnification used when scaling magnification is not specified Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter No.5400) [Valid data range] 1 to 999999 This parameter sets the scaling magnification. This setting value is used when a scaling magnification (P) is not specified in the program. NOTE Parameter No.5421 becomes valid when scaling for every axis is valid. (XSC, #6 of parameter No.5400 is "1".) 5412 Rapid traverse rate for a hole machining cycle in three–dimensional coordinate conversion mode [Data type] 2–word [Units of data], [Valid data range] Increment system Units of data Valid data range Increment system Units of data IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000 30 to 48000 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 5421 Scaling magnification for every axis Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter No.5400) [Valid data range] –999999 to –1, 1 to 999999 This parameter sets the scaling magnification for every axis. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 227 #7 5431 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 PDI #0 MDL [Data type] Bit MDL Specifies whether the G code for single direction positioning (G60) is included in one–shot G codes (00 group) or modal G codes (01 group) 0: One–shot G codes (00 group) 1: Modal G codes (01 group) PDI When the tool is stopped before or after a specified end point with the unidirectional positioning function: 0 : No in–position check is performed. 1 : An in–position check is performed. Overrun distance Start point Start point End point Stop after overrun 5440 Positioning direction and overrun distance in uni–directional positioning for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –16383 to +16383 This parameter sets the positioning direction and overrun distance in uni–directional positioning (G60) for each axis. The positioning direction is specified using a setting data sign, and the overrun distance using a value set here. Overrun distance > 0: The positioning direction is positive (+). Overrun distance < 0: The positioning direction is negative (*). Overrun distance = 0: Uni–directional positioning is not performed. Positioning direction (plus) Overrun distance – + Fig.4.26 Positioning Direction and Overrun distance 4.26 PARAMETERS OF UNI–DIRECTIONAL POSITIONING 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 228 #7 5450 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 AFC #0 [Data type] Bit type AFC In polar coordinate interpolation mode, automatic override operation and automatic feedrate clamp operation are: 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. NOTE In polar coordinate interpolation mode, the feedrate component for a rotational axis increases as the tool moves closer to the center of a workpiece. Near the center of a workpiece, the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No.5462) may be exceeded, causing servo alarm No.411 to be issued. The automatic feedrate override function and automatic feedrate clamp function automatically control the feedrate to prevent the feedrate component on a rotation axis from exceeding a specified maximum cutting feedrate. 5460 Axis (linear axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolation 5461 Axis (rotary axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolarion [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ... control axes count These parameters set control axis numbers of linear and rotary axes to execute polar interpolation. 5462 Maximum cutting feedrate during polar coordinate interpolation [Data type] 2–word Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0, 6 to 240000 0, 6 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0, 6 to 96000 0, 6 to 48000 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 0, 6 to 240000 0, 6 to 100000 This parameter sets the upper limit of the cutting feedrate that is effective during polar coordinate interpolation. If a feedrate greater than the maximum feedrate is specified during polar coordinate interpolation, it is clamped to the feedrate specified by the parameter. When the setting is 0, the feedrate during polar coordinate interpolation is clamped to the maximum cutting feedrate usually specified with parameter 1422. 4.27 PARAMETERS OF POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION [Unit of data] [Valid data range] B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 229 5463 Allowable automatic override percentage in polar coordinate interpolation [Data type] Byte type [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 This parameter sets an allowable percentage to find an allowable feedrate on a rotation axis in polar coordinate interpolation mode. A maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No.5462), multiplied by the allowable percentage set with this parameter represents an allowable feedrate. (Allowable feedrate on rotation axis) = (maximum cutting feedrate) (allowable percentage) In polar coordinate interpolation mode, the feedrate component on a rotation axis increases as the tool moves closer to the center of a workpiece. Near the center of a workpiece, the maximum allowable feedrate (parameter No.5462) may be exceeded. To prevent the feedrate component on a rotation axis from exceeding the maximum allowable feedrate in polar coordinate interpolation mode, the following override is automatically applied to the feedrate (automatic override): (Override) = (Allowable feedrate on rotation axis) (Feedrate component on rotation axis) 100 (%) If the overridden feedrate component for a rotation axis still exceeds the allowable feedrate, the feedrate is clamped to prevent the feedrate component on a rotation axis from exceeding a maximum cutting feedrate (automatic feedrate clamp). NOTE When 0 is set in this parameter, a specification of 90% is assumed. When a value of 100 or greater is set with this parameter, a specification of 100% is assumed. Before the automatic override function and automatic feedrate clamp function can be used, bit 1 (AFC) of parameter No.5450 must be set to 1. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 230 5480 Number of the axis for controlling the normal direction [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to the maximum control axis number This parameter sets the control axis number of the axis for controlling the normal direction. 5481 Rotation feedrate of normal direction control axis [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 1 deg/min [Valid data range] 1 to 15000 This parameter sets the feedrate of a normal direction control axis that is inserted at the start point of a block during normal direction control. 5482 Limit value that ignores the rotation insertion of normal direction control axis [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 The rotation block of a normal direction control axis is not inserted when the rotation insertion angle calculated during normal direction control does not exceed this setting value. The ignored rotation angle is added to the next rotation insertion angle. The block insertion is then judged. NOTE 1 No rotation block is inserted when 360 or more degrees are set. 2 If 180 or more degrees are set, a rotation block is inserted only when the circular interpolation is 180 or more degrees. 4.28 PARAMETERS OF NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 231 5483 Limit value of movement that is executed at the normal direction angle of a pre- ceding block [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter sets the limit value of movement at the normal direction angle of a preceding block. N1 Tool center path N2 Movement Programmed path For straight line Block N2 is machined with the tool being normal to block N1 when the movement of N2 in the figure on the left does not exceed the set value. N3 Fig.4.28 (a) When the Block Moves Along a Straight Line Diameter Programmed path Tool center path For arc Arc N2 is machined with the tool being normal to block N1 when the arc diameter of N2 in the figure on the left does not exceed the setting value. A normal direction axis is not controlled to move in the normal direction according to the arc movement. N1 N3 N2 Fig.4.28 (b) When the Block Moves Along on Arc #7 5484 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SDC [Data type] Bit SDC In normal direction control: 0 : A C–axis movement is automatically inserted between blocks so that the C–axis is directed at right angles to the direction of motion at the start point of each block. (After movement on the C–axis, movement (along the X–axis and Y–axis) specified by the block is performed.) 1 : If the amount of C–axis movement is smaller than the value set in parameter No.5485, a C–axis movement is not inserted before a block. Instead, it is performed together with movement along the X–axis and Y–axis. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 232 5485 Limit imposed on the insertion of a single block for rotation about the normal direction control axis [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Units Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 When normal direction control is applied, the amount of movement (rotation angle) on the normal direction control axis (C–axis), calculated so that the C–axis is directed at right angles to the direction of motion at the start point of a block, may be smaller than the value specified in this parameter. In such a case, the C–axis movement is not inserted before the movement (along the X–axis and Y–axis) specified by the block. Instead, the C–axis movement is performed together with the movement specified by the block. If the amount of movement (rotation angle) on the C–axis is greater than or equal to the value specified with this parameter, the C–axis movement is inserted, and the movement specified by the block is made after the completion of the C–axis movement. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the SDC parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.5484) is set to 1. If a value equal to or greater than 180 degrees is specified, a C–axis movement is inserted only when circular interpolation involving a C–axis rotation of 180 degrees or more is performed. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 233 #7 5500 #6 SIM #5 #4 G90 #3 INC #2 ABS #1 REL #0 DDP IDX [Data type] Bit type DDP Selection of decimal–point input method of index table indexing axis 0 : Conventional method (Example IS–B: B1; = 0.001 deg) 1 : Pocket calculator method (Example IS–B: B1; = 1.000 deg) REL Relative position display of index table indexing axis 0 : Not rounded by 360 degrees 1 : Rounded by 360 degrees ABS Displaying absolute coordinate value of index table indexing axis 0 : Not rounded by 360 degrees The index table indexing axis rotates 720 degrees (two rotations) when G90 B720.0; is specified from the 0–degree position. It rotates in reverse direction 720 degrees (two rotations) when G90 B0.; is specified. The absolute coordinate value then becomes 0 degree. 1 : Rounded by 360 degrees The index table indexing axis is positioned in 40 degrees when G90 B400.0; is specified from the 0–degree position. The index table indexing axis does not rotate by two or more turns when this parameter is set to 1. It also does not move when G90 B720.0; is specified from the 0–degree position. INC Rotation in the G90 mode when negative–direction rotation command M code (parameter No.5511) is not set 0 : Not set to the shorter way around the circumference 1 : Set to the shorter way around the circumference (Set ABS, #2 of parameter No.5500, to 1.) G90 Index table indexing command 0 : Judged to be an absolute/increment command according to the G90/G91 mode 1 : Judged to be an absolute command SIM When the same block includes a command for an index table indexing axis and a command for another controlled axis: 0 : A P/S alarm (No.136) is issued. 1 : The commands are executed. (In a block other than G00, G28, and G30, however, a P/S alarm (No.136) is issued.) IDX Index table indexing sequence 0 : Type A 1 : Type B 4.29 PARAMETERS OF INDEXING INDEX TABLE 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 234 5511 Negative–direction rotation command M code [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 255 0 : Not use an M code that sets the index table rotation to the negative direction. The rotation direction is specified using a command and parameter (INC, #3 of parameter No.5500). 1 to 255: Sets an M code that sets the index table rotation to the negative direction. The rotation is set to the negative direction only when an M code set here is specified in the same block as an index table indexing command. If the M code is not specified in the same block, the rotation is always set to the positive direction. NOTE Set ABS, #2 of parameter No.5500, to 1. 5512 Unit of index table indexing angle [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Input increment IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 0 to 360000 This parameter sets the unit of index table indexing angle. A P/S alarm generated when movementother than integer multiple of the setting value is specified. NOTE If zero is specified as the setting value, any command can be specified irrespective of the unit of angle. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 235 5610 Limit of initial permissible error during involute interpolation [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the allowable limit of deviation between an involute curve passing through a start point and an involute curve passing through an end point for an involute interpolation command. Permissible error limit Path after correction Real involute curve Ps Pe Y X Involute interpolation in ccw (G03.2) 4.30 PARAMETERS OF INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 236 5611 Radius of curvature at cutting point for starting basic circle neighborhood override 1 5612 Radius of curvature at cutting point for starting basic circle neighborhood override 2 5613 Radius of curvature at cutting point for starting basic circle neighborhood override 3 5614 Radius of curvature at cutting point for starting basic circle neighborhood override 4 5615 Radius of curvature at cutting point for starting basic circle neighborhood override 5 [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Units Metric input 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 The settings of these parameters are used for automatic speed control during involute interpolation in high–precision contour control mode. 5616 Override value for starting basic circle neighborhood override 2 5617 Override value for starting basic circle neighborhood override 3 5618 Override value for starting basic circle neighborhood override 4 5619 Override value for starting basic circle neighborhood override 5 [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 100 The settings of these parameters are used for automatic speed control during involute interpolation in high–precision contour control mode. 5620 Lower override limit during involute interpolation [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 100 The setting of this parameter is used for automatic speed control during involute interpolation in high–precision contour control mode. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 237 5621 Lower override limit during involute interpolation [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 The setting of this parameter is used for constant acceleration control during involute interpolation in high–precision contour control mode. 5622 Minimum speed while constant acceleration control is applied during involute interpolation [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 The setting of this parameter is used for constant acceleration control during involute interpolation in high–precision contour control mode. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 238 #7 5630 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SPN [Data type] Bit type SPN The amount of linear axis division (span value) in exponential interpolation is: 0 : Specified with parameter No.5643. 1 : Specified using address K in a block containing G02.3/G03.3. When address K is not specified, the value set with parameter No.5643 is used. 5641 Linear axis number subject to exponential interpolation [Data type] Byte type [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes This parameter sets the ordinal number, among the controlled axes, for the linear axis to which exponential interpolation is applied. 5642 Rotation axis number subject exponential interpolation [Data type] Byte type [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes This parameter sets the ordinal number, among the controlled axes, for the rotation axis to which exponential interpolation is applied. 5643 Amount of linear axis division (span value) in exponential interpolation [Data type] 2–word type [Valid data range] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter sets the amount of linear axis division in exponential interpolation when bit 0 (SPN) of parameter No.5630 is set to 0. 4.31 PARAMETERS OF EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 239 5711 Axis number of moving axis 1 5712 Axis number of moving axis 2 5713 Axis number of moving axis 3 [Data type] Byte type [Unit of data] Axis number (When 0, compensation is not performed.) [Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axes. Set the axis numbers of moving axes. 5721 Axis number of compensation axis 1 for moving axis 1 5722 Axis number of compensation axis 2 for moving axis 2 5723 Axis number of compensation axis 3 for moving axis 3 [Data type] Byte type [Unit of data] Axis number (When 0, compensation is not performed.) [Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axes. Set the axis numbers of compensation axes. 5731 Compensation point number a of moving axis 1 5732 Compensation point number b of moving axis 1 5733 Compensation point number c of moving axis 1 5734 Compensation point number d of moving axis 1 5741 Compensation point number a of moving axis 2 5742 Compensation point number b of moving axis 2 5743 Compensation point number c of moving axis 2 5744 Compensation point number d of moving axis 2 5751 Compensation point number a of moving axis 3 5752 Compensation point number b of moving axis 3 5753 Compensation point number c of moving axis 3 5754 Compensation point number d of moving axis 3 [Data type] Word type [Unit of data] Number (Compensation point numbers in stored pitch error compensation) [Valid data range] 0 to 1023 Set four compensation point for each moving axis. 4.32 PARAMETERS OF STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 240 5761 Compensation corresponding compensation point number a of moving axis 1 5762 Compensation corresponding compensation point number b of moving axis 1 5763 Compensation corresponding compensation point number c of moving axis 1 5764 Compensation corresponding compensation point number d of moving axis 1 5771 Compensation corresponding compensation point number a of moving axis 2 5772 Compensation corresponding compensation point number b of moving axis 2 5773 Compensation corresponding compensation point number c of moving axis 2 5774 Compensation corresponding compensation point number d of moving axis 2 5781 Compensation corresponding compensation point number a of moving axis 3 5782 Compensation corresponding compensation point number b of moving axis 3 5783 Compensation corresponding compensation point number c of moving axis 3 5784 Compensation corresponding compensation point number d of moving axis 3 [Data type] Word type [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] –32768 to +32767 NOTE Set compensation for each compensation point. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 241 #7 5800 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 EP3 #1 EP2 #0 EP1 [Data type] Bit EP1 The stroke end point for compensation axis 1 is: 0 : Point a 1 : Point b EP2 The stroke end point for compensation axis 2 is: 0 : Point a 1 : Point b EP3 The stroke end point for compensation axis 3 is: 0 : Point a 1 : Point b 5811 Axis number of compensation axis 1 5812 Axis number of compensation axis 2 5813 Axis number of compensation axis 3 [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ..., Number of controlled axes (When 0 is specified, compensation is not performed.) 5821 Compensation number a of compensation axis 1 5822 Compensation number b of compensation axis 1 5823 Compensation number a of compensation axis 2 5824 Compensation number b of compensation axis 2 5825 Compensation number a of compensation axis 3 5826 Compensation number b of compensation axis 3 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Compensation point number in storage–type pitch error compensation [Valid data range] 0 to 1023 4.33 PARAMETERS OF BALL SCREW EXTENSIONAL COMPENSATION 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 242 NOTE Set compensation point numbers such that a < b is satisfied. 5831 Compensation value for compensation axis 1 at a stroke end 5832 Compensation value for compensation axis 2 at a stroke end 5833 Compensation value for compensation axis 3 at a stroke end [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] –16256 to 16129 B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 243 #7 6000 #6 #5 SBM SBM #4 HGO HGO #3 V15 #2 #1 MGO MGO #0 G67 G67 [Data type] Bit type G67 If the macro continuous–state call cancel command (G67) is specified when the macro continuous–state call mode (G66) is not set: 0 : P/S alarm No.122 is issued. 1 : The specification of G67 is ignored. MGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control is executed, a high–speed branch to 20 sequence numbers executed from the start of the program is: 0 : A high–speed branch is not caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the executed program. 1 : A high–speed branch is caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the program. (The number of sequence numbers, n, is set in parameter No.6092.) V15 As system variable numbers for tool offset: 0 : The standard system variable numbers for the Series 16 are used. 1 : The same system variable numbers as those used for the Series 15 are used. The tables below indicate the system variables for tool offset numbers 1 to 999. The values for tool offset numbers 1 to 200 can be read from or assigned to the system variables in parentheses. (1) Tool offset memory A System parameter number V15 = 0 V15 = 1 Wear offset value #10001 to #10999 (#2001 to #2200) #10001 to #10999 (#2001 to #2200) (2) Tool offset memory B System parameter number V15 = 0 V15 = 1 Geomentry offset value #11001 to #11999 (#2201 to #2400) #10001 to #10999 (#2001 to #2200) Wear offset value #10001 to #10999 (#2001 to #2200) #11001 to #11999 (#2201 to #2400) (3) Tool offset memory C System parameter number V15 = 0 V15 = 1 H–Code Geomentry offset value #11001 to #11999 (#2201 to #2400) #10001 to #10999 (#2001 to #2200) Wear offset value #10001 to #10999 (#2001 to #2200) #11001 to #11999 (#2201 to #2400) D–Code Geomentry offset value #13001 to #13999 #12001 to #12999 Wear offset value #12001 to #12999 #13001 to #13999 4.34 PARAMETERS OF CUSTOM MACROS 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 244 HGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control is executed: 0 : A high–speed branch is not caused to 30 sequence numbers, immediately following the point of execution. 1 : A high–speed branch is caused to 30 sequence numbers, immediately before the point of execution. SBM Custom macro statement 0: Not stop the single block 1: Stops the single block When parameter No.3404 #0 NOP = 1, it becomes invalid. #7 CLV 6001 #6 CCV #5 TCS #4 CRO #3 PV5 #2 #1 PRT #0 PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRINT command 0 : Outputs a space 1 : Outputs no data PV5 Custom macro common variables: 0 : Nos. 500 to 599 are output. 1 : Nos. 100 to 199 and Nos. 500 to 599 are output. CRO ISO code in BPRWT or DPRNT commond 0 : Outputs only LF after data is output 1 : Outputs LF and CR after data is output TCS Custom macro (subprogram) 0 : Not called using a T code 1 : Called using a T code CCV Custom macro's common variables Nos. 100 through 149 (to 199) 0: Cleared to "vacant" by reset 1: Not cleared by reset CLV Custom macro's local variables Nos. 1 through 33 0: Cleared to "vacant" by reset 1: Not cleared by reset #7 MUS 6003 #6 MCY #5 MSB #4 MPR #3 TSE #2 MIN #1 MSK #0 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit MSK Absolute coordinates at that time during custom macro interrupt 0 : Not set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later) 1 : Set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5601 and later) MIN Custom macro interrupt 0 : Performed by interrupting an in–execution block (Custom macro interrupt type I) 1 : Performed after an in–execution block is completed (Custom macro interrupt type II) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 245 TSE Custom macro interrupt signal UINT 0 : Edge trigger method (Rising edge) 1 : Status trigger method MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code 0 : M96/M97 1 : M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034) MSB Interrupt program 0 : Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro–type interrupt) 1 : Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram– type interrupt) MCY Custom macro interrupt 0 : Not performed during cycle operation 1 : Performed during cycle operation MUS Interrupt–type custom macro 0 : Not used 1 : Used #7 6004 #6 #5 D15 #4 #3 #2 VHD #1 #0 NAT NAT [Data type] Bit NAT Specification of the results of custom macro functions ATAN and ASIN 0 : The result of ATAN is 0 to 360.0. The result of ASIN is 270.0 to 0 to 90.0. 1 : The result of ATAN is –180 to 0 to 180.0. The result of ASIN is –90.0 to 0 to 90.0. VHD With system variables #5121 through #5128 0 : Tool position offset values (geometry offset values) are read. 1 : The amount of interrupt shift caused by a manual handle interrupt is read. D15 When tool compensation memory C is used, for reading or writing tool offset values (for up to offset number 200) for D code (tool radius), the same system variables, #2401 through #2800, as Series 15 are: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. D code Offset number Geometry offset value Tool wear com- pensation value 1 2 : 200 #2401 #2402 : #2600 #2601 #2602 : #2800 NOTE When the D15 parameter is set to 1, system variables #2500 through #2806, for workpiece reference point offset values, cannot be used. Instead, use system variables #5201 through #5324. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 246 #7 *7 6010 #6 *6 #5 *5 #4 *4 #3 *3 #2 *2 #1 *1 #0 *0 =7 6011 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0 #7 6012 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 [7 6013 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0 ]7 6014 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0 [Data type] Bit type These parameters are used to input/output macro statements. The numeral of a suffix indicates the bit position in a code. *0 to *7 : Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating *. =0 to =7 : Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating =. #0 to #7 : Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating #. [ 0 to [ 7 : Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating [. ] 0 to ] 7 : Set the hole pattern of an EIA code indicating ]. 0 : Corresponding bit is 0 1 : Corresponding bit is 1. 6030 M code that calls the program entered in file [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0, and 1 to 255 This parameter sets an M code that calls the program entered in a file. NOTE The M code is judged to be M198 when zero is specified as the setting value. 6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt 6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt [Data type] Byte type [Valid data range] 0 to 255 These parameters set the custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M codes. NOTE These parameters can be used when MPR, #4 of parameter No.6003, is 1. M96 is used as a valid M code and M97 is used as an invalid M code when MPR is 0, irrespective of the state of this parameter. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 247 6036 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (#100's) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Number of custom macro variables [Valid data range] 0 to 100 The parameter specifies the number of variables commonly used for both tool paths 1 and 2 (custom macro variables common to tool paths) that are included in custom macro variables 100 to 149 (199). The custom macro variables common to tool paths can be written from or read into either of the tool paths. When this parameter is set to 10, the custom macro variables are specified as follows: Custom macro variables 100 to 109: Used commonly between two paths Custom macro variables 110 to 149 (199): Used independently for each path NOTE 1 This parameter is dedicated to the 2–path control. 2 When this parameter is set to 0, custom macro variables 100 to 149 (199) are not used commonly between two paths. 6037 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path after (#500's) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Number of custom macro variables [Valid data range] 0 to 500 The parameter specifies the number of variables commonly used for both tool paths 1 and 2 (custom macro variables common to tool paths) that are included in custom macro variables 100 to 531 (999). The custom macro variables common to tool paths can be written from or read into either of the tool paths. When this parameter is set to 10, the custom macro variables are specified as follows: Custom macro variables 500 to 509: Used commonly between two paths Custom macro variables 510 to 531 (999): Used independently for each path NOTE 1 This parameter is dedicated to the 2–path control. 2 When this parameter is set to 0, custom macro variables 500 to 531 (999) are not used commonly between two paths. Examples Examples 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 248 6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010 6051 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9011 6052 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9012 6053 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9013 6054 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9014 6055 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9015 6056 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9016 6057 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9017 6058 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9018 6059 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9019 [Data type] Word type [Valid data range] 1 to 999 These parameters set the G codes that call the custom macros of program numbers 9010 through 9019. NOTE Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called by G00. 6071 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9001 6072 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9002 6073 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9003 6074 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004 6075 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005 6076 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9006 6077 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9007 6078 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9008 6079 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9009 [Data type] 2–word type [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of program numbers 9001 through 9009. NOTE Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called by M00. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 249 6080 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9020 6081 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9021 6082 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9022 6083 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9023 6084 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9024 6085 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9025 6086 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9026 6087 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9027 6088 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9028 6089 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9029 [Data type] 2–word type [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 These parameters set the M codes that call the custom macros of program numbers 9020 through 9029. NOTE Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called by M00. 6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004 6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte type [Valid data range] 65 (A:41H) to 90 (Z:5AH) These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in decimal. Addresses that can be used are as follows: T series : A, B, F, H, I, K, M, P, Q, R, S, T M series: A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K, L, M, P, Q, R, S, T, X, Y, Z NOTE Set 0 when no subprogram is called 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 250 6101 First variable number displayed on pattern data screen 1 6102 First variable number displayed on pattern data screen 2 6103 First variable number displayed on pattern data screen 3 6104 First variable number displayed on pattern data screen 4 6105 First variable number displayed on pattern data screen 5 6106 First variable number displayed on pattern data screen 6 6107 First variable number displayed on pattern data screen 7 6108 First variable number displayed on pattern data screen 8 6109 First variable number displayed on pattern data screen 9 6110 First variable number displayed on pattern data screen 10 [Data type] Word type [Valid data range] 0, 100 to 199, 500 to 999 These parameters specify the first variable number displayed on the pattern data screen selected from the pattern menu screen. When 0 is set, 500 is assumed. 4.35 PARAMETERS OF PATTERN DATA INPUT B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 251 #7 6131 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 OAD [Data type] Bit axis OAD The function for positioning by optimul acceleration (when rapid traverse is specified in automatic operation, the function adjusts the rapid traverse rate, time constant, and loop gain to one of seven levels, according to the amount of travel for the block) is: 0 : Used. 1 : Not used. 6141 Distance D1 for level 1 (metric input) 6142 Distance D2 for level 2 (metric input) 6143 Distance D3 for level 3 (metric input) 6144 Distance D4 for level 4 (metric input) 6145 Distance D5 for level 5 (metric input) 6146 Distance D6 for level 6 (metric input) [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Units Linear axis (inch input) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 These parameters set the positioning distances used when the function for adjusting the rapid traverse rate, time constant, and loop gain to one of seven levels according to the positioning distance is used. (The settings are common to all axes.) 6151 Distance D1 to the first stage (for inch input) 6152 Distance D2 to the second stage (for inch input) 6153 Distance D3 to the third stage (for inch input) 6154 Distance D4 to the fourth stage (for inch input) 6155 Distance D5 to the fifth stage (for inch input) 6156 Distance D6 to the sixth stage (for inch input) [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Units Linear axis (inch input) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 mm Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 These parameters set positioning distances when the function for 7–stage switching of the rapid traverse rate, time constant, and loop gain based on positioning distance is used. (These parameters are common to all axes.) 4.36 PARAMETERS OF POSITIONING BY OPTIMUL ACCELERATION 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 252 6161 First–stage rapid traverse rate 6162 Second–stage rapid traverse rate 6163 Third–stage rapid traverse rate 6164 Fourth–stage rapid traverse rate 6165 Fifth–stage rapid traverse rate 6166 Sixth–stage rapid traverse rate 6167 Seventh–stage rapid traverse rate [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data], [Valid data range] Increment system Units of data Valid data range Increment system Units of data IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000 30 to 48000 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Specify rapid traverse rates for each axis. 6171 First–stage rapid traverse time constant 6172 Second–stage rapid traverse time constant 6173 Third–stage rapid traverse time constant 6174 Fourth–stage rapid traverse time constant 6175 Fifth–stage rapid traverse time constant 6176 Sixth–stage rapid traverse time constant 6177 Seventh–stage rapid traverse time constant [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 8 to 4000 Specify rapid traverse time constants for each axis. 6181 First–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain 6182 Second–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain 6183 Third–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain 6184 Fourth–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain 6185 Fifth–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain 6186 Sixth–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain 6187 Seventh–stage rapid traverse servo loop gain [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] 0.01 (1/sec) [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 Specify rapid traverse servo loop gains for each axis. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 253 #7 SKF 6200 #6 SRE SRE #5 SLS SLS #4 HSS HSS #3 MIT #2 #1 SK0 SK0 #0 GSK SKF [Data type] Bit type GSK In skip cutting (G31), the skip signal SKIPP (bit 6 of G006) is: 0 : Not used as a skip signal. 1 : Used as a skip signal. SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip signal SKIP (bit 7 of X004) and the multistage skip signals (bits 0 to 7 of X004) (for the T series only). 0 : Skip signal is valid when these signals are 1. 1 : Skip signal is valid when these signals are 0. MIT In skip cutting (G31), the tool compensation measurement value direct input B signals +MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2, and =MIT2 (bit 2 to 5 of X004) are : 0 : Not used as skip signals. 1 : Used as skip signals. HSS 0 : The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals. 1 : The skip function uses high-speed skip signals. SLS 0 The multi–step skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input. 1 : The multi–step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input. SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used: 0 : The signal is considered to be input at the rising edge (0 ? 1). 1 : The signal is considered to be input at the falling edge (1 ? 0). SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled #7 6201 #6 #5 CSE #4 IGX IGX #3 TSA TSA #2 TSE TSE #1 SEB SEB #0 SEA SEA [Data type] Bit SEA When a high speed skip signal goes on while the skip function is used, acceleration/deceleration and servo delay are: 0 : Ignored. 1 : Considered and compensated (type A). SEB When a high speed skip signal goes on while the skip function is used, acceleration/deceleration and servo delay are: 0 : Ignored. 1 : Considered and compensated (type B). 4.37 PARAMETERS OF SKIP FUNCTION 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 254 NOTE There are two types of compensation: Types A and B. With the skip function, the current position is stored in the CNC according to the skip signal. However, the current position stored in the CNC contains servo delay. The machine position is therefore deviated by the servo delay. The deviation can be obtained from the position deviation of the servo and the error generated due to feedrate acceleration/deceleration performed by the CNC. If the deviation can be compensated, it is not necessary to include the servo delay in measurement errors. The deviation can be compensated with the following two types by the parameter as follows: (1) Type A: The deviation is the value calculated from the cutting time constant and servo time constant (loop gain). (2) Type B: The deviation is the error due to acceleration/deceleration and the position deviation when the skip signal goes on. TSE When the torque limit skip function (G31 P99/98) is used, the skip position held in a system variable is: 0 : Position that is offset considering the delay (positional deviation) incurred by the servo system. 1 : Position that does not reflect the delay incurred by the servo system. NOTE The torque limit skip function stores the current position in the CNC when the torque limit arrival signal is turned on. However, the current position in the CNC includes a servo system delay, so that the position is shifted from the machine position by an amount corresponding to the servo system delay. The value of this shift can be determined from the servo system positional deviation. When TSE is set to 0, a skip position is determined by subtracting the positional deviation from the current position. When TSE is set to 1, the current position (including the servo system delay) is used as the skip position, without considering any shift or position deviation. TSA When the torque limit skip function (G31 P99/98) is used, torque limit arrival monitoring is performed for: 0 : All axes. 1 : Only those axes that are specified in the block containing the G31 command. IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP (bit 7 of X004), SKIPP (bit 6 of G006), and +MIT1 to –MIT2 (bits 2 to 5 of X004) are: 0 : Enabled as skip signals. 1 : Disabled as skip signals. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 255 NOTE 1 SKIPP (bit 6 of G006) and +MIT1 to –MIT2 (bits 2 to 5 of X004) are enabled only when bit 0 (GSK) of parameter No.6200 is set to 1 and bit 3 (MIT) of parameter No.6200 is set to 1. Note also that these signals are enabled only for the T series. 2 The skip signals for the multistage skip function (SKIP, SKIP2 to SKIP8) can also be disabled. CSE For continuos high–speed skip command G31 P90, high–speed skip signals are : 0 : Effective at either a rising or falling edge (depending on the setting of bit 6 (SRE) of parameter 6200) 1 : Effective for both the rising and falling edges #7 1S8 6202 #6 1S7 #5 1S6 #4 1S5 #3 1S4 #2 1S3 #1 1S2 #0 1S1 2S8 6203 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 3S8 6204 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1 4S8 6205 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1 DS8 6206 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1 [Data type] Bit type 1S1 to 1S8 Specify which high-speed skip signal is enabled when the G31 skip command is issued. The bits correspond to the following signals: 1S1 HDI0 1S2 HDI1 1S3 HDI2 1S4 HDI3 1S5 HDI4 1S6 HDI5 1S7 HDI6 1S8 HDI7 1S1 to 1S8, 2S1 to 2S8, 3S1 to 3S8, 4S1 to 4S8, DS1 to DS8 Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G31, or G31P1 to G31P4) and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4) are issued with the multi–step skip function. The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and commands. The setting of the bits have the following meaning : 0 : The skip signal corresponding to the bit is disabled. 1 : The skip signal corresponding to the bit is enabled. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 256 High–speed skip function Command Input signal G31 HDI0 1S1 HDI1 1S2 HDI2 1S3 HDI3 1S4 HDI4 1S5 HDI5 1S6 HDI6 1S7 HDI7 1S8 Multi–step skip function Command Input signal G31 G31P1 G04Q1 G31P2 G04Q2 G31P2 G04Q2 G31P4 G04Q4 G04 SKIP/HDI0 1S1 2S1 3S1 4S1 DS1 SKIP2/HDI1 1S2 2S2 3S2 4S2 DS2 SKIP3/HDI2 1S3 2S3 3S3 4S3 DS3 SKIP4/HDI3 1S4 2S4 3S4 4S4 DS4 SKIP5/HDI4 1S5 2S5 3S5 4S5 DS5 SKIP6/HDI5 1S6 2S6 3S6 4S6 DS6 SKIP7/HDI6 1S7 2S7 3S7 4S7 DS7 SKIP8/HDI7 1S8 2S8 3S8 4S8 DS8 NOTE HDI0 to HDI7 are high-speed skip signals. #7 6208 #6 9S7 #5 9S6 #4 9S5 #3 9S4 #2 9S3 #1 9S2 #0 9S1 9S8 [Data type] Bit type 9S1 to 9S8 Specify valid high–speed skip signals for high–speed skip command G31P90. The bits correspond to signals as follows: 9S1 HDI0 9S2 HDI1 9S3 HDI2 9S4 HDI3 9S5 HDI4 9S6 HDI5 9S7 HDI6 9S8 HDI7 Set each bit as follows: 0 : The corresponding skip signal is invalid. 1 : The corresponding skip signal is valid. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 257 6220 Period during which input is ignored for continuous high–speed skip signal [Data type] Byte type [Unit of data] 8 ms [Valid data range] 3 to 127 ( 8 ms) If a value that falls outside this range is specified, 3 ( 8 ms) is assumed. This parameter specifies the period that must elapse between a high–speed skip signal being input and input of the next high–speed skip signal being enabled, for the continuous high–speed skip function. This parameter is used to ignore chattering in skip signals. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 258 #7 6240 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 AE0 [Data type] Bit type AE0 Measurement position arrival is assumed when the automatic tool compensation signals XAE and ZAE (bits 0 and 1 of X004) (T system) or the automatic tool length measurement signals XAE, YAE, and ZAE (bits 0, 1, and 2 of X004) (M system) are: 0 : 1 1 : 0 6241 Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length compensation [Data type] Word type Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 This parameter sets the feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) and automatic tool length compensation (M series). 6251 g value on X axis during automatic tool compensation g value during automatic tool length automatic compensation 6252 g value on Z axis during automatic tool compensation [Data type] 2–word type [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 These parameters set the e value during automatic tool compensation (T series) or tool length automatic compensation (M series). NOTE Set a radius value irrespective of whether the diameter programming or the radius programming is specified. 4.38 PARAMETERS OF AUTOMATIC TOOL COMPENSATION (T SERIES) AND AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (M SERIES) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 259 6254 ε value on X axis during automatic tool compensation ε value during automatic tool length automatic compensation 6255 ε value on Z axis during automatic tool compensation [Data type] 2–word type [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 These parameters set the ε value during automatic tool compensation (T series) or automatic tool length offset (M series). NOTE Set a radius value irrespective of whether the diameter programming or the radius programming is specified. #7 6300 #6 #5 #4 ESR #3 #2 #1 #0 [Data type] Bit type ESR External program number search 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled 4.39 PARAMETERS OF EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 260 #7 6500 #6 NZM #5 DPO #4 #3 DPA #2 GUL #1 SPC #0 GRL [Data type] Bit GRL Graphic display (2–path control) 0 : Tool post 1 is displayed on the left, and tool post 2 is displayed on the right. 1 : Tool post 1 is displayed on the right, and tool post 2 is displayed on the left. SPC Graphic display (2–path control) is done 0 : on two spindles and two tool posts 1 : on one spindle and two tool posts GUL 0 : The positions of X1– and X2–axes are not replaced with each other in the coordinate system specified with parameter 6509. (2–path control) 1 : The positions of X1– and X2–axes are replaced with each other in the coordinate system specified with parameter 6509. (2–path control) DPA Current position display on the graphic display screen 0 : Displays the actual position to ensure tool nose radius compensation 1 : Displays the programmed position DPO Current position on the solid drawing (machining profile drawing) or tool path drawing screen 0 : Not appear 1 : Appears NZM 0 : The screen image is not enlarged by specifying the center of the screen and magnification. (Screen image enlargement by a conventional method is enabled.) 1 : The screen image is enlarged by specifying the center of the screen and magnification. (Screen image enlargement by the conventional method is disabled.) #7 6501 #6 #5 CSR CSR #4 FIM #3 RID #2 3PL #1 TLC #0 ORG [Data type] Bit ORG Movement when coordinate system is altered during drawing 0 : Draws in the same coordinate system 1 : Draws in the new coordinate system (only for the path drawing) TLC In solid drawing 0 : Not compensate the tool length 1 : Compensates the tool length 3PL Tri–plane drawing in solid drawing 0 : Drawn by the first angle projection 1 : Drawn by the third angle projection 4.40 PARAMETERS OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY 4.40.1 Parameters of Graphic Display/Dynamic Graphic Display B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 261 RID In solid drawing 0 : Draws a plane without edges. 1 : Draws a plane with edges. FIM Machining profile drawing in solid drawing 0 : Displayed in the coarse mode 1 : Displayed in the fine mode CSR While the screen image is enlarged, the shape of the graphic cursor is: 0 : A square. (J) 1 : An X. (X) #7 6503 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 MST #0 [Data type] Bit MST In check drawing (animated simulation) using the dynamic graphic display function, the M, S, and T code commands in the program are: 0 : Ignored. 1 : Output to the machine in the same way as in normal operation. 6509 Coordinate system for drawing a single spindle (2–path control) [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 7 and 10 to 17 (However, 0 to 7 are the same settings as 10 to 17.) This parameter sets the coordinate system for drawing a single spindle (bit 1 of parameter 6500 = 1) for 2–path control. The following shows the relationship between the settings and the drawing coordinate systems: Z X1 X2 X1 X2 Z X1 X2 Z GRPAX=0, 10 GRPAX=1, 11 GRPAX=2, 12 Z X1 X2 X1 X2 Z X1 X2 Z GRPAX=3, 13 GRPAX=4, 14 GRPAX=5, 15 Z X1 X2 X1 X2 Z GRPAX=6, 16 GRPAX=7, 17 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 262 6510 Drawing coordinate system [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 7 This parameter specifies the drawing coordinate system for the graphic function. The following show the relationship between the set values and the drawing coordinate systems. X Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z X X X X X X X Set value = 0 Set value = 1 Set value = 2 Set value = 3 Set value = 4 Set value = 5 Set value = 6 Set value = 7 NOTE This parameter is specified for each tool post in the 2–path control. A different drawing coordinate system can be selected for each tool post. 6511 Right margin in solid drawing 6512 Left margin in solid drawing 6513 Upper margin in solid drawing 6514 Lower margin in solid drawing [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Dot These parameters set the machining profile drawing position in margins. The unit is a dot. Standard set value Parameter No Margin area DPO (No.6500#5)=0 DPO(No.6500#5)=1 No. area 7.2"LCD 8.4"LCD 9.5"LCD 10.4"LCD 7.2"LCD 8.4"LCD 9.5"LCD 10.4"LCD 6511 Right 0 0 200 100 6512 Left 0 0 0 0 6513 Upper 25 32 25 32 6514 Lower 0 10 0 10 B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 263 6515 Change in cross–section position in tri–plane drawing [Data type] Byte type [Unit of data] Dot [Valid data range] 0 to 10 This parameter sets the change in the cross–section position when a soft key is continuously pressed in tri–plane drawing. When zero is specified, it is set to 1. 6520 C–axis number for dynamic graphic display [Data type] Byte type [Valid data range] 0, 1 to number of controlled axes This parameter sets a C–axis number for dynamic graphic display. When 0 or a value greater than the number of controlled axes is specified with this parameter, the third axis is assumed. 6561 Standard color data for graphic color number 1 6562 Standard color data for graphic color number 2 6563 Standard color data for graphic color number 3 6564 Standard color data for graphic color number 4 6565 Standard color data for graphic color number 5 6566 Standard color data for graphic color number 6 6567 Standard color data for graphic color number 7 6568 Standard color data for graphic color number 8 6569 Standard color data for graphic color number 9 6570 Standard color data for graphic color number 10 6571 Standard color data for graphic color number 11 6572 Standard color data for graphic color number 12 6573 Standard color data for graphic color number 13 6574 Standard color data for graphic color number 14 6575 Standard color data for graphic color number 15 4.40.2 Parameters of Graphic Color 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 264 6581 Standard color data for character color number 1 6582 Standard color data for character color number 2 6583 Standard color data for character color number 3 6584 Standard color data for character color number 4 6585 Standard color data for character color number 5 6586 Standard color data for character color number 6 6587 Standard color data for character color number 7 6588 Standard color data for character color number 8 6589 Standard color data for character color number 9 6590 Standard color data for character color number 10 6591 Standard color data for character color number 11 6592 Standard color data for character color number 12 6593 Standard color data for character color number 13 6594 Standard color data for character color number 14 6595 Standard color data for character color number 15 [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] rr gg bb: 6–digit number (rr: Red gg: Green bb: Blue) When a number of less than six digits is set, the system assumes that 0 has been specified for the unspecified higher digit(s). [Valid data range] Data of each color: 00 to 15 (same value as the tone level data on the color setting screen) When a value of more than 15 is set, the system assumes that 15 has been specified. Example: Set 10203 in this parameter when the color tone levels are as follows: Red: 1 Green: 2 Blue: 3 NOTE To set the color of the VGA display, use the color setting screen. Note that the color changes when the settings of parameters No.6561 through No.6595 are modified. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 265 #7 6700 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PCM [Data type] Bit PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts 0 : M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No.6710 1 : Only M code specified by parameter No.6710 6710 M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of ma- chined parts [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 255 except 98 and 99 The total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are counted (+1) when the M code set is executed. NOTE Set value 0 is invalid (the number of parts is not counted for M00). Data 98 and 99 cannot be set. 6711 Number of machined parts Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] One piece [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total number of machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specified by parameter No.6710 is executed. 6712 Total number of machined parts Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] One piece [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the total number of machined parts. The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No.6710 is executed. 4.41 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAYING OPERATION TIME AND NUMBER OF PARTS 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 266 6713 Number of required parts Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] One piece [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 This parameter sets the number of required machined parts. Required parts finish signal PRTSF is output to PMC when the number of machined parts reaches the number of required parts. The number of parts is regarded as infinity when the number of required parts is zero. The PRTSF signal is then not output. 6750 Integrated value of power–on period Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] One minute [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter displays the integrated value of power–on period. 6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) I Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] One ms [Valid data range] 0 to 60000 6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) II Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] One minute [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automatic operation (neither stop nor hold time included). 6753 Integrated value of cutting time I Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] One ms [Valid data range] 1 to 60000 B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 267 6754 Integrated value of cutting time II Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] One minute [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is performed in cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 or G03). 6755 Integrated value of general–purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time I Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] One ms [Valid data range] 0 to 60000 6756 Integrated value of general–purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time II Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] One minute [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter displays the integrated value of a time while input signal TMRON from PMC is on. 6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) I Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] One ms [Valid data range] 0 to 60000 6758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) II Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] One minute [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter displays the one automatic operation drive time (neither stop nor hold state included). The operation time is automatically preset to 0 during the power–on sequence and the cycle start from the reset state. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 268 #7 6800 M6T #6 IGI #5 SNG #4 GRS #3 SIG #2 LTM #1 GS2 #0 GS1 SNG GRS SIG LTM GS2 GS1 [Data type] Bit GS1, GS2 This parameter sets the combination of the number of tool life groups which can be entered, and the number of tools which can be entered per group as shown in the table below. GS2 GS1 M series T series GS2 GS1 Group count Tool count Group count Tool count 0 0 1 to 16 1 to 64 1 to 16 1 to 32 1 to 16 1 to 16 1 to 16 1 to 32 0 1 1 to 32 1 to 28 1 to 8 1 to 16 1 to 32 1 to 32 1 to 8 1 to 16 1 0 1 to 64 1 to 256 1 to 4 1 to 8 1 to 64 1 to 64 1 to 4 1 to 8 1 1 1 to 128 1 to 512 1 to 2 1 to 4 1 to 16 1 to 128 1 to 16 1 to 4 The values on the lower row in the table apply when for the M series, the 512–tool–life–management–group option is provided, and for the T series, the 128–tool–life–management–group option is provided. LTM Tool life 0 : Specified by the number of times 1 : Specified by time SIG Group number is 0 : Not input using the tool group signal during tool skip (The current group is specified.) 1 : Input using the tool group signal during tool skip GRS Tool exchange reset signal 0 : Clears only the execution data of a specified group 1 : Clears the execution data of all entered groups SNG Input of the tool skip signal when a tool that is not considered tool life management is selected. 0 : Skips the tool of the group used last or of the specified group (using SIG, #3 of parameter No.6800). 1 : Ignores a tool skip signal IGI Tool back number 0 : Not ignored 1 : Ignored M6T T code in the same block as M06 0 : Judged as a back number 1 : Judged as a next tool group command 4.42 PARAMETERS OF TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 269 #7 6801 #6 EXG EXT #5 E1S E1S #4 #3 EMD #2 LFV #1 TSM #0 CUT M6E [Data type] Bit CUT The tool life management using cutting distance is 0 : Not performed (Usually set this parameter to 0). 1 : Performed TSM When a tool takes several tool numbers, life is counted in tool life management: 0 : For each of the same tool numbers. 1 : For each tool. LFV Specifies whether life count override is enabled or disabled when the extended tool life management function is used. 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled EMD An asterisk (*) indicating that a tool has been expired is displayed, 0 : When the next tool is selected 1 : When the tool life is expired E1S When the life of a tool is measured in time–based units: 0 : The life is counted every four seconds. 1 : The life is counted every second. NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (LTM) of parameter No.6800 is set to 1. EXT Specifies whether the extended tool life management function is used. 0 : Not used 1 : Used EXG Tool life management data registration by G10 (T system) is: 0 : Performed after the data for all tool groups has been cleared. 1 : Performed by adding/changing or deleting the data for a specified group. NOTE When EXG = 1, address P in the block including G10 can be used to specify whether data is to be added/changed or deleted (P1: add/change, P2: delete). When P is not specified, the data for all tool groups is cleared before the tool life management data is registered. M6E When a T code is specified in the same block as M06 0 : The T code is processed as a return number or as a group number selected next. Either is set by parameter M6T No.6800#7. 1 : The tool group life is counted immediately. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 270 #7 6802 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 T99 [Data type] Bit T99 If a tool group whose life has expired is found to exist when M99 is executed in the main program: 0 : The tool change signal is not output. 1 : The tool change signal is output. #7 6803 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 LFE LFE #0 LGR NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then on again for the setting to become effective. [Data type] Bit LGR When the tool life management function is used, a tool life type is: 0 : Chosen based on the LTM parameter (bit 2 of parameter No.6800) for all groups. 1 : Set to either count or duration on a group–by–group basis. When LGR is set to 1, the specification of address Q is added to the G10 (tool life management data setting) command format. As shown in the example below, specify the tool life of each group as either a count or a duration. If address Q is omitted for a group, the specification of the LTM parameter (bit 2 of parameter No.6800) applies to the group. Example: When the LTM parameter (bit 2 of parameter No.6800) is set to 0 G10 L3 ; P1 L10 Q1 ; (Q1: The life of group 1 is specified as a count.) : P2 L20 Q2 ; (Q2: The life of group 2 is specified as a duration.) : P3 L20 ; (Omission of Q: The life of group 3 is specified as a count.) : G11 ; M30 ; % LFE When a tool life is specified by count: 0 : A count value from 0 to 9999 can be specified. 1 : A count value from 0 to 65535 can be specified. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 271 6810 Tool life management ignored number [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 This parameter sets the tool life management ignored number. When the set value is subtracted from a T code, a remainder is used as the toolgroupnumberoftoollifemanagementwhenavalueexceedingtheset value is specified in the T code. 6811 Tool life count restart M code [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 255 (not including 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99) When zero is specified, it is ignored. When the life is specified by the number of times, the tool exchange signal is output when a tool life count restart M code is specified if tool life of at least one tool group is expired. A tool in life is selected in the specified group when a T code command (tool group command) is specified after the tool life count restart M code is specified. A tool life counter is then incremented by one. When the life is specified by time, a tool in life is selected in the specified group when a T code command (tool group command) is specified after the tool life count restart M code is specified. 6844 Remaining tool life (use count) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Count [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 This parameter sets a remaining tool life (use count) used to output the tool life arrival notice signal when the tool life is specified as a use count. NOTE 1 When the remaining life (use count) of a selected tool reaches the value specified with parameter No.6844, tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB is output to the PMC. 2 If a value greater than the life of a tool is specified with parameter No.6844, the tool life arrival notice signal is not output. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 272 6845 Remaining tool life (use duration) [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Minutes [Valid data range] 0 to 4300 This parameter sets the remaining tool life (use duration), used to output the tool life arrival notice signal when the tool life is specified as a use duration. NOTE 1 When the remaining life (use duration) of a selected tool reaches the value specified in parameter No.6845, tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB is output to the PMC. The tool life management function allows the user to specify a tool life either as a use duration or use count for each tool group. For a group whose life is specified as a use count, parameter No.6844 is used. For a group whose life is specified as a use time, parameter No.6845 is used. 2 If a value greater than the life of a tool is specified with parameter No.6845, the tool life arrival notice signal is not output. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 273 #7 6901 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 IGP [Data type] Bit type IGP During follow–up for the absolute position detector, position switch signals are: 0 : Output 1 : Not output 6910 Axis corresponding to the first position switch 6911 Axis corresponding to the second position switch 6912 Axis corresponding to the third position switch 6913 Axis corresponding to the fourth position switch 6914 Axis corresponding to the fifth position switch 6915 Axis corresponding to the sixth position switch 6916 Axis corresponding to the seventh position switch 6917 Axis corresponding to the eighth position switch 6918 Axis corresponding to the ninth position switch 6919 Axis corresponding to the tenth position switch [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3,control axis count These parameters specify the control–axes numbers corresponding to the first through tenth position switch functions. A corresponding position switch signal is output to PMC when the machine coordinate value of a corresponding axis is within the range that is set using a parameter. NOTE Set 0 for those position switch numbers that are not to be used. 4.43 PARAMETERS OF POSITION SWITCH FUNCTIONS 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 274 6930 Maximum operation range of the first position switch 6931 Maximum operation range of the second position switch 6932 Maximum operation range of the third position switch 6933 Maximum operation range of the fourth position switch 6934 Maximum operation range of the fifth position switch 6935 Maximum operation range of the sixth position switch 6936 Maximum operation range of the seventh position switch 6937 Maximum operation range of the eighth position switch 6938 Maximum operation range of the ninth position switch 6939 Maximum operation range of the tenth position switch [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 These parameters set the maximum operation range of the first through tenth position switches. 6950 Minimum operation range of the first position switch 6951 Minimum operation range of the second position switch 6952 Minimum operation range of the third position switch 6953 Minimum operation range of the fourth position switch 6954 Minimum operation range of the fifth position switch 6955 Minimum operation range of the sixth position switch 6956 Minimum operation range of the seventh position switch 6957 Minimum operation range of the eighth position switch 6958 Minimum operation range of the ninth position switch 6959 Minimum operation range of the tenth position switch [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 These parameters set the minimum operation range of the first through tenth position switches. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 275 #7 MFM 7001 #6 #5 #4 #3 JST #2 #1 #0 MIN [Data type] Bit MIN The manual intervention and return function is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. JST During operation based on manual numerical specification, the automatic operation start in–progress signal STL is: 0 : Not output. 1 : Output. MFM For the manual linear or circular interpolation function, modifying a value specified with a command during jog feed in the guidance direction (approach direction): 0 : Immediately starts moving according to the new value. 1 : Stops moving. #7 7002 #6 #5 #4 #3 JBF JBF #2 JTF #1 JSF JSF #0 JMF JMF [Data type] Bit JMF In manual numerical specification, M function specification is: 0 : Allowed. 1 : Not allowed. JSF In manual numerical specification, S function specification is: 0 : Allowed. 1 : Not allowed. JTF In manual numerical specification, T function specification is: 0 : Allowed. 1 : Not allowed. JBF In manual numerical specification, B function specification is: 0 : Allowed. 1 : Not allowed. #7 7010 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 JMVx [Data type] Bit axis JMVx In manual numerical specification, axis movement specification is: 0 : Allowed. 1 : Not allowed. (When the command is specified, a warning message is displayed, and the command is not executed.) 4.44 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL OPERATION AND AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 276 #7 7050 #6 MI1 #5 MI0 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 RV1 NOTE After setting this parameter, turn off the power. Then, turn the power back on to enable the setting. [Data type] Bit RV1 When the tool moves backwards after feed hold during forward feed with the retrace function: 0 : The block is split at the feed hold position and stored. 1 : The block is stored without being split. Command block in program If the tool moves backwards after feed hold at position indicated with * When RV1 = 0 The block is split into two blocks and stored. When RV1 = 1 The block is stored as is. MI0, MI1 Set a batch pass quantity in simple high–precision contour control mode. MI1 MI0 Batch pass quantity 0 0 1 0 1 2 #7 7052 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 NMI NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off. [Data type] Bit NMI In simple high–precision contour control mode, batch pass for each axis is: 0 : Enabled. 1 : Disabled. NOTE For a PMC–based controlled axis or Cs axis, set 1 for this parameter. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 277 #7 7100 #6 #5 #4 HPF #3 HCL #2 IHD #1 THD #0 JHD [Data type] Bit JHD Manual handle feed in JOG feed mode or incremental feed in the manual handle feed 0 : Invalid 1 : Valid When JHD:=0 When JHD:=1 JOG feed mode Manual handle feed mode JOG feed mode Manual handle feed mode JOG feed f f Manual handle feed f f f Incremental feed f THD Manual pulse generator in TEACH IN JOG mode 0 : Invalid 1 : Valid IHD The travel increment for manual handle interrupt is: 0 : Output unit, and acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is disabled. 1 : Input unit, and acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is enabled. HCL The clearing of handle interruption amount display by soft key [CAN] operation is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. HPF When a manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is issued, 0 : The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses corresponding to the excess are ignored. (The graduations of the manual pulse generator may not agree with the distance the machine has traveled.) 1 : The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the handle pulses corresponding to the excess are not ignored, but stored in the CNC. (If the rotation of the manual pulse generator is stopped, the machine moves by the distance corresponding to the pulses preserved in the CNC, then stops.) #7 7102 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 HNGx [Data type] Bit axis HNGx Axis movement direction for rotation direction of manual pulse generator 0 : Same in direction 1 : Reverse in direction 4.45 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE FEED, HANDLE INTERRUPTION AND HANDLE FEED IN TOOL AXIAL DIRECTION 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 278 #7 7104 #6 #5 HHI HHI #4 3D2 #3 3D1 #2 CXC #1 #0 TLX [Data type] Bit TLX When the tool axis direction handle feed function when tool axis direction handle feed is used, this parameter selects a tool axis direction when the rotation axes for the three basic axes in the basic coordinate system are positioned to the machine zero point: 0 : Z–axis direction 1 : X–axis direction CXC Tool axis direction handle feed is performed with: 0 : 5–axis machine. 1 : 4–axis machine. 3D1 When handle feed is along (or across) the tool axis, the coordinate of the first rotation axis is: 0 : Machine coordinate that exists when tool axis direction handle feed (or radial tool axis handle feed) mode is selected, or when a reset occurs. 1 : Value set in parameter No.7144. 3D2 When handle feed is along (or across) the tool axis, the coordinate of the second rotation axis is: 0 : Machine coordinate that exists when tool axis direction handle feed (or radial tool axis handle feed) mode is selected, or when a reset occurs. 1 : Value set in parameter No.7145. HHI Manual handle interrupt during high–speed machining is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 7110 Number of manual pulse generators used [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1, 2, or 3 This parameter sets the number of manual pulse generators. 7113 Manual handle feed magnification m [Data type] Word [Unit of data] One time [Valid data range] 1 to 127 This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed movement selection signal MP2 is set to 1. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 279 7114 Manual handle feed magnification n [Data type] Word [Unit of data] One time [Valid data range] 1 to 1000 This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed movement selection signals MP1 and MP2 are set to 1. Movement selection signal Movement (Manual handle feed) MP2 MP1 0 0 Least input increment 1 0 1 Least input increment 10 1 0 Least input increment m 0 1 Least input increment n 7117 Allowable number of pulses that can be accumulated during manual handle feed [Data type] 2–Word [Unit of data] Pulses [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 If manual handle feed is specified such that the rapid traverse rate will be exceeded momentarily, those pulses received from the manual pulse generator that exceed the rapid traverse rate are accumulated rather than canceled. This parameter sets the maximum number of pulses which can be accumulated in such a case. NOTE If the specification of manual handle feed is such that the rapid traverse rate will be exceeded, for example, when the manual pulse generator is rotated at high speed with a large magnification such as 100, the axial feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate and those pulses received from the manual pulse generator that exceed the rapid traverse rate are ignored. In such a case, therefore, the scale on the manual pulse generator may differ from the actual amount of travel. If such a difference is not acceptable, this parameter can be set to temporarily accumulate the excess pulses in the CNC, rather than ignoring them, up to the specified maximum (pulses in excess of the set maximum are ignored). The accumulated pulses are output and converted to a move command once the feedrate falls below the rapid traverse rate by reducing the rotational speed of the manual pulse generator or stopping its rotation altogether. Note, however, that if the maximum number of pulses to be accumulated is too large, stopping the rotation of the manual pulse generator does not stop feeding until the tool moves by an amount corresponding to the pulses accumulated in the CNC. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 280 7120 Axis configuration for using the tool axis direction handle feed when tool axis direction handle feed function [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 4 When using the tool axis direction handle feed function, suppose that the rotation axes for the three basic axes X, Y, and Z in the basic coordinate system are axes A, B, and C, respectively. Suppose also that the Z–axis represents the tool axis direction when the rotation axes are positioned to the machine zero point. Then, depending on the axis configuration of the machine, four types are available. For a 4–axis machine, types (1) and (2) are available. (1) A–C axis type (2) B–C axis type (3) A–B axis (A–axis master) type (4) A–B axis (B–axis master) type This parameter selects a type. Values of 1 to 4 are assigned to these types, in order, from top to bottom. When the X–axis represents the tool axis direction, the above types are changed to B–A axis type, C–A axis type, B–C axis (B–axis master) type, and B–C axis (C–axis master) type. 7121 Axis selection in tool axis direction handle feed mode [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes This parameter sets an axis number for the manual handle feed axis selection signal for the first manual pulse generator to enable tool axis direction handle feed mode. When the value set in this parameter matches the value of the manual handle feed axis selection signal, tool axis direction handle feed mode is enabled. 7141 Axis selection in the X direction for the radial tool axis handle feed 7142 Axis selection in the Y direction for the radial tool axis handle feed [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 8 These parameters specify the axis selection signal for the first manual pulse generator used to enable the radial tool axis handle feed. When the setting of these parameters matches the manual handle feed axis selection signal, radial tool axis handle feed mode is enabled. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 281 7144 Coordinate of the first rotation axis for tool axis direction handle feed and radial tool axis handle feed 7145 Coordinate of the second rotation axis for tool axis handle feed and radial tool axis handle feed [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] 0.001 degrees [Valid data range] –360000 to 360000 These parameters specify the coordinates (rotation degrees) of the first and second rotation axes used when parameters 3D1 and 3D2 (bits 3 and 4 of parameter No.7104) are 1. When parameter CXC (bit 2 of parameter No.7104) is 1, however, the coordinate of the second rotation axis is assumed to be 0 regardless of the value of 3D2 or this parameter. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 282 7181 First withdrawal distance in reference position setting with mechanical stopper [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 When the reference position setting with mechanical stopper is used, this parameter sets a distance an axis, along which withdrawal is performed after the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the mechanical stopper to the withdrawal point). NOTE Set the same direction as that set in bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006. Cycle operation cannot be started if the opposite direction is set. 7182 Second withdrawal distance in reference position setting with mechanical stopper [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 When the reference position setting with mechanical stopper is used, this parameter sets a distance an axis, along which withdrawal is performed after the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the mechanical stopper to the withdrawal point). NOTE Set the same direction as that set in bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006. Cycle operation cannot be started if the opposite direction is set. 4.46 PARAMETERS OF REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 283 7183 First butting feedrate in reference position setting with mechanical stopper [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data and valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 15000 30 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 6000 30 to 4800 When the reference position setting with mechanical stopper is used, this parameter sets the feedrate first used to hit the stopper on an axis. 7184 Second butting feedrate in reference position setting with mechanical stopper [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data and valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 15000 30 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 6000 30 to 4800 When the reference position setting with mechanical stopper is used, this parameter sets the feedrate used to hit the stopper on an axis for a second time. 7185 Withdrawal feedrate (common to the first and second butting operations) in reference position setting with mechanical stopper [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data and valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS–A, IS–B IS–C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 15000 30 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 6000 30 to 4800 When the reference position setting with mechanical stopper is used, this parameter sets the feedrate used for withdrawal along an axis after the mechanical stopper has been hit. 7186 Torque limit value in reference position setting with mechanical stopper [Data type] Byte axes [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 This parameter sets a torque limit value in reference position setting with mechanical stopper NOTE When 0 is set in this parameter, 100% is assumed. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 284 #7 7200 #6 OP7 #5 OP6 #4 OP5 #3 OP4 #2 OP3 #1 OP2 #0 OP1 [Data type] Bit OP1 Mode selection on software operator's panel 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed OP2 JOG feed axis select and JOG rapid traverse buttons on software operator's panel 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed OP3 Manual pulse generator's axis select and manual pulse generator's magnification switches on software operator's panel 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed OP4 JOG speed override and rapid traverse override switches on software operator's panel 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed OP5 Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, and dry run switches on software operator's panel 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed OP6 Protect key on software operator's panel 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed OP7 Feed hold on software operator's panel 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed #7 7201 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 JPC [Data type] Bit JPC For the name of a general–purpose switch function on the software operator's panel, the use of full–size characters is: 0 : Not allowed. 1 : Allowed. 4.47 PARAMETERS OF SOFTWARE OPERATOR'S PANEL Arrow keys on the MDI panel 7 8 9 6 5 4 1 2 3 B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 285 7210 Job–movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel ?↑? 7211 Job–movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel ?↓? 7212 Job–movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel ?→? 7213 Job–movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel ?←? 7214 Job–movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel ? ? 7215 Job–movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel ? ? 7216 Job–movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel ? ? 7217 Job–movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel ? ? [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 8 On software operator's panel, set a feed axis corresponding to an arrow key on the MDI panel when jog feed is performed. Set value Feed axis and direction 0 Not moved 1 First axis, positive direction 2 First axis, negative direction 3 Second axis, positive direction 4 Second axis, negative direction 5 Third axis, positive direction 6 Third axis, negative direction 7 Fourth axis, positive direction 8 Fourth axis, negative direction Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes in the direction specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given below. [8 °] to the positive direction of the Z axis, [2 ±] to the negative direction of the Z axis, [6 ?] to the positive direction of the X axis [4?] to the negative direction of the X axis, [1?] to the positive direction of the Y axis, [9?] to the negative direction of the Y axis Parameter No.7210 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction) Parameter No.7211 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction) Parameter No.7212 = 1 (X axis, positive direction) Parameter No.7213 = 2 (X axis, negative direction) Parameter No.7214 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction) Parameter No.7215 = 4 (Y axis, negative direction) Parameter No.7216 = 0 (Not used) Parameter No.7217 = 0 (Not used) Example 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 286 7220 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator's panel 7283 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator's panel [Data type] Byte OPERATOR'S PANEL O1234 N5678 SIGNAL1 : OFF ON SIGNAL2 : OFF ON SIGNAL3 : OFF ON SIGNAL4 : OFF ON SIGNAL5 : OFF ON SIGNAL6 : OFF ON SIGNAL7 : OFF ON SIGNAL8 : OFF ON These names are set using character codes that are displayed in parameter Nos. 7220 to 7283. Parameter No.7220: Sets the character code (083) corresponding to S of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No.7221: Sets the character code (073) corresponding to I of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No.7222: Sets the character code (071) corresponding to G of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No.7223: Sets the character code (078) corresponding to N of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No.7224: Sets the character code (065) corresponding to A of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No.7225: Sets the character code (076) corresponding to L of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No.7226: Sets the character code (032) corresponding to (space) of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No.7227: Sets the character code (049) corresponding to 1 of SIGNAL 1. Parameter Nos. 7228 to 7235: Set the character codes of SIGNAL 2 shown in the figure above. Parameter Nos. 7236 to 7243: Set the character codes of SIGNAL 3 shown in the figure above. Parameter Nos. 7244 to 7251: Set the character codes of SIGNAL 4 shown in the figure above. Parameter Nos. 7252 to 7259: Set the character codes of SIGNAL 5 shown in the figure above. Parameter Nos. 7260 to 7267: Set the character codes of SIGNAL 6 shown in the figure above. Parameter Nos. 7268 to 7275: Set the character codes of SIGNAL 7 shown in the figure above. Parameter Nos. 7276 to 7283: Set the character codes of SIGNAL 8 shown in the figure above. The character codes are shown in Appendix 1 CHARACTER CODE LIST. Example These parameters set the names of the general–purpose switches (SIGNAL 1 through SIGNAL 8) on the software operator's panel as described below. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 287 7284 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator's panel (extended) 7285 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator's panel (extended) 7286 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator's panel (extended) : : 7299 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator's panel (extended) 7352 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator's panel (extended) 7353 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator's panel (extended) 7354 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator's panel (extended) : : 7399 Name of general–purpose switch on software operator's panel (extended) [Data type] Byte OPERATOR'S PANEL O1234 N5678 SIGNAL1 : OFF ON SIGNAL2 : OFF ON SIGNAL3 : OFF ON SIGNAL4 : OFF ON SIGNAL5 : OFF ON SIGNAL6 : OFF ON SIGNAL7 : OFF ON SIGNAL8 : OFF ON These names are set using the character codes displayed in parameters No.7284 through No.7299, and parameters No.7352 through No.7399. Parameter No.7284: Set the character code (083) corresponding to S of SIGNAL 9. Parameter No.7285: Set the character code (073) corresponding to I of SIGNAL 9. Parameter No.7286: Set the character code (071) corresponding to G of SIGNAL 9. Parameter No.7287: Set the character code (078) corresponding to N of SIGNAL 9. Parameter No.7288: Set the character code (065) corresponding to A of SIGNAL 9. Parameter No.7289: Set the character code (076) corresponding to L of SIGNAL 9. Parameter No.7290: Set the character code (032) corresponding to (space) of SIGNAL 9. Parameter No.7291: Set the character code (057) corresponding to 1 of SIGNAL 9. Similarly, set character codes as shown below. Parameter No.7292 to No.7299: SetcharactercodesforSIGNAL10,shownabove. Parameter No.7352 to No.7359: SetcharactercodesforSIGNAL11,shownabove. Parameter No.7360 to No.7367: SetcharactercodesforSIGNAL12,shownabove. Parameter No.7368 to No.7375: SetcharactercodesforSIGNAL13,shownabove. Parameter No.7376 to No.7383: SetcharactercodesforSIGNAL14,shownabove. Parameter No.7384 to No.7391: SetcharactercodesforSIGNAL15,shownabove. Parameter No.7392 to No.7399: SetcharactercodesforSIGNAL16,shownabove. NOTE The character codes are shown in the character code correspondence table in Appendix A. Set the names of the general–purpose switches (SIGNAL 9 to SIGNAL 16) on the software operator's panel, as described below. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 288 #7 MOU 7300 MOU #6 MOA MOA #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 [Data type] Bit MOA In program restart operation, before movement to a machining restart point after restart block search: 0 : The last M, S, T, and B codes are output. 1 : All M codes and the last S, T, and B codes are output. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the MOU parameter is set to 1. MOU In program restart operation, before movement to a machining restart point after restart block search: 0 : The M, S, T, and B codes are not output. 1 : The last M, S, T, and B codes are output. 7310 Movement sequence to program restart position Setting entry is accepted. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to No.of controlled axes This parameter sets the axis sequence when the machine moves to the restart point by dry run after a program is restarted. [Example] The machine moves to the restart point in the order of the fourth, first, second, and third axes one at a time when the first axis = 2, the second axis = 3, the third axis = 4, and the fourth axis = 1 are set. 7351 Macro variable start number [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 500 to 975 This parameter specifies the first variable number where data for the machining return or restart function is stored. If a value out of the valid data range is specified, 500 is assumed. NOTE 1 If 0 is specified, the machining return or restart data will not be set in a macro variable. 2 If a value from 507 to 531 is specified, 500 is assumed. If 532 or greater is specified, the custom macro variable expansion option becomes necessary. 4.48 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAM RESTART B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 289 #7 IPC 7501 IPC #6 IT2 IT2 #5 IT1 IT1 #4 IT0 IT0 #3 #2 #1 #0 CSP [Data type] Bit CSP Cs contouring control function dedicated to a piston lathe is 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. IT0, IT1, IT2 IT2 IT1 IT0 Interpolation of G05 data (ms) 0 0 0 8 0 0 1 2 0 1 0 4 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 16 IPC 0 : The system does not monitor whether a distribution process is stopped while high–speed machining (G05) is performed with high–speed remote buffer A or B or in a high–speed cycle. 1 : The system monitors whether a distribution process is stopped while high–speed machining (G05) is performed with high–speed remote buffer A or B or in a high–speed cycle. (P/S alarms 179 and 000 are simultaneously issued if the distribution process is stopped. In this case, the power must be turned off then on again.) NOTE The distribution process stops, when the host cannot send data with the high–speed remotebuffer by the specified time. #7 7502 #6 #5 LC2 LC2 #4 LC1 LC1 #3 L8M L8M #2 #1 PMX PMX #0 SUP [Data type] Bit axis SUP In high–speed remote buffering and high–speed machining: 0 : Acceleration/deceleration control is not applied. 1 : Acceleration/deceleration control is applied. PMX A PMC axis control command in high–speed cycle machining (G05) is: 0 : Ignored. 1 : Executed. 4.49 PARAMETERS OF HIGH–SPEED MACHINING (HIGH–SPEED CYCLE MACHINING/HIGH– SPEED REMOTE BUFFER) 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 290 L8M In high–speed cycle machining (G05) with an interpolation period of 8 msec, digital servo learning control is: 0 : Not applied. 1 : Applied. LC1, LC2 The servo learning function of the high–speed cycle machining retract function is enabled or disabled as indicated below. LC2 LC1 Description 0 0 Disables the servo learning function, after which retract operation starts. 0 1 Disables the servo learning function upon the completion of retract operation. 1 0 Disables the servo learning function upon the completion of a retract cycle. #7 7505 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 HUNx #0 HSCx HSCx NOTE After setting this parameter, the power must be tuned off then on again. [Data type] Bit axis HSCx Specifies whether each axis is used for high–speed distribution in a high–speed cycle or with ahigh–speed remote buffer. 0 : Not used for high–speed distribution. 1 : Used for high–speed distribution HUNx Specifies whether the unit of data to be distributed during machining a high–speed cycle is tentimes the least input increment. 0 : The unit of data is the same as the least input increment. 1 : The unit of data is ten times the least input increment. NOTE This parameter is used when a data item to be distributed exceeds a word in terms of the least input increment or the maximum travel speed. The data to be distributed for machining in a high–speed cycle for the axes in which this parameter HUNX = 1 is set. Therefore, set a value one tenth the value to be distributed for machining in a high–speed cycle along the specified axes. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 291 7510 Maximum number of simultaneously controlled axes when G05 is specified during high–speed cycle machining/No.of controlled axes in high–speed remote buffer [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 16 This parameter sets the maximum number of simultaneous conrtol axes when G05 is specified during high–speed cycle machining or sets the number of control axes in a high–speed remote buffer. 7514 Retract direction and retract feedrate in high–speed cycle machining retract operation [Data type] 2–word axis [Units of data], [Valid data range] Increment system Units of data Valid data range Increment system Units of data IS–A, IS–B IS–C Metric input 1mm/min –30 to –240000 30 to 240000 –30 to –100000 30 to 100000 Inch input 0.1inch/min –30 to –96000 30 to 96000 –30 to –48000 30 to 48000 This parameter sets a retract direction and retract feedrate along each axis in a high–speed cycle machining retract operation. The retract direction is specified by a sign. 7515 Number of retract operation distributions in a high–speed cycle machining retract operation [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Number of distributions [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the number of retract operation distributions in a high–speed cycle machining retract operation. When the cycle currently being executed ends before the number of distributions specified in this parameter are performed, retract operation is terminated. When 0 is specified in this parameter, the number of retract operation distributions is assumed to be infinite. In this case, retract operation is performed until the cycle currently being executed ends. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 292 #7 PLZ 7600 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 [Data type] Bit PLZ Synchronous axis using G28 command 0: Returns to the reference position in the same sequence as the manual reference position return. 1: Returns to the reference position by positioning at a rapid traverse. The synchronous axis returns to the reference position in the same sequence as the manual reference position return when no return–to–reference position is performed after the power is turned on. #7 7602 #6 #5 COF #4 HST #3 HSL #2 HDR #1 SNG #0 MNG [Data type] Bit MNG The rotational direction of the master axis (first spindle) in the spindle–spindle polygon turning mode is: 0 : Not reversed. 1 : Reversed. SNG The rotational direction of the polygon synchronization axis (second spindle) in the spindle–spindle polygon turning mode is: 0 : Not reversed. 1 : Reversed. HDR When phase control is exercised in spindle–spindle polygon turning mode (COF = 0), the phase shift direction is: 0 : Not reversed for phase synchronization. 1 : Reversed for phase synchronization. NOTE Use MNG, SNG, and HDR when the specified rotational direction of the master axis or polygon synchronization axis, or the specified phase shift direction is to be reversed in spindle–spindle polygon turning mode. HSL When phase control is exercised in spindle–spindle polygon turning mode (COF = 0), this parameter selects the spindle that is subject to a phase shift operation for phase synchronization: 0 : The polygon synchronization axis (second spindle) is selected. 1 : The master axis (first spindle) is selected. HST When phase control is applied in spindle–spindle polygon turning mode (COF = 0), and spindle–spindle polygon turning mode is specified: 0 : Spindle–spindle polygon turning mode is entered with the current spindle speed maintained. 1 : Spindle–spindle polygon turning mode is entered after the spindle is stopped. 4.50 PARAMETERS OF POLYGON TURNING B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 293 NOTE This parameter can be used, for example, when single–rotation signal detection cannot be guaranteed at an arbitrary feedrate because a separate detector is installed to detect the spindle single–rotation signal, as when a built–in spindle is used. (When bit 7 of parameter No.4016 for the serial spindle is set to 1, together with this parameter, a single–rotation signal detection position in spindle–spindle polygon turning mode is guaranteed.) COF In spindle–spindle polygon turning mode, phase control is: 0 : Used. 1 : Not used. NOTE When the use of phase control is not selected, the steady state is reached in a shorter time because phase synchronization control is not applied. Once steady rotation is achieved, however, polygonal turning must be completed without changing the steady state. (If the rotation is stopped, or the rotational speed altered, polygonal turning is disabled because of the inevitable phase shift.) Even when this parameter is set to 1, an R command (phase position command) in a block containing G51.2 is ignored ; no alarm is issued. #7 PST 7603 #6 #5 RDG #4 #3 #2 #1 QDR #0 RPL [Data type] Bit RPL Upon reset, spindle–spindle polygon turning mode is: 0 : Released. 1 : Not released. QDR The rotational direction of the polygon synchronization axis: 0 : Depends on the sign (+/*) of a specified value for Q. 1 : Depends on the rotational direction of the first spindle. (If * is spe- cified for Q, P/S alarm No.218 is issued.) RDG On the diagnosis screen No.476, for spindle–spindle polygon phase command value (R), displays: 0 : The specified value (in the increment system for the rotation axis). 1 : The actual number of shift pulses. NOTE A phase command is specified in address R, in units of degrees. For control, the actual shift amount is converted to a number of pulses according to the conversion formula: 360 degrees = 4096 pulses. This parameter switches the display of a specified value to that of a converted value. PST The polygon spindle stop signal *PLSST (bit 0 of G038) is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 294 7610 Control axis number of tool rotation axis for polygon turning [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, . . . number of control axes This parameter sets the control axis number of a rotation tool axis used for polygon turning. 7620 Movement of tool rotation axis per revolution [Data type] 2–word Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 1 to 9999999 This parameter sets the movement of a tool rotation axis per revolution. 7621 Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] For polygonal turning using servo motors: 0 to 1.2 108 set value of the parameter No.7620 For polygon turning with two spindles: Set a value between 0 and 32767, but which does not exceed the maximum allowable speed, as determined by the performance of the second spindle and other mechanical factors. This parameter sets the maximum allowable speed of the tool rotationaxis (polygon synchronization axis). If the speed of the tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis) exceeds the specified maximum allowable speed during polygon turning, the speed is clamped at the maximum allowable speed. When the speed is clamped at a maximum allowable speed, however, synchronization between the spindle and tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis) is lost. And, when the speed is clamped, P/S alarm No.5018 is issued. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 295 7631 Allowable spindle speed deviation level in spindle–spindle polygon turning [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 255 [Standard setting value] 1 to 10 This parameter sets the allowable level of deviation between the actual speed and specified speed of each spindle in spindle–spindle polygon turning. The value set with this parameter is used for both the master axis and polygon synchronization axis. ? 7632 Steady state confirmation time duration in spindle polygon turning [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the duration required to confirm that both spindles have reached their specified speeds in spindle–spindle polygon turning. If the state where the speed of each spindle is within the range set with parameter No.7631, and has lasted at least for the duration specified with parameter No.7632, the spindle polygon speed arrival signal PSAR (bit 2 of F0063) is set to 1. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 296 7681 Setting 1 for the ratio of an axis shift amount to external pulses (M) [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 255 7682 Setting 2 for the ratio of an axis shift amount to external pulses (N) [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 1000 4.51 PARAMETERS OF THE EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 297 #7 7700 #6 DPS #5 RTO #4 #3 MLT #2 HDR #1 CMS #0 HBR [Data type] Bit HBR 0 : Performing a reset cancels synchronization of the C–axis to the hob axis (G81). 1 : Performing a reset does not cancel synchronization of the C–axis to the hob axis (G81). CMS 0 : The position manually set with a single rotation signal is canceled when a synchronization cancel command (G80, reset) is issued. 1 : The position manually set with a single rotation signal is not canceled when a synchronization cancel command (G80, reset) is issued. HDR Setting of the direction for compensating a helical gear (1 is usually specified.) MLT Unit of data for the magnification for compensating C–axis servo delay (parameter No.7714) 0 : 0.001 1 : 0.0001 RTO Gear ratio for the spindle and position coder specified in parameter No.3706 0 : Disabled (Always specify 0.) 1 : Enabled DPS Display of actual spindle speed 0 : The hob–axis speed is displayed. 1 : The spindle speed is displayed. #7 7701 #6 #5 DLY #4 JHD #3 LZE #2 SM3 #1 SM2 #0 SM1 [Data type] Bit SM1, SM2, and SM3 Specify the number of times a feedback pulse from the position coder is sampled when the hobbing machine function is used. SM3 SM2 SM1 Number of times the pulse is sampled 0 0 0 4 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 2 0 1 1 16 1 0 0 32 1 1 0 4 1 1 1 4 4.52 PARAMETERS OF THE HOBBING MACHINE AND SIMPLE ELECTRIC GEAR BOX 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 298 LZE If L (number of hob threads) = 0 is specified at the start of EBG synchronization: 0 : Synchronization is started, assuming that L = 1 is specified. 1 : Synchronization is not started, assuming that L = 0 is specified. However, helical gear compensation is performed. JHD While the C–axis and hob axis are synchronized with each other (in the G81 mode), jogging and handle feeds around the C–axis are 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled DLY Compensating C–axis servo delay with G84 is 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled #7 7702 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 TDP [Data type] Bit TDP The specifiable number of teeth, T, of the simple electronic gearbox is: 0 : 1 to 1000 1 : 0.1 to 100 (1/10 of a specified value). NOTE In either case, a value from 1 to 1000 can be specified. 7709 Number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear [Data type] Byte [Valid range] 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes This parameter sets the number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear. If the value out of the valid range is specified, 3 (the 3rd axis) is specified. NOTE After setting this parameter, the power must be turned off then on again. 7710 Number of the axis synchronized with the hob axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Valid range] 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes This parameter sets the number of the axis (workpiece) that is synchronized with the hob axis (cutter). If a value out of the valid range is specified, 4 (the 4th axis) is assumed. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 299 7711 Gear ratio for the hob axis and position coder [Data type] Byte [Valid range] 1 to 20 [Unit of data] 1 time This parameter sets the gear ratio for the hob axis and position coder. 7712 Time constant for C–axis acceleration/deceleration during rotation with the hob axis and C–axis synchronized with each other [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid range] 0 to 4000 This parameter sets the time constant for C–axis exponential acceleration/deceleration during rotation with the hob axis and C–axis synchronized with each other. NOTE Acceleration/deceleration is applied to G01, G83, or compensation of a helical gear with the time constant and FL speed for acceleration/deceleration during cutting feed (parameters 1622 and 1623). 7713 FL speed of C–axis acceleration/deceleration during rotation with the hob axis and C–axis synchronized each other [Data type] Word [Unit of data and valid range] Unit of data Valid range Unit of data IS–B IS–C 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 This parameter sets the FL speed of C–axis exponential acceleration/deceleration during rotation with the hob axis and C–axis synchronized with each other. 7714 Magnification 2 for compensation of C–axis servo delay by G83 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 0.0001/0.001 [Valid range] 500 to 2000 This parameter sets the magnification for compensation of C–axis servo delay by G83. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 300 7715 Magnification 1 for compensation of C–axis servo delay by G83 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] 0.0001/0.001 [Valid range] 500 to 2000 This parameter sets the magnification for compensation of C–axis servo delay by G83. #7 7730 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 RTRx [Data type] Bit axis RTRx Specifies whether the retraction function is effective for each axis. 0 : Retraction is disabled. 1 : Retraction is enabled. 7740 Feedrate during retraction for each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data and valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid range Increment system Unit of data IS–B IS–C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000 30 to 48000 This parameter sets the feedrate during retraction for each axis. 7741 Retracted distance for each axis [Data type] 2–word axis [Valid range] "99999999 Unit of data Valid range Unit of data IS–B IS–C Millimeter input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch This parameter sets the retracted distance for each axis. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 301 7771 Number of EGB axis NOTE After setting this parameter, turn off the power. Then, turn the power back on to enable the setting. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to the number of controlled axes This parameter specifies the number of the EGB axis. NOTE 1 You cannot specify four because the fourth axis is used as the workpiece axis. 2 For a machine using the inch increment system, linear axes cannot be used as the EGB axis. 7772 Number of position detector pulses per rotation about tool axis [Data type] 2–word [Data unit] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the number of pulses per rotation about the tool axis (on the spindle side), for the position detector. NOTE Specify the number of feedback pulses per rotation about the tool axis for the position detector, considering the gear ratio with respect to the position coder. 7773 Number of position detector pulses per rotation about workpiece axis [Data type] 2–word [Data unit] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the number of pulses per rotation about the workpiece axis (on the fourth axis side), for the position detector. The number of feedback pulses for the position detector is 360000 for a rotation axis for which the detection unit is 0.001 deg. [Example] 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 302 #7 7941 #6 #5 #4 RNC #3 MIA #2 #1 ATT #0 INT [Data type] Bit INT Interaction control is: 0 : Enabled. 1 : Disabled. ATT Attitude control is: 0 : Enabled. 1 : Disabled. MIA When attitude control B is used, G53 (machine coordinate system selection) operation is placed in: 0 : Tip fix mode. 1 : Independent axis mode. RNC According to a rotation made on the α axis and β axis in manual reference position return operation, the X, Y, and Z coordinates (absolute) and relative coordinates are: 0 : Updated. 1 : Not updated. #7 7942 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 PA5 #0 PA4 [Data type] Bit PA4 This parameter must be set when rotation about the α axis is performed: 0 : In the same direction as that of the basic attitude. 1 : In the direction opposite to that of the basic attitude. PA5 This parameter must be set when rotation about the β axis is performed: 0 : In the same direction as that of the basic attitude. 1 : In the direction opposite to that of the basic attitude. #7 7943 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 TGC [Data type] Bit TGC Interaction control on the α axis is exercised: 0 : With the polarity opposite to that of the β axis command. 1 : With the same polarity as that of the β axis command. 4.53 PARAMETERS OF ATTITUDE CONTROL B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 303 7950 α axis machine zero–degree point offset 7951 β axis machine zero–degree point offset [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] 0.001 deg [Valid data range] 0 to 360000 (Standard setting = 0) These parameters set machine zero–degree point offset values for the α axis and β axis. NOTE Never set a value other than 0, 90000, 180000, or 270000. 7952 Upper limit on α axis machining speed 7953 Upper limit on β axis machining speed [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] deg/min [Valid data range] 6 to 15000 These parameters set the upper limits on the α axis and β axis machining speeds. If the α axis or β axis speeds are greater than the values set in these parameters when attitude control is exercised in sync with move commands for the X–axis, Y–axis, and Z–axis, movement along the X–axis, Y–axis, and Z–axis is performed at feedrates determined from the α axis or β axis speeds, clamped to the specified upper limits. When using interaction control, set the same value for the α axis or β axis. 7954 Length of the first arm 7955 Length of the second arm [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] deg/min [Valid data range] 0 to 500000 These parameters set the lengths of the first and second arms. When using attitude control A (zero offset type nozzle), set 0 for these parameters. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 304 7956 Number of –axis interaction gears 7957 Number of –axis interaction gears [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 127 When the actual number of gears exceeds the valid data range, set the values obtained by dividing the number of β axis gears and the number of β axis gears by the greatest common measure of the two numbers. Example: When the number of α axis gears is 300, and the number of β axis gears is 200 Set 3 for parameter No.7956, and 2 for parameter No.7957 because 300:200 = 3:2. From the number of α axis interaction gears and the number of β axis interaction gears, a β axis synchronous rotation compensation value is calculated, and a command based on the calculated value is automatically sent for the β axis. α axis synchronous rotation compensation value = (α axis rotation amount) (number of β axis synchronous rotation gears)/ (number of βaxis synchronous rotation gears) B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 305 #7 SKE 8001 #6 AUX #5 NCC #4 #3 RDE #2 OVE #1 #0 MLE [Data type] Bit MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK is valid for PMC–controlled axes 0 : Valid 1 : Invalid NOTE Each–axis machine lock signals MLK1 to MLK8 are always valid, regardless of the setting of this parameter. OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control 0: Same signals as those used for the CNC (1) Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 (2) Override cancellation signal OVC (3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1 and ROV2 (4) Dry run signal DRN (5) Rapid traverse selection signal RT 1: Signals specific to the PMC (1) Feedrate override signals *FV0E to *FV7E (2) Override cancellation signal OVCE (3) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E and ROV2E (4) Dry run signal DRNE (5) Rapid traverse selection signal RTE RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PMC axis control 0 : Invalid 1 : Valid NCC When a travel command is issued for a PMC–controlled axis (selected by a controlled–axis selection signal) according to the program: 0 : P/S alarm 139 is issued while the PMC controls the axis with an axis control command. While the PMC does not control the axis, a CNC command is enabled. 1 : P/S alarm 139 is issued unconditionally. AUX The number of bytes for the code of an auxiliary function (12H) command to be output is 0 : 1 (0 to 255) 1 : 2 (0 to 65535) SKE Skip signal during axis control by the PMC 0 : Uses the same signal SKIP (X004#7) as CNC. 1 : Uses dedicated axis control signal ESKIP (X004#6) used by the PMC. NOTE When SKE parameter is set to 1, this signal is valid at the side of 1st path in 2 path control. The SKIP signal is used the same signal as CNC at the side of 2nd path. 4.54 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 306 #7 FR2 8002 #6 FR1 #5 PF2 #4 PF1 #3 F10 #2 SUE #1 DWE #0 RPD [Data type] Bit RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC–controlled axes 0 : Feedrate specified with parameter No.1420 1 : Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command DWE Minimum time which can be specified in a dwell command in PMC axis control when the increment system is IS–C 0 : 1 ms 1 : 0.1 ms SUE Whether acceleration/deceleration is performed for an axis that is synchronized with external pulses, for external pulse synchronization commands in PMC axis control 0 : Performed (exponential acceleration/deceleration) 1 : Not performed F10 Least increment for the feedrate for cutting feed (per minute) in PMC axis control F10 Millimeter input Inch input 0 1 mm/min 0.01 inch/min 1 10 mm/min 0.1 inch/min PF1, PF2 Set the the feedrate unit of feed per minute in PMC axis control PF2 PF1 Feedrate unit 0 0 1/1 0 1 1/10 1 0 1/100 1 1 1/1000 FR1, FR2 Set the feedrate unit for feed per rotation for an axis controlled by the PMC. FR2 FR1 Millimeter input Inch input 0 0 0 0001 mm/rev 0 000001 inch/rev 1 1 0.0001 mm/rev 0.000001 inch/rev 0 1 0.001 mm/rev 0.00001 inch/rev 1 0 0.01 mm/rev 0.0001 inch/rev #7 8003 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 PIM NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit PIM When only the axes controlled by the PMC are used, the linear axis is: 0: Influenced by inch/millimeter input. 1: Not influenced by inch/millimeter input. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 307 #7 NDI 8004 #6 NCI NCI #5 DSL DSL #4 G8R #3 G8C #2 JFM JFM #1 NMT NMT #0 CMV CMV CMV When a move command and auxiliary function are specified from the CNC, and the system is awaiting the auxiliary function completion signal after completion of the specified axis movement: 0 : An alarm (No.130) is issued when an axis control command is issued from the PMC for the same axis. 1 : An axis control command, when issued from the PMC for the same axis, is executed. NMT When a command is specified from the CNC for the axis on which the tool is moving according to axis control specification from the PMC: 0 : P/S alarm No.130 is issued. 1 : The command is executed without issuing an alarm, provided the command does not involve a movement on the axis. JFM This parameter sets the units used to specify feedrate data when continuous feed is specified in axis control by the PMC. Increment system JFM Millimeter input Inch input Rotation axis IS B 0 1 mm/min 0.01 inch/min 0.00023 rpm IS–B 1 200 mm/min 2.00 inch/min 0.046 rpm IS C 0 0.1 mm/min 0.001 inch/min 0.000023 rpm IS–C 1 20 mm/min 0.200 inch/min 0.0046 rpm G8C Look–ahead control for the axes controlled by the PMC is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. NOTE This parameter is valid for an axis for which bit 7 (NAHx) of parameter No.1819 is set to 0. G8R Look–ahead control over axes controlled by the PMC is: 0 : Enabled for cutting feed (disabled for rapid traverse). 1 : Enabled for both cutting feed and rapid traverse. NOTE This parameter is valid for an axis for which bit 7 (NAHx) of parameter No.1819 is set to 0. DSL If the selection of an axis is changed when PMC axis selection is disabled: 0 : P/S alarm No.139 is issued. 1 : The change is valid, and no alarm is issued for an unspecified system. NCI In axis control by the PMC, a position check at the time of deceleration is: 0 : Performed. 1 : Not performed. NDI For PMC axis control, when diameter programming is specified for a PMC–controlled axis: 0 : The amount of travel and feedrate are each specified with a radius. 1 : The amount of travel and feedrate are each specified with a diameter. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 308 NOTE NDI is valid for an axis for which diameter programming is specified (bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1) when bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005 is set to 0. #7 MFD 8005 MFD #6 #5 #4 #3 DRR DRR #2 R10 R10 #1 CDI #0 EDC EDC [Data type] Bit EDC In PMC–based axis control, an external deceleration signal is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. CDI For PMC axis control, when diameter programming is specified for a PMC–controlled axis: 0 : The amount of travel and feedrate are each specified with a radius. 1 : The amount of travel is specified with a diameter while the feedrate is specified with a radius. NOTE 1 This parameter is valid when bit 3 (DIA) of parameter No.1006 is set to 1. 2 When CDI is set to 1, bit 7 (NDI) of parameter No.8004 is disabled. R10 When the RPD parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.8002) is set to 1, the unit for specifying a rapid traverse rate for the PMC axis is: 0 : 1 mm/min. 1 : 10 mm/min. DRR For cutting feed per rotation in PMC axis control, the dry run function is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. MFD Output by each auxiliary function of the PMC axis control function is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 8010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 1 to 4 Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for each PMC–controlled axis. Value Description 1 DI/DO group A (G142 to G153) is used. 2 DI/DO group B (G154 to G165) is used. 3 DI/DO group C (G166 to G177) is used. 4 DI/DO group D (G178 to G189) is used. NOTE If another value is specified, the axis is not PMC–controlled. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 309 8022 Upper–limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control [Data type] Word [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit data Valid data range Increment system Unit data IS–B IS–C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 This parameter sets the upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control. NOTE The upper limit specified for the first axis is valid for all axes. The specifications for the second and subsequent axes are ignored. 8028 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for speed commands for PMC axis control [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms/1000 rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the time required for the servo motor rotation speed to increase or decrease by 1000 rpm, for each axis, as a linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for speed commands for PMC axis control. NOTE If this parameter is set to 0, acceleration/deceleration control is not applied. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 310 #7 8100 #6 DSB #5 COF #4 #3 #2 #1 IAL #0 RST RST [Data type] Bit RST Reset key on the MDI panel 0 : Effective for both paths, or in the M series, for both machining and background drawing sides 1 : Effective for a path selected by the path selection signal, or in the M series, for the background drawing side. IAL When an alarm is raised in one tool post in the automatic operation mode, 0 : The other path enters the feed hold state and stops. 1 : The other path continues operation without stopping. COF Tool post 1 and tool post 2 (under two–path control) use: 0 : Their own tool compensation memories. 1 : Common tool compensation memory. DSB The special single block function (under two–path control) is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 8110 Waiting M code range (minimum value) [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 0 and 100 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the minimum value of the waiting M code. The waiting M code range is specified using parameter 8110 (minimum value) and parameter 8111 (maximum value). (parameter 8110) ≤ (waiting M code) ≤ (parameter 8111) NOTE A value of 0 indicates that the waiting M code is not used. 8111 Waiting M code range (maximum value) [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 0 and 100 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the maximum value of the waiting M code. 4.55 PARAMETERS OF TWO–PATH CONTROL B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 311 #7 8140 #6 #5 ZCL #4 IFE IFE #3 IFM IFM #2 ITO #1 TY1 #0 TY0 [Data type] Bit TY0, TY1 This parameter specifies the relationship between the coordinate systems of the two tool paths. X X X X Z Z Z Z (3) When TY1=1 and TY0=0 (4) When TY1=1 and TY0=1 Tool path 2 Tool path 1 Tool path 1 Tool path 2 (1) When TY1=0 and TY0=0 (2) When TY1=0 and TY0=1 X X Z X Z Z Tool path 1 Tool path 2 Tool path 2 Tool path 1 ITO When offset number 0 is specified by the T code, 0 : Checking interference between tool posts is stopped until an offset number other than 0 is specified by the next T code. 1 : Checking interference between tool posts is continued according to the previously specified offset number. IFM In manual mode, a tool post interference check (T series) and inter–2–path interference check (M series) are: 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. 4.56 PARAMETERS OF CHECKING INTERFERENCE BETWEEN TOOL POSTS (TWO–PATH CONTROL) 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 312 IFE A tool post interference check (T series) and inter–2–path interference check (M series) are: 0 : Performed. 1 : Not performed. ZCL Specifies whether interference along the Z axis is checked while checking interference between tool posts. 0 : Checked 1 : Not checked (Only interference along the X axis is checked.) 8141 Distance along the X–axis from a path–1 reference point to a path–2 reference point 8142 Distance along the Y–axis from a path–1 reference point to a path–2 reference point 8143 Distance along the Z–axis from a path–1 reference point to a path–2 reference point [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Units Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 8144 Interference check area figure data AI (BI) 8145 Interference check area figure data AJ (BJ) 8146 Interference check area figure data AK (BK) 8147 Interference check area figure data AX (BX) 8148 Interference check area figure data AY (BY) 8149 Interference check area figure data AZ (BZ) [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Units Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 313 8151 Distance along the X axis between the reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2 8152 Distance along the Z axis between the reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2 [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millineter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 +X +Z Tool path 1 Tool path 2 Specify the X and Z values (e, z) of the reference position of tool post 2 in parameters 8151 and 8152, respectively, in the Z–X plane coordinate system. However, note that the reference position of tool post 1 is plotted at the zero point. z e NOTE After the parameter values are changed, perform manual reference position return for individual tool posts. Otherwise, data on the positional relationship between the tool posts stored in memory will not be updated to the new parameter values. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 314 #7 NRS 8160 #6 SPE #5 #4 #3 #2 ZSI #1 XSI #0 MXC [Data type] Bit MXC During mixed control of the X– or Z–axis, measurement direct input function B for tool compensation performs calculation based on: 0 : Machine coordinates for the path being controlled 1 : Machine coordinates for another path subject to mixed control NOTE 1 This parameter is valid for setting tool compensation values for the X– or Z axis and setting shift of the workpiece coordinate system for the Z–axis. 2 This parameter cannot be used when mixed control is applied to paths for which different minimum command increments (metric or inch) are specified. XSI When MXC = 1, the machine coordinates along the X–axis for the other path subject to mixed control are fetched: 0 : With the sign as is 1 : With the sign inverted ZSI When MXC = 1, machine coordinates along the Z–axis for the other path subject to mixed control are fetched: 0 : With the sign as is 1 : With the sign inverted SPE The synchronization deviation is: 0 : The difference between the positioning deviation of the master axis and that of the slave axis. 1 : The difference between the positioning deviation of the master axis and that of the slave axis plus the acceleration/deceleration delay. NOTE When the master and slave axes have different acceleration/deceleration time constants, set 1. NRS When the system is reset, synchronous, composite, or superimposed control is: 0 : Released. 1 : Not released. 4.57 PARAMETERS OF PATH AXIS REASSIGNMENT B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 315 #7 8161 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 CZM #0 NMR [Data type] Bit NMR When an axis subject to mixed control is placed in servo–off state: 0 : Mixed control is stopped. 1 : Mixed control is not stopped, provided bit 0 (FUP) of parameter No.1819 is set to 1 to disable follow–up for the axis. NOTE Mixed control is not stopped only when bit 0 (FUP) of parameter No.1819 is set to 1. If follow–up is disabled with the follow–up signal (*FLWU =1), mixed control is stopped. CZM When two Cs contour axes are subject to mixed control, the function for mixing zero point return commands for Cs contour axes is: 0 : Not used 1 : Used #7 MUMx 8162 #6 MCDx #5 MPSx #4 MPMx #3 OMRx #2 PKUx #1 SERx #0 SMRx [Data type] Bit axis SMRx Synchronous mirror–image control is: 0 : Not applied. (The master and slave axes move in the same direction.) 1 : Applied. (The master and slave axes move in opposite directions.) SERx The synchronization deviation is: 0 : Not detected. 1 : Detected. NOTE When both master and slave axes move in synchronization, the positioning deviations of the corresponding axes are compared with each other. If the difference is greater than or equal to the value specified in parameter No.8181, an alarm occurs. When either axis is in the parking or machine–locked state, however, the synchronization deviation is not detected. PKUx In the parking state, 0 : The absolute, relative, and machine coordinates are not updated. 1 : The absolute and relative coordinates are updated. The machine coordinates are not updated. OMRx Superimposed mirror–image control is: 0 : Not applied. (The superimposed pulse is simply added.) 1 : Applied. (The inverted superimposed pulse is added.) MPMx When composite control is started, the workpiece coordinate system is: 0 : Not set automatically. 1 : Set automatically. NOTE When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the start of composite control, it is calculated from the following: Current machine coordinates and the workpiece coordinates at the reference point of each axis (parameter No.8184). 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 316 MPSx When composite control is terminated, the workpiece coordinate system is: 0 : Not set automatically. 1 : Set automatically. NOTE When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the end of composite control, it is calculated from the following: Current machine coordinates and the workpiece coordinates at the reference point of each axis under composite control (parameter No.1250) MCDx The axes to be replaced with each other under composite control have the coordinate systems placed: 0 : In the same direction. Simple composite control is applied. (The axes of paths 1 and 2 move in the same direction.) 1 : In opposite directions. Mirror–image composite control is applied. (The axes of paths 1 and 2 move in opposite directions.) This parameter determines the direction in which an axis moves. The parameter is also used to automatically set the coordinate system when composite control is started or terminated. X1 X2 Z1 Z2 MCDz MCDz 0 0 X1 Z1 X2 Z2 MCDz MCDz 0 1 X2 Z2 Z2 X2 Z1 X1 X1 Z1 MCDz MCDz 1 0 MCDz MCDz 1 1 MUMx In mixed control, a move command for the axis: 0 : Can be specified. 1 : Cannot be specified. NOTE Upon the execution of a move command along an axis for which MUMx is set to 1 during mixed control, alarm P/S No.226 is issued. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 317 #7 NUMx 8163 #6 #5 #4 SCDx #3 SCMx #2 SPSx #1 SPMx #0 MDXx NOTE Set the parameters SPMx, SPSx, SCMx, and SCDx for the master axis. These settings are referenced during automatic workpiece coordinate setting for the master axis at the start of synchronous control. [Data type] Bit axis MDXx In mixed control, the current position (absolute/relative coordinates) display indicates: 0 : Coordinates in the local system. 1 : Coordinates in the other system under mixed control. SPMx When synchronous control is started, automatic workpiece coordinate system setting for the master axis is 0 : Not Performed. 1 : Performed. NOTE When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the start of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate system is calculated from the current machine coordinates and the workpiece coordinates of each axis at the reference position set in parameter No.8185. SPSx When synchronous control terminates, automatic workpiece coordinate system setting for the master axis is: 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. NOTE When a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the end of synchronous control, the workpiece coordinate system is calculated from the current machine coordinates and the workpiece coordinates for each axis at the reference position set in parameter No.1250. SCMx When workpiece coordinates are calculated in synchronous control: 0 : The workpiece coordinates are calculated from the machine coordinates of the slave axis. 1 : The workpiece coordinates are calculated from the machine coordinates of the master axis and slave axis. SCDx The positive (+) directions of the master axis and slave axis in the coordinate system in synchronous control are: 0 : Identical. 1 : Opposite. NUMx When neither synchronous control nor mixed control is applied, a move command for the axis is: 0 : Not disabled. 1 : Disabled. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 318 NOTE If a move command is specified for an axis with NUMx set to 1 when neither synchronous control nor mixed control is applied, P/S alarm No.226 is issued. #7 8164 #6 SOKx #5 OPSx #4 SPNx #3 MCEx #2 MCSx #1 MWEx #0 MWSx [Data type] Bit axis MWSx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, performed when composite control is started, a workpiece shift and position offset are: 0 : Not considered. 1 : Considered. NOTE MWSx is enabled when MPMx is set to 1. MWEx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, performed when composite control is canceled, a workpiece shift and position offset are: 0 : Not considered. 1 : Considered. NOTE MWEx is enabled when MPSx is set to 1. MCSx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, performed when composite control is started: 0 : A workpiece coordinate system is automatically set in the same way as normal. 1 : The coordinate system of the other path subject to axis recomposition is used. NOTE MCSx is enabled when MPMx is set to 1. MCEx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, performed when composite control is canceled: 0 : A workpiece coordinate system is automatically set in the same way as normal. 1 : The coordinate system of the other path subject to axis recomposition is used. NOTE MCEx is enabled when MPSx is set to 1. SPNx Theworkpiececoordinateandrelativecoordinateofaslaveaxissubjectto synchronous control is: 0 : Updated. 1 : Not updated. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 319 OPSx When superimposed control is canceled, control in which an amount of movement along a master axis subject to superimposed control is added to the workpiece coordinate of a slave axis is: 0 : Not applied. 1 : Applied. SOKx If a master axis subject to superimposed control is also subject to synchronous control: 0 : An alarm is issued when superimposed control is started during synchronous control. 1 : No alarm is issued when superimposed control is started during synchronous control. NOTE 1 MWSx and MWEx are mutually exclusive, so that only one of these parameters must be selected. Similarly, MCSx and MCEx are mutually exclusive, so that only one of these parameters must be selected. 2 Specify these parameters for the axis of each path subject to each control function. 8180 Master axis with which an axis is synchronized under synchronous control [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ... to the maximum number of control axes, or 201, 202, 203, ... to 200 plus the maximum number of control axes This parameter specifies the number of the master axis with which an axis is synchronized. When zero is specified, the axis does not become a slave axis and is not synchronized with another axis. When an identical number is specified in two or more axes, one master axis has two or more slave axes. S Exercising synchronous control between two paths In the parameter of a slave axis, specify the axis number of the master axis with which the salve axis is to be synchronized. Setting: 1 to 8 The value specified here must not exceed the maximum number of control axes. (Example 1) Synchronizing the Z2–axis with the Z1–axis Path 1 Path 2 Parameter No.8180x 0 Parameter No.8180x 0 Parameter No.8180z 0 Parameter No.8180z 2 Parameter No.8180c 0 Parameter No.8180y 0 S Exercising synchronous control in a path In the parameter of a slave axis , specify 200 plus the number of the master axis with which the slave axis is to be synchronized. Setting: 201 to 208 The value specified here must not exceed 200 plus the maximum number of control axes. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 320 (Example 2) Synchronizing the Y1–axis with the Z1–axis Tool post 1 Tool post 2 Parameter No.8180x 0 Parameter No.8180x 0 Parameter No.8180z 0 Parameter No.8180z 0 Parameter No.8180c 0 Parameter No.8180y 202 8181 Synchronization error limit of each axis (Synchronous or composite control) [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Unit of detection [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 When the synchronization deviation detected (SERx of Bit #1 parameter No.8162 is set to 1), this parameter specifies the limit of the difference between the positioning deviation of the slave axis and that of the master axis. Set this parameter to the slave axis. 8182 Display of the synchronization error of an axis (synchronous or composite control) [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Unit of detection [Valid data range] 0 or more When the synchronization deviation is detected (SERx of Bit #1 parameter No.8162 is set to 1), this parameter specifies the difference between the positioning deviation of the slave axis and that of the master axis. (The value is used for diagnosis.) The deviation is displayed on the slave side The parameter is only of display. It should not be set. The difference between the positioning deviation is: (Positioning deviation of the master axis) " (Positioning deviation of the slave axis) Plus for a mirror–image synchronization command Minus for a simple synchronization command NOTE Parameter No.8182 is only for display. It cannot be set value. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 321 8183 Axis under composite control in path 1 corresponding to an axis of path 2 [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ... to the maximum number of control axes This parameter specifies an axis of path 1 to be placed under composite control with each axis of path 2. The value specified here must not exceed the maximum number of axes that can be used in path 1. When zero is specified, control of the axis is not replaced under composite control. An identical number can be specified in two or more axes, but composite control cannot be exercised for all of tem at a time. NOTE Specify this parameter only for path 2. (Example 1) Exercising composite control to replace the X1–axis with the X2–axis Tool post 1 Tool post 2 Parameter No.8183x 0 Parameter No.8183x 1 Parameter No.8183z 0 Parameter No.8183z 0 Parameter No.8183c 0 Parameter No.8183y 0 (Example 2) Exercising composite control to replace the Y1–axis with the X2–axis Tool post 1 Tool post 2 Parameter No.8183x 0 Parameter No.8183x 4 Parameter No.8183z 0 Parameter No.8183z 0 Parameter No.8183c 0 Parameter No.8183y 0 8184 Coordinates of the reference point of an axis on the coordinate system of another axis under composite control [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid range] –99999999 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the coordinates of the reference point of an axis on the coordinate system of another axis under composite control. The parameter is validated when MPMx of bit 4 parameter No.8162 is set to 1. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 322 Exercising composite control to replace the X1–axis with the X2–axis X1m ?Z2m Reference point of tool path 1 X1 Z1m ?X2m Zero point of the workpiece coordinate system of tool path 2 Zero point of the workpiece coordinate system of tool path 1 Z1 Z2 ?Z1m Z2m X2 X2m Reference point of tool path 2 (?X1m, ?Z1m) are the coordinates of the reference point of tool path 2 on the workpiece coordinate system of tool post 1. (?X2m, ?Z2m) are the coordinates of the reference point of tool post 1 on the workpiece coordinate system of tool path 2. ?X1m is specified for the X–axis of tool post 1 and ?X2m for the X–axis of tool post 2. If bit 4 of parameter No.8162 MPMx is set to 1 when composite control is started, the workpiece coordinate system satisfying the following conditions is specified: X1 = (Value specified for the X–axis of tool post 1) " (Machine coordinate of X2) Plus when parameter No.8162 MCDx of tool post 1 is set to 0 Minus when parameter No.8162 MCDx of tool post 1 is set to 1 X2 = (Value specified for the X–axis of tool post 2) " (Machine coordinate of X1) Plus when parameter No.8162 MCDx of tool post 2 is set to 0 Minus when parameter No.8162 MCDx of tool post 2 is set to 1 Example B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 323 If bit 5 of parameter No.8162 MPSx is set to 1 when composite control is terminated, the workpiece coordinate system satisfying the following conditions is specified: X1 = Parameter No.1250 of tool post 1 + Machine coordinate of X1 X2 = Parameter No.1250 of tool post 2 + Machine coordinate of X2 8185 Workpiece coordinates on each axis at the reference position [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 This parameter sets the workpiece coordinates on each master axis, subject to synchronous control, when the master and slave axes are at the reference position. This parameter is enabled when SPMx of bit 1 parameter No.8163 is set to 1. Set this parameter for the master axis. 8186 Master axis under superimposed control [Data type] Byte axis [Valid range] 1, 2, 3, ... to number of control axes This parameter specifies the axis number of the master axis under superimposed control. When zero is specified, the axis does not become a slave axis under superimposed control and the move pulse of another axis is not superimposed. 8190 Rapid traverse rate of an axis under superimposed control [Data type] 2–word axis Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000 30 to 48000 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Set a rapid traverse rate for each of the axes when the rapid traverse override of the axes (master and slave axes) under superimposed control is 100%. [Unit of data] [Valid data range] 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 324 8191 F0 velocity of rapid traverse override of an axis under superimposed control [Data type] Word axis Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000 6 to 4800 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000 6 to 12000 This parameter specifies the maximum cutting feedrate for an axis under superimposed control. 8192 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in rapid traverse of an axis under superimposed control [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid range] 0 to 4000 This parameter specifies the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in rapid traverse for each of the axes (master and slave axes) under superimposed control. 8193 Maximum cutting feedrate under superimposed control [Data type] 2 words [Unit of data and valid range] Increment system Unit of data Valid range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 76000 30 to 48000 Rotaion axis 1 deg/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 This parameter specifies the maximum cutting feedrate under superimposed control. [Unit of data] [Valid data range] B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 325 #7 8200 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 AZR #1 #0 AAC NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit AAC 0 : Does not perform angular axis control. 1 : Performs inclined axis control. AZR 0 : The machine tool is moved along the Cartesian axis during manual reference position return along the slanted axis under angular axis control. 1 : The machine tool is not moved along the Cartesian axis during manual reference position return along the slanted axis under angular axis control. 8210 Inclination angle for angular axis control [Data type] 2 words [Unit of data] 0.001 degree [Valid data range] 20000 to 60000 θ : Inclination angle +Z (orthogonal axis) +X (angular axis): Actual movement coordinate system +X Program coordinate system θ 8211 Axis number of a slanted axis subject to slanted axis control 8212 Axis number of a Cartesian axis subject to slanted axis control [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes These parameters set the axis numbers of a slanted axis and Cartesian axis subject to slanted axis control. 4.58 PARAMETERS OF ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 326 #7 MST 8240 #6 ABS #5 SOV #4 TEM #3 REF #2 #1 #0 [Data type] Bit REF Reference position return operation by G28: 0 : Always uses deceleration dogs in the same way as a manual reference position return operation. 1 : Uses deceleration dogs when a reference position has not yet been set, but is performed by rapid traverse when a reference position has already been set (in the same way as an ordinary G28 command). TEM When an offset movement is made in a block containing a T code: 0 : M code and MF are output before a movement along an axis. 1 : M code and MF are output after a movement along an axis. SOV A G110 block: 0 : Overlaps the next block. 1 : Does not overlap the next block. ABS The B–axis command is: 0 : An incremental command. 1 : An absolute command. MST When an M code for starting a movement along the B–axis is specified: 0 : Operation is started after a ready notice using the FIN signal is received. 1 : Operation is started without waiting for a ready notice. #7 8241 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 MDF #1 MDG #0 FXC [Data type] Bit FXC In canned cycle G84: 0 : The spindle is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise after M05 is output. 1 : The spindle is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise without first outputting M05. MDG The initial continuous–state value for starting B–axis operation command registration is: 0 : G00 mode (rapid traverse). 1 : G01 mode (cutting feed). MDF The initial continuous–state value for starting B–axis operation command registration is: 0 : G98 (feed per minute). 1 : G99 (feed per rotation). 4.59 PARAMETERS OF B–AXIS CONTROL B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 327 #7 8242 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 COF [Data type] Bit COF For tool post 1 and tool post 2 (under two–path control): 0 : A separate B–axis offset value is set. 1 : A common B–axis offset value is set. 8250 Axis number used for B–axis control [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes (in one–system control) 11 to ((number of controlled axes for tool post 1) + 10), or 21 to ((number of controlled axes for tool post 2) + 20) (in two–path control) This parameter sets which axis is to be used for B–axis control. In one–system control, set the controlled axis number of a selected B–axis. In two–path control, set the axis number, used for B–axis control on tool post 1, added to 10 when a tool post 1 axis is used. Set an axis number, used for B–axis control on tool post 2, added to 20 when a tool post 2 axis is used. Example of setting: (1) For one–system control When the fourth axis is controlled as the B–axis, set 4 in this parameter. Furthermore, specify a DI/DO number to be used for the fourth axis in parameter No.8010. (2) For two–path control (a) When B–axis control is applied to tool post 1 only When the fourth axis of tool post 1 is controlled as the B–axis, set 14 with this parameter. Furthermore, specify the DI/DO number to be used for the fourth axis with parameter No.8010 for tool post 1. (b) When B–axis control is applied to tool post 2 only When the fourth axis on tool post 2 is controlled as the B–axis, set 24 with this parameter. Furthermore, specify a DI/DO number to be used for the fourth axis in parameter No.8010 for tool post 2. (c) When B–axis control is applied separately to tool post 1 and tool post 2 Make the settings described in (a) and (b) above. (d) When B–axis control is simultaneously applied to both tool post 1 and tool post 2 When the fourth axis for tool post 1 is controlled as the common B–axis, set 14 with this parameter for both tool post 1 and tool post 2. Furthermore, specify a DI/DO number to be used for the fourth axis in parameter No.8010 for tool post 1. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 328 8251 M code (G101) for specifying the start of first program operation 8252 M code (G102) for specifying the start of second program operation 8253 M code (G103) for specifying the start of third program operation [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 6 to 99999999 These parameters set M codes for starting previously registered B–axis operation programs. M codes (such as M30, M98, and M99), already used for other purposes, cannot be set. 8257 T code number for tool offset cancellation [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 90 This parameter sets a T code number for tool offset cancellation. When a T code from (setting + 1) to (setting + 9) is specified, tool offset is specified. 8258 Clearance, used in canned cycle G83, for the B–axis [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 [Unit of data] Increment system IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter input 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inch This parameter sets the clearance used for peck drilling cycle G83. q q q d d d Point B G83 q : Depth of cut d : Clearance Rapid traverse Cutting feed B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 329 #7 8301 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SOF [Data type] Bit SOF The synchronization funciton in simple synchronous control (one pair) is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. #7 8302 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ATS #0 ATE NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit ATE Automatic setting of grid positioning for simplified synchronous control one pair is: 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled ATS Automatic setting of grid positioning for simplified synchronous control one pair is: 0 : Not started 1 : Started NOTE 1 When the bits are set to 1, parameter No.8316 and bit 4 (APZx) of parameter No.1815 for the master and slave axes are set to 0. 2 These bits are automatically set to 0 once grid positioning has been completed. #7 8303 SOFx #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ATSx #0 ATEx NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then on again for the setting to become effective. [Data type] Bit axis ATEx In simple synchronous control, automatic setting for grid positioning is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. ATSx In simple synchronous control, automatic setting for grid positioning is: 0 : Not started. 1 : Started. 4.60 PARAMETERS OF SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 330 NOTE When starting automatic setting for grid positioning, set ATSx to 1. Upon the completion of setting, ATSx is automatically set to 0. SOFx In simple synchronous control, the synchronization function is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. 8311 Axis number of master axis in synchronous control NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte axis Select a master axis and slave axis in simple synchronous control. Set a master axis number with a slave axis. For the parameters for the first axis through the fourth axis of parameter No.8311, set the following: Units digit of the parameter for the first axis –> Set the axis number of a master axis for the first axis. Tens digit of the parameter for the first axis –> Set the axis number of a master axis for the second axis. Units digit of the parameter for the second axis –> Set the axis number of a master axis for the third axis. Tens digit of the parameter for the second axis –> Set the axis number of a master axis for the fourth axis. Units digit of the parameter for the third axis –> Set the axis number of a master axis for the fifth axis. Tens digit of the parameter for the third axis –> Set the axis number of a master axis for the sixth axis. Units digit of the parameter for the fourth axis –> Set the axis number of a master axis for the seventh axis. Tens digit of the parameter for the fourth axis –> Set the axis number of a master axis for the eighth axis. Number Tens digit Units digit First axis Second axis First axis Second axis Fourth axis Third axis Third axis Sixth axis Fifth axis Fourth axis Eighth axis Seventh axis Note that the axis number settings are as follows: 0 –> First axis, 1 –> Second axis, 2 –> Third axis, 3 –> Fourth axis NOTE For an axis for which 0 is set, the first axis serves as the master axis. So, when the control signal for the axis is set to 1, the first axis serves as a master axis, and synchronous control is exercised. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 331 [Valid data range] 0, 1 to Number of controlled axes Select a master axis and slave axis in simple synchronous control. Set a master axis number with the slave axis side. The axis number settings are: 1 –> First axis, 2 –> Second axis, 3 –> Third axis, 4 –> Fourth axis. Up to four pairs can be specified. Example1:Simple synchronous control is exercised with one pair. When using the first axis (X–axis) as the master axis, and the third axis (Z–axis) as the slave axis, set parameter No.8311 as follows: Parameter No. 8311 X (first axis) = 0 Y (second axis) = 0 Z (third axis) = 1 A (fourth axis) = 0 Example2:Simple synchronous control is exercised with three pairs. Assume that the following three pairs are to be used: The master axis is the first axis, while a slave axis is the sixth axis. The master axis is the second axis, while a slave axis is the fifth axis. The master axis is the third axis, while a slave axis is the fourth axis. For this specification, set this parameter as follows: Parameter No.8311 X (First axis) = 0 Y (Second axis) = 0 Z (Third axis) = 0 (Fourth axis) = 3 (Fifth axis) = 2 (Sixth axis) = 1 NOTE The axis number of a master axis must always be smaller than the corresponding slave axis number. Multiple slave axes cannot be assigned to a master axis. 8312 Enabling/disabling mirror image in synchronous control [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] –127 to +128 This parameter sets the mirror image function. When 100 or a greater value is set with this parameter, the mirror image function is applied to synchronous control. Set this parameter to the slave axis. To establish reversed synchronization when using the third axis as the master axis and the fourth axis as the slave axis, set parameter No.8311 and parameter No.8312 as follows: Parameter No.8311 (first axis) = 0 Parameter No.8311 (second axis) = 20 Parameter No.8311 (third axis) = 0 Parameter No.8311 (fourth axis) = 0 Parameter No.8312 (first axis) = 0 Parameter No.8312 (second axis) = 0 Parameter No.8312 (third axis) = 0 Parameter No.8312 (fourth axis) = 100 Example 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 332 8313 Limit of the difference between the amount of positioning deviation of the master and slave axes (Synchronous control one pair) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the limit of the difference between the amount of positioning deviation of the master and slave (fourth) axes. If the difference between them exceeds the limit assigned to the parameter, the P/S alarm (No.213) is activated. 8314 Maximum error in synchronization error check [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Units Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 The machine coordinates on a master axis and slave axis are monitored. If a difference (synchronization error) which is greater than the value specified in this parameter is detected, a servo alarm (No.407) is generated, and the machine is stopped. Set this parameter with a master axis. When 0 is set in this parameter, no synchronization error check is made. 8315 Maximum compensation value for synchronization (Synchronous control one pair) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Unit used for the detection [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum compensation value for synchronization. When a compensation value greater than the value set in this parameter is used, servo alarm No.407 is issued. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 333 8316 Difference between reference counters for master and slave axes (Synchronous control one pair) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] 2–word [Data unit] Detection unit [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 This parameter indicates the difference between the values in the reference counter for the master axis and that for the slave axis. NOTE Once grid positioning has been completed, the difference between the reference counters is automatically set in this parameter. At this time, bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No.8302 is set to 0. 8317 Torque difference alarm detection time (Synchronous control one pair) [Data type] Word [Data unit] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (When 0 is set, 512 ms is assumed.) This parameter specifies the period between the servo preparation completion signal (SA ) being set to 1 and the check of the torque difference alarm being started, for the torque difference alarm detection function. The set value is rounded up to the nearest a multiple of 16 ms. When 100 is specified, 112 ms is assumed. 8323 Maximum allowable difference between master axis and slave axis positional deviations [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum allowable difference between the master axis and slave axis position deviations. If a positional deviation difference exceeds the value specified in this parameter, an alarm (No.213) is issued. Set this parameter with a master axis. If 0 is specified in this parameter, no position deviation difference check is made. [Example] 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 334 8325 Maximum compensation value for synchronization [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum compensation value for synchronization. If a compensation value exceeds the value specified with this parameter, a servo alarm (No.407) is issued. Specify a master axis for this parameter. To enable this parameter, set the SOFx parameter (bit 7 of parameter No.8303) to 1. 8326 Difference between master axis and slave axis reference counters [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 The difference between the master axis reference counter and slave axis reference counter (master axis and slave axis grid shift) is automatically set when automatic setting for grid positioning is performed. Then, the difference is transferred together with an ordinary grid shift value to the servo system when the power is turned on. This parameter is set with a master axis. 8327 Torque difference alarm detection timer [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 This parameter sets a time from the servo preparation completion signal, SA (F000#6), being set to 1 until torque difference alarm detection is started in simple synchronous control. A fraction of less than 16 msec is rounded up. Example: Setting = 100: The specification of 112 msec is assumed. Set this parameter with a master axis. If 0 is set in this parameter, the specification of 512 msec is assumed. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 335 8341 Program number subject to check termination [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 This parameter sets the program number, including a sequence number, subject to sequence number check termination. Parameter No.8342 is used to set a sequence number subject to check termination. NOTE A program number can also be set on the setting screen. If a program number is set on the setting screen, the value of the parameter is changed accordingly. 8342 Sequence number subject to check termination [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 This parameter sets the sequence number subject to sequence number check termination. If the block containing the sequence number set with this parameter is executed while the program set with parameter No.8341 is being executed, a single block stop occurs after the block is executed. At this time, the setting is automatically set to –1. Upon power–up, the setting is automatically set to 0. NOTE A sequence number can also be set by using the setting screen. If a sequence number is set on the setting screen, the value of the parameter is changed accordingly. 8343 Program number where collation is to be stopped (when an 8–digit program number is used) [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 When a sequence number check is to be stopped, this parameter sets the program number to which a sequence number where the check is to be stopped belongs. Set a stop sequence number in parameter No.8342. 4.61 PARAMETERS OF CHECK TERMINATION 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 336 #7 8360 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ROV CHF [Data type] Bit ROV For the chopping function, a rapid traverse override for a section from the current position to the R point is determined as follows: 0 : A chopping override is enabled. 1 : An ordinary rapid traverse override is enabled. CHF On the chopping screen, the chopping speed can: 0 : Be set. 1 : Not be set. 8370 Chopping axis [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to the number of controlled axes This parameter specifies which servo axis the chopping axis corresponds to. 8371 Chopping reference point (R point) 8372 Chopping upper dead point 8373 Chopping lower dead point [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 The data set in these parameters are absolute coordinates. 8374 Chopping speed [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Increment system Unit Linear axis (metric input) 1.00 mm/min Linear axis (inch input) 0.01 inch/min Valid data range : For IS–A and –B, 240000 mm/min or 9600 inches/min For IS–C, 100000 mm/min or 4800 inches/min 4.62 PARAMETERS OF CHOPPING B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 337 8375 Maximum chopping feedrate [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Increment system Unit of data Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Metric machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000 30 to 48000 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 30 to 240000 30 to 100000 The chopping speed is clamped at a value specified in this parameter. When the parameter is 0, no chopping operation occurs. 8376 Chopping compensation scaling factor [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 This parameter specifies a scaling factor used to multiply the compensation value for a servo delay or acceleration/deceleration delay in an chopping operation. When this parameter is 0, servo delay compensation will not be applied. 8377 Compensation start tolerance [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Compensation is applied when the difference between an amount of shortage at the upper dead point and that at the lower dead point is less than the value specified in this parameter. In other words, this parameter is used to enable compensation after the chopping operation settles. When the parameter is 0, compensation will not be applied. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 338 8400 Parameter 1 for determining a linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] [Valid range] Increment system Unit Valid range Increment system Unit IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 10 to 60000 1 to 6000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 10 to 60000 1 to 6000 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 10 to 60000 1 to 6000 This parameter determines a linear acceleration and deceleration before interpolation. Usually,set the maximum cutting speed (parameter No.1422). 8401 Parameter 2 for determining a linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid range] 0 to 4000 This parameter specifies the time required until the speed specified in parameter 1 is achieved. When the bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is used, the data specified in parameter 1 and parameter 2 determines the maximum acceleration of bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before look ahead interpolation. NOTE The function for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is canceled when either parameter No.8400 or 8401 is set to 0. Velocity Parameter 1 (No.8400) Time Parameter2 (No.8401) maximum acceleration 4.63 PARAMETERS OF HIGH–SPEED HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL BY RISC (M SERIES) 4.63.1 Parameters of Acceleration and Deceleration before Interpolation B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 339 #7 8402 #6 #5 DST #4 BLK #3 #2 #1 NBL #0 BDO [Data type] Bit NBL, BDO Select the type of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. BDO NBL Meaning 0 0 Linear type is used for acceleration/deceleration prior to pre–read interpolation 1 1 Bell–shape type is used for acceleration/deceleration prior to pre–read interpolation BLK Be sure to set 0. DST Be sure to set 1. #7 8403 #6 #5 #4 #3 LM2 #2 LM1 #1 MSU #0 SGO [Data type] Bit MSU When G00, or an M, S, T, or B code is specified in HPCC mode: 0 : An alarm is issued. 1 : The CNC executes the command. LM1 In HPCC mode, a strokek check before movement for stored stroke limit 1 is: 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. LM2 In HPCC mode, a strokek check before movement for the stored stroke limit is –2: 0 : Not performed. 1 : Performed. SG0 When G00 is specified in HPCC mode: 0 : The setting of bit 1 (MSU) of parameter No.8403 is followed. 1 : The tool is moved along the axis at the feedrate set with parameter No.8481, replacing the G00 command with the G01 command, regardless of the setting made for bit 1 (MSU) of parameter No.8403. #7 8404 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 STG [Data type] Bit STG The positioning command (G00) is: 0 : Executed with the RISC board in a simplified manner. 1 : Executed with the RISC board in the same way as normal. NOTE This parameter is enabled when the SG0 parameter (bit 7 of parameter No.8403) is set to 1. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 340 8410 Allowable velocity difference in velocity determination considering the velocity difference at corners [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] [Valid range] Increment system Unit Valid range Increment system Unit IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 10 to 60000 1 to 6000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 10 to 60000 1 to 6000 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 10 to 60000 1 to 6000 If zero specified for all axes, the machine does not decelerate at corners. When the function for determining the velocity considering the velocity difference at corners is used, the system calculates the feedrate whereby a change in the velocity element of each axisdoes not exceed this parameter value at the interface between blocks. Then the machine decelerates using acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. 8416 Look–ahead bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] ms [Valid range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the time required to reach the feedrate set with parameter No.8400 or No.8401 in look–ahead bell–shaped #7 8451 #6 #5 #4 ZAG #3 #2 #1 #0 USE NOF Setting point [Data type] Bit USE Automatic velocity control is: 0 : Not applied. 1 : Applied. ZAG The velocity is: 0 : Not determined according to the angle at which the machine descends along the Z–axis. 1 : Determined according to the angle at which the machine descends along the Z–axis. NOF In a block where automatic velocity control is validated, the F command is: 0 : Validated. 1 : Ignored. 4.63.2 Parameters of Automatic Velocity Setting B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 341 8452 Range of velocity fluctuation to be ignored Setting input [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid range] 0 to 100 (Standard setting: 10) 8456 Area–2 override [Data type] Word [Unit of data] % [Valid range] 0 to 100 (Standard setting: 80) This parameter specifies an override in area 2 of velocity calculation considering the cutting load. 8457 Area–3 override [Data type] Word [Unit of data] % [Valid range] 0 to 100 (Standard setting: 70) This parameter specifies an override in area 3 of velocity calculation considering the cutting load. 8458 Area–4 override [Data type] Word [Unit of data] % [Unit of data] 0 to 100 (Standard setting: 60) This parameter specifies an override in area 4 of velocity calculation considering the cutting load. #7 8459 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 CTY #0 CDC [Data type] Bit CDC Be sure to set to 0. CTY Be sure to set to 1. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 342 8464 Initial feedrate for automatic feedrate control [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data and valid range] Increment system Unit Valid range Increment system Unit IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0 to 600000 0 to 60000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0 to 600000 0 to 60000 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 0 to 600000 0 to 60000 This parameter sets the initial feedrate for automatic feedrate control. In automatic feedrate control, the initial feedrate set with this parameter is used at the beginning if no F command is specified in the program. Usually, set the maximum cutting feedrate (specified in parameter No.1422). 8465 Maximum allowable feedrate for automatic feedrate control [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data and valid range] Increment system Unit Valid range Increment system Unit IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0 to 600000 0 to 60000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0 to 600000 0 to 60000 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 0 to 600000 0 to 60000 This parameter sets the maximum allowable feedrate for automatic feedrate control. Usually, setthe maximum allowable cutting feedrate (set in parameter No.1422). 8470 Parameter for determining allowable acceleration in velocity calculation consid- ering acceleration [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid range] 0 to 32767 When the function for calculating the velocity concidering the acceleration is used under automatic velocity control, this parameter is used to determine the allaoable acceleration. The time required until the maximum cutting speed (parameter No.1422) is reached must be specified here. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 343 #7 8475 #6 #5 #4 #3 CIR #2 BIP #1 #0 [Data type] Bit CIR The function of automatic velocity control considering acceleration and deceleration during circular interpolation is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. NOTE When 1 is set, parameter No.8470 for determining the allowable acceleration must be specified. BIP The function of deceleration at corners is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. (Always set 1.) #7 8480 #6 RI2 #5 RI1 #4 RI0 #3 #2 #1 #0 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit RI2, RI1, RI0 Always set the following values. RI2 RI1 RI0 Setting 0 1 0 8481 Rapid traverse rate in HPCC mode [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data and valid range] Increment system Unit Valid range Increment system Unit IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 0 to 600000 0 to 60000 Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 0 to 600000 0 to 60000 Rotation axis 1 deg/min 0 to 600000 0 to 60000 When bit 7 (SG0) of parameter No.8403 is set to 1, this parameter sets the rapid traverse ratein the HPCC mode. NOTE The G00 command is replaced with the G01 command before execution. So, even if feedrate is specified for two axes, the rapid traverse rate set with this parameter is always used. [Example] If the following command is specified when a rapid traverse rate of 1000 mm/min is set F1000, rather than F1414, is used: G00 X100.Y100.; 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 344 #7 8485 #6 #5 CDS #4 INV #3 PRW #2 GO2 #1 G81 #0 G51 [Data type] Bit G51 In high–precision contour control (HPCC) mode, scaling/coordinate system rotation is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. G81 In high–precision contour control (HPCC) mode, a hole machining canned cycle is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. G02 In high–precision contour control (HPCC) mode, helical interpolation is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. PRW In high–precision contour control (HPCC) mode, parameter rewriting using the PMC window is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. INV In high–precision contour control (HPCC) mode, involute interpolation is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. CDS In high–precision contour control (HPCC) mode, smooth interpolation is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 8486 Maximum travel distance of a block where smooth interpolation is applied [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Least input increment (depending on the set reference axis) [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter specifies a block length used as a reference to decide whether to apply smooth interpolation. If the line specified in a block is longer than the value set in the parameter, smooth interpolation will not be applied to that block. This parameter can be used, for example, to specify the maximum line length of a folded line to which a metal die workpiece is approximated with some tolerance. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 345 7510 Maximum number of axes controllled by RISC [Data type] Byte [Valid range] 1, 2, 3, ... to the maximum number of control axes This parameter specifies the maximum number of axes to be controlled by RISC. Six axes are provided. Starting from the first axis, they are the X–axis, Y–axis, Z–axis, A–axis, B–axis, and C–axis. To control the fourth axis (A–axis) by RISC, specify 4. When 4 is specified, X–, Y–, and Z–axes are also controlled by RISC. X–, Y–, Z–, and A–axes: Controlled by RISC B– and C–axes: Not controlled by RISC 4.63.3 Parameters of Axis Control [Example] 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 346 #7 8650 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 CNA #0 RSK [Data type] Bit RSK When the RESET key is pressed, the key code is: 0 : Not passed to the application. 1 : Passed to the application. CNA When an NC alarm is issued during the display of the user screen for the C executor: 0 : The NC alarm screen can be displayed depending on the setting of bit 7 (NPA) of parameter No.3111. 1 : The NC alarm screen is not displayed. NOTE This parameter is used with the C executor. Any modifications to the value set for this parameter does not become effective until after the system is next powered on. #7 8701 #6 CTV #5 #4 #3 #2 WPR WPR #1 PLD PLD #0 [Data type] Bit PLD When the P–code loader function is used (macro compiler/executor): 0 : AM is initialized and the entire contents of RAM are rewritten. 1 : RAM is not initialized, being overwritten instead WPR The function that allows parameters that are rewritten using the PMC window to be enabled during automatic operation is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. CTV When CAP II is provided, 1 must be specified. #7 8703 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 LCL #0 DLF [Data type] Bit DLF If an incomplete program file is created because program registration, performed via a communication board such as MAP is interrupted by a reset or alarm, the file is: 0 : Not deleted. 1 : Deleted. NOTE This parameter is used with the OSI/Ethernet function. LCL When a change in the internal state of the CNC (such as a change in the number of part programs or selected programs) occurs, information about the change is: 0 : Not sent to the host. 1 : Sent to the host. 4.64 OTHER PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 347 NOTE This parameter is used with the OSI/Ethernet function. 8760 Program number for data registration (data input/output function using the I/O link) [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 When the data input/output function using the I/O link is used, this parameter sets the program numbers of the programs to be used for registering data (parameters, macro variables, and diagnostic data) from Power Mates. For a Power Mate in group n, the following program numbers are used: For parameters: Setting + n 10 + 0 For macro variables: Setting + n 10 + 1 For diagnostic data: Setting + n 10 + 2 Example: When 8000 is set 8000: Parameters of group 0 (I/O channel = 20) 8001: Macro variables of group 0 (I/O channel = 20) 8002: Diagnostic data of group 0 (I/O channel = 20) 8010: Parameters of group 1 (I/O channel = 21) 8011: Macro variables of group 1 (I/O channel = 21) 8012: Diagnostic data of group 1 (I/O channel = 21) 8020: Parameters of group 2 (I/O channel = 22) 8021: Macro variables of group 2 (I/O channel = 22) 8022: Diagnostic data of group 2 (I/O channel = 22) 8150: Parameters of group 15 (I/O channel = 35) 8151: Macro variables of group 15 (I/O channel = 35) 8152: Diagnostic data of group 15 (I/O channel = 35) NOTE When 0 is set, the input/output of parameters, macro variables, and diagnostic data cannot be performed, but program input/output processing is performed. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 348 8781 Amount of DRAM used with the C executor NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 64k Byte [Valid data range] 16 to 64 This parameter sets the amount of DRAM to be used by the C executor. Specify a size of no less than 1024K bytes, in multiples of 64K bytes. If a value that exceeds the valid data range is specified, 0 is assumed. NOTE The available size depends on the amount of installed DRAM and the selected options. 8790 Timing for executing an auxiliary macro [Data type] Word [Unit of data] This parameter sets the timing for executing a macro executor auxiliary macro while NC programs, offset data, and so forth are being read or punched out. When as many characters as the number specified with this parameter are read or punched out, an auxiliary macro is executed once. When 0 is set in this parameter, no auxiliary macro is executed during read or punch processing. #7 8801 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 [Data type] Bit Bit parameter 1 for machine tool builder #7 8802 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 [Data type] Bit Bit parameter 2 for machine tool builder NOTE These parameters are used only by the machine tool builder. Refer to the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder for details. B–63010EN/01 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 349 8811 2–word parameter 1 for machine tool builder 8812 2–word parameter 2 for machine tool builder 8813 2–word parameter 3 for machine tool builder [Data type] 2–word [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 NOTE These parameters are used only by the machine tool builder. Refer to the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder for details. 4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B–63010EN/01 350 #7 8901 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 FAN [Data type] Bit FAN A fan motor error is: 0 : Detected. (Whenthefanmotorerrorisdetected,anoverheatingalarm occurs.) 1 : Not detected. (Use inhibited) 8911 Ratio of the items on the periodic maintenance screen to the respective lives [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 1% [Valid data range] 0 to 100 On the periodic maintenance screen, if the remaining time of an item falls to a value less than the percentage of the life specified in this parameter, the remaining time is displayed in red as a warming. 4.65 PARAMETERS OF MAINTENANCE APPENDIX B–63010EN/01 A. CHARACTER CODE LIST APPENDIX 353 ACHARACTER CODE LIST Character Code Comment Character Code Comment A 065 6 054 B 066 7 055 C 067 8 056 D 068 9 057 E 069 032 Space F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark G 071 " 034 Quotation marks H 072 # 035 Shape I 073 $ 036 Dollar mark J 074 % 037 Percent K 075 & 038 Ampersand L 076 ' 039 Apostrophe M 077 ( 040 Left parenthesis N 078 ) 041 Right parenthesis O 079 * 042 Asterisk P 080 + 043 Positive sign Q 081 , 044 Comma R 082 – 045 Negative sign S 083 . 046 Period T 084 / 047 Slash U 085 : 058 Colon V 086 ; 059 Semicolon W 087 < 060 Left angle bracket X 088 = 061 Equal sign Y 089 > 062 Right angle bracket Z 090 ? 063 Question mark 0 048 @ 064 Commercial at mark 1 049 [ 091 Left square bracket 2 050 ? 092 Yen mark 3 051 ] 093 Right square bracket 4 052 ^ 094 5 053 095 Underline Index B–63010EN/01 i–1 [C] Character Code List, 353 [D] Description of Parameters, 7 Displaying Parameters, 1 [ I ] Inputting and Outputting Parameters Through the Reader/Puncher Interface, 4 Inputting Parameters through the Reader/Puncher Interface, 6 [O] Other Parameters, 346 Outputting Parameters through the Reader/Puncher Interface, 5 [P] Parameter of canned Cycle for Drilling, 193 Parameter of Multiple Repetitive Canned Cycle, 197 Parameter of Thread Cutting Cycle, 197 Parameters Common to all Channels, 13 Parameters of Acceleration and Deceleration before Interpolation, 338 Parameters of Acceleration/ Deceleration Control, 62 Parameters of Angular Axis Control, 325 Parameters of Attitude Control, 302 Parameters of Automatic Tool Compensation (T Series) and Automatic Tool Length Compensation (M Series), 258 Parameters of Automatic Velocity Setting, 340 Parameters of Axis Control, 345 Parameters of Axis Control by PMC, 305 Parameters of Axis Control/ Increment System, 30 Parameters of B–Axis Control, 326 Parameters of Ball screw Extensional Compensation, 241 Parameters of Canned Cycles, 193 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0), 14 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1), 15 Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2), 15 Parameters of Channel 3 (I/O CHANNEL=3), 16 Parameters of Check Termination, 335 Parameters of Checking Interference between Tool Posts (Two–path Control), 311 Parameters of Chopping, 336 Parameters of Coordinates, 38 Parameters of Custom Macros, 243 Parameters of Data Server, 28 Parameters of Di/Do, 107 Parameters of Displaying Operation Time and Num- ber of Parts, 265 Parameters of DNC1 Interface, 24 Parameters of DNC1/DNC2 Interface, 18 Parameters of Exponential Interpolation, 238 Parameters of External Data Input/Output, 259 Parameters of Feedrate, 51 Parameters of Graphic Color, 263 Parameters of Graphic Display, 260 Parameters of Graphic Display/Dynamic Graphic Dis- play, 260 Parameters of Grinding–wheel Wear Compensation, 192 Parameters of High–Speed High–Precision Contour Control by RISC (M series), 338 Parameters of High–Speed Machining (High–Speed Cycle Machining/High–S peed Remote Buffer), 289 Parameters of Indexing Index Table, 233 Parameters of Involute Interpolation, 235 Parameters of M–NET Interface, 21 Parameters of Maintenance, 350 Parameters of Manual Handle Feed, Handle Interrup- tion and Handle Feed in Tool Axial Direction, 277 Parameters of Manual Operation and Automatic Operation, 275 Parameters Of Mdi, Display, And Edit, 111 Parameters of Normal Direction Control, 230 Parameters of Online Custom Screen, 26 Parameters of Path Axis Reassignment, 314 Parameters of Pattern Data Input, 250 Parameters of Peck Drilling Cycle of a Small Diame- ter, 200 Parameters of Pitch Error Compensation, 144 Parameters of Polar Coordinate Interpolation, 228 Parameters of Polygon Turning, 292 Parameters of Position Switch Functions, 273 Parameters of Positioning by Optimul Acceleration, 251 Parameters of Power Motion Manager, 29 Index B–63010EN/01 i–2 Parameters of Programs, 135 Parameters of reader/puncher interface, remote buffer, dnc1, dnc2, and m–net interface, 12 Parameters of Reference Position Setting with Mechanical Stopper, 282 Parameters of Rigid Tapping, 204 Parameters of Scaling/Coordinate Rotation, 225 Parameters of Servo, 80 Parameters of Setting , 9 Parameters of Simple Synchronous Control, 329 Parameters of Skip Function, 253 Parameters of Software Operator's Panel, 284 Parameters of Spindle Control, 149 Parameters of Straightness Compensation, 239 Parameters of Stroke Check, 43 Parameters of the Chuck and Tailstock Barrier (T Series), 47 Parameters of the External Pulse Input, 296 Parameters of the Hobbing Machine and Simple Elec- tric Gear Box, 297 Parameters of Tool Compensation, 181 Parameters of Tool Life Management, 268 Parameters of Two–path Control, 310 Parameters of Uni–directional Positioning, 227 [S] Setting Parameters from MDI, 2 Revision Record FANUC ? Series ? 16 i /18 i /160 i /180 i – MODEL A PARAMETER MANUAL (B–63010EN) 01 Apr., '97 Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents · No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. · All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.